initial commit of ebook 26653HEADmain

1 files changed, 12078 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/26653.txt b/26653.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f2d57c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/26653.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12078 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Up The Baltic, by Oliver Optic
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Up The Baltic
+       Young America in Norway, Sweden, and Denmark
+
+Author: Oliver Optic
+
+Release Date: September 18, 2008 [EBook #26653]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK UP THE BALTIC ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by David Edwards, Anne Storer and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from scans of public domain material
+produced by Microsoft for their Live Search Books site.)
+
+
+
+
+
+ Transcribers note:
+ In this text the breve has been rendered as [)a] and the macron [=a]
+
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: YOUNG AMERICA IN NORWAY. Page 159.]
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+ YOUNG AMERICA ABROAD
+
+ UP THE BALTIC
+
+ BOSTON
+ LEE & SHEPARD.
+
+
+
+
+_YOUNG AMERICA ABROAD--SECOND SERIES._
+
+
+ UP THE BALTIC;
+
+ OR,
+
+ YOUNG AMERICA IN NORWAY,
+ SWEDEN, AND DENMARK.
+
+
+ A STORY OF TRAVEL AND ADVENTURE.
+
+ BY
+ WILLIAM T. ADAMS.
+ (_OLIVER OPTIC_),
+
+ AUTHOR OF "OUTWARD BOUND," "SHAMROCK AND THISTLE," "RED CROSS,"
+ "DIKES AND DITCHES," "PALACE AND COTTAGE," "DOWN THE RHINE," ETC.
+
+
+ BOSTON:
+ LEE AND SHEPARD, PUBLISHERS.
+ NEW YORK:
+ LEE, SHEPARD AND DILLINGHAM,
+ NOS. 47 AND 49 GREENE ST.
+ 1875.
+
+
+
+
+ Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1871,
+ BY WILLIAM T. ADAMS,
+ In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.
+
+
+ Electrotyped at the Boston Stereotype Foundry,
+ No. 19 Spring Lane.
+
+
+
+
+TO MY EVER-CHEERFUL AND GOOD-NATURED FRIEND
+
+SHEPARD K. MATTISON,
+
+WHOM I MET FOR THE FIRST TIME AT TROLLHAeTTEN, ON THE GOETA CANAL, AND
+WITH WHOM I JOURNEYED THROUGH SWEDEN, RUSSIA, AUSTRIA, SPAIN, AND
+PORTUGAL,
+
+_This Volume_
+
+IS RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED.
+
+
+
+
+ YOUNG AMERICA ABROAD.
+ BY OLIVER OPTIC.
+
+
+A Library of Travel and Adventure in Foreign Lands. First and Second
+Series; six volumes in each Series. 16mo. Illustrated.
+
+
+_First Series._
+
+   I. _OUTWARD BOUND_; OR, YOUNG AMERICA AFLOAT.
+  II. _SHAMROCK AND THISTLE_; OR, YOUNG AMERICA IN IRELAND AND SCOTLAND.
+ III. _RED CROSS_; OR, YOUNG AMERICA IN ENGLAND AND WALES.
+  IV. _DIKES AND DITCHES_; OR, YOUNG AMERICA IN HOLLAND AND BELGIUM.
+   V. _PALACE AND COTTAGE_; OR, YOUNG AMERICA IN FRANCE AND SWITZERLAND.
+  VI. _DOWN THE RHINE_; OR, YOUNG AMERICA IN GERMANY.
+
+
+_Second Series._
+
+   I. _UP THE BALTIC_; OR, YOUNG AMERICA IN NORWAY, SWEDEN, AND DENMARK.
+  II. _NORTHERN LANDS_; OR, YOUNG AMERICA IN RUSSIA AND PRUSSIA.
+           In preparation.
+ III. _CROSS AND CRESCENT_; OR, YOUNG AMERICA IN TURKEY AND GREECE.
+           In preparation.
+  IV. _SUNNY SHORES_; OR, YOUNG AMERICA IN ITALY AND AUSTRIA.
+           In preparation.
+   V. _VINE AND OLIVE_; OR, YOUNG AMERICA IN SPAIN AND PORTUGAL.
+           In preparation.
+  VI. _ISLES OF THE SEA_; OR, YOUNG AMERICA HOMEWARD BOUND.
+           In preparation.
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+
+UP THE BALTIC, the first volume of the second series of "YOUNG AMERICA
+ABROAD," like its predecessors, is a record of what was seen and done
+by the young gentlemen of the Academy Squadron on its second voyage to
+Europe, embracing its stay in the waters of Norway, Sweden, and
+Denmark. Agreeably to the announcement made in the concluding volume
+of the first series, the author spent the greater portion of last year
+in Europe. His sole object in going abroad was to obtain the material
+for the present series of books, and in carrying out his purpose, he
+visited every country to which these volumes relate, and, he hopes,
+properly fitted himself for the work he has undertaken.
+
+In the preparation of UP THE BALTIC, the writer has used, besides his
+own note-books, the most reliable works he could obtain at home and in
+Europe, and he believes his geographical, historical, and political
+matter is correct, and as full as could be embodied in a story. He has
+endeavored to describe the appearance of the country, and the manners
+and customs of the people, so as to make them interesting to young
+readers. For this purpose these descriptions are often interwoven with
+the story, or brought out in the comments of the boys of the squadron.
+
+The story is principally the adventures of the crew of the second
+cutter, who attempted "an independent excursion without running away,"
+which includes the career of a young Englishman, spoiled by his
+mother's indulgence, and of a Norwegian waif, picked up by the
+squadron in the North Sea.
+
+The author is encouraged to enter upon this second series by the
+remarkable and unexpected success which attended the publication
+of the first series. Difficult as it is to work the dry details of
+geography and history into a story, the writer intends to persevere in
+his efforts to make these books instructive, as well as interesting;
+and he is confident that no reader will fail to distinguish the good
+boys from the bad ones of the story, or to give his sympathies to the
+former.
+
+  HARRISON SQUARE, BOSTON,
+    May 10, 1871.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+                                                  PAGE
+     I.  A WAIF ON THE NORTH SEA                    11
+    II.  OFF THE NAZE OF NORWAY                     27
+   III.  AN ACCIDENT TO THE SECOND CUTTER           43
+    IV.  NORWAY IN THE PAST AND THE PRESENT         59
+     V.  MR. CLYDE BLACKLOCK AND MOTHER             76
+    VI.  A DAY AT CHRISTIANSAND                     92
+   VII.  UP THE CHRISTIANIA FJORD                  110
+  VIII.  SIGHTS OF CHRISTIANIA, AND OTHER MATTERS  128
+    IX.  THE EXCURSION WITHOUT RUNNING AWAY        146
+     X.  GOTTENBURG AND FINKEL                     164
+    XI.  ON THE WAY TO THE RJUKANFOS               181
+   XII.  THE BOATSWAIN AND THE BRITON              201
+  XIII.  THE MEETING OF THE ABSENTEES              218
+   XIV.  THROUGH THE SOUND TO COPENHAGEN           237
+    XV.  COPENHAGEN AND TIVOLI                     255
+   XVI.  EXCURSION TO KLAMPENBORG AND ELSINORE     274
+  XVII.  TO STOCKHOLM BY GOETA CANAL                292
+ XVIII.  UP THE BALTIC                             310
+   XIX.  THE CRUISE IN THE LITTLE STEAMER          329
+    XX.  STOCKHOLM AND ITS SURROUNDINGS            349
+
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+ UP THE BALTIC;
+ OR,
+ YOUNG AMERICA IN NORWAY, SWEDEN, AND DENMARK.
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+A WAIF ON THE NORTH SEA.
+
+
+"Boat on the weather bow, sir!" shouted the lookout on the top-gallant
+forecastle of the Young America.
+
+"Starboard!" replied Judson, the officer of the deck, as he discovered
+the boat, which was drifting into the track of the ship.
+
+"Starboard, sir!" responded the quartermaster in charge of the wheel.
+
+"Steady!" added the officer.
+
+"Steady, sir," repeated the quartermaster.
+
+By this time a crowd of young officers and seamen had leaped upon the
+top-gallant forecastle, and into the weather rigging, to obtain a view
+of the little boat, which, like a waif on the ocean, was drifting down
+towards the coast of Norway. It contained only a single person, who
+was either a dwarf or a boy, for he was small in stature. He lay upon
+a seat near the stern of the boat, with his feet on the gunwale. He
+was either asleep or dead, for though the ship had approached within
+hail, he neither moved nor made any sign. The wind was light from the
+southward, and the sea was quite calm.
+
+"What do you make of it, Ryder?" called the officer of the deck to the
+second master, who was on duty forward.
+
+"It is a flat-bottomed boat, half full of water, with a boy in it,"
+answered Ryder.
+
+"Hail him," added the officer of the deck.
+
+"Boat, ahoy!" shouted Ryder, at the top of his lungs.
+
+The person in the boat, boy or man, made no reply. Ryder repeated the
+hail, but with no better success. The officers and seamen held their
+breath with interest and excitement, for most of them had already come
+to the conclusion that the occupant of the boat was dead. A feeling
+akin to horror crept through the minds of the more timid, as they
+gazed upon the immovable body in the dilapidated craft; for they felt
+that they were in the presence of death, and to young people this is
+always an impressive season. By this time the ship was within a short
+distance of the water-logged bateau. As the waif on the ocean
+exhibited no signs of life, the first lieutenant, in charge of the
+vessel, was in doubt as to what he should do.
+
+Though he knew that it was the first duty of a sailor to assist a
+human being in distress, he was not sure that the same effort was
+required in behalf of one who had already ceased to live. Captain
+Cumberland, in command of the ship, who had been in the cabin when
+the excitement commenced, now appeared upon the quarter-deck, and
+relieved the officer of the responsibility of the moment. Judson
+reported the cause of the unwonted scene on deck, and as the captain
+discovered the little boat, just on the weather bow, he promptly
+directed the ship to be hove to.
+
+"Man the main clew-garnets and buntlines!" shouted the first
+lieutenant; and the hands sprang to their several stations. "Stand by
+tack and sheet."
+
+"All ready, sir," reported the first midshipman, who was on duty in
+the waist.
+
+"Let go tack and sheet! Up mainsail!" continued Ryder.
+
+The well-trained crew promptly obeyed the several orders, and the
+mainsail was hauled up in much less time than it takes to describe the
+manoeuvre.
+
+"Man the main braces!" proceeded the officer of the deck.
+
+"Ready, sir," reported the first midshipman.
+
+"Let go and haul."
+
+As the hands executed the last order; all the yards on the mainmast
+swung round towards the wind till the light breeze caught the sails
+aback, and brought them against the mast. The effect was to deaden the
+headway of the ship.
+
+"Avast bracing!" shouted the first lieutenant, when the yards on the
+mainmast were about square.
+
+In a few moments the onward progress of the Young America was entirely
+checked, and she lay motionless on the sea. There were four other
+vessels in the squadron, following the flag-ship, and each of them, in
+its turn, hove to, or came up into the wind.
+
+"Fourth cutters, clear away their boat!" continued the first
+lieutenant, after he had received his order from the captain. "Mr.
+Messenger will take charge of the boat."
+
+The young officer indicated was the first midshipman, whose quarter
+watch was then on duty.
+
+"All the fourth cutters!" piped the boatswain's mate, as Messenger
+crossed the deck to perform the duty assigned to him.
+
+"He's alive!" shouted a dozen of the idlers on the rail, who had not
+removed their gaze from the waif in the small boat.
+
+"He isn't dead any more than I am!" added a juvenile tar, springing
+into the main rigging, as if to demonstrate the amount of his own
+vitality.
+
+The waif in the bateau had produced this sudden change of sentiment,
+and given this welcome relief to the crew of the Young America, by
+rising from his reclining posture, and standing up in the water at the
+bottom of his frail craft. He gazed with astonishment at the ship and
+the other vessels of the squadron, and did not seem to realize where
+he was.
+
+"Avast, fourth cutters!" interposed the first lieutenant. "Belay,
+all!"
+
+If the waif was not dead, it was hardly necessary to lower a boat to
+send to his relief; at least not till it appeared that he needed
+assistance.
+
+"Boat, ahoy!" shouted Ryder.
+
+"On board the ship," replied the waif, in tones not at all sepulchral.
+
+"What are you doing out here?" demanded the first lieutenant.
+
+"Nothing," replied the waif.
+
+"Will you come on board the ship?"
+
+"Yes, if you will let me," added the stranger, as he picked up a
+broken oar, which was floating in the water on the bottom of his boat.
+
+"Yes, come on board," answered the first lieutenant, prompted by
+Captain Cumberland, who was quite as much interested in the adventure
+as any of his shipmates.
+
+The waif, using the broken oar as a paddle, worked his water-logged
+craft slowly towards the ship. The accommodation ladder was lowered
+for his use, and in a few moments, with rather a heavy movement, as
+though he was lame, or much exhausted, he climbed up the ladder, and
+stepped down upon the ship deck.
+
+"Fill away again!" said the captain to the first lieutenant, as a
+curious crowd began to gather around the stranger. Ryder gave the
+necessary orders to brace up the main yards, and set the mainsail
+again, and the ship was soon moving on her course towards the Naze of
+Norway, as though nothing had occurred to interrupt her voyage.
+
+"What are you doing out here, in an open boat, out of sight of land?"
+asked Captain Cumberland, while the watch on deck were bracing up the
+yards.
+
+The waif looked at the commander of the Young America, and carefully
+examined him from head to foot. The elegant uniform of the captain
+seemed to produce a strong impression upon his mind, and he evidently
+regarded him as a person of no small consequence. He did not answer
+the question put to him, seeming to be in doubt whether it was safe
+and proper for him to do so. Captain Cumberland was an exceedingly
+comely-looking young gentleman, tall and well formed in person,
+graceful and dignified in his manners; and if he had been fifty years
+old, the stranger before him could not have been more awed and
+impressed by his bearing. So far as his personal appearance was
+concerned, the waif appeared to have escaped from the rag-bag, and to
+have been out long enough to soil his tatters with oil, tar, pitch,
+and dirt. Though his face and hands, as well as other parts of his
+body, were very dirty, his eye was bright, and, even seen through the
+disguise of filth and rags that covered him, he was rather
+prepossessing.
+
+"What is your name?" asked Captain Cumberland, finding his first
+question was not likely to be answered.
+
+"Ole Amundsen," replied the stranger, pronouncing his first name in
+two syllables.
+
+"Then you are not English."
+
+"No, sir. Be you?"
+
+"I am not; we are all Americans in this ship."
+
+"Americans!" exclaimed Ole, opening his eyes, while a smile beamed
+through the dirt on his face. "Are you going to America now?"
+
+"No; we are going up the Baltic now," replied Captain Cumberland; "but
+we shall return to America in the course of a year or two."
+
+"Take me to America with you--will you?" continued Ole, earnestly. "I
+am a sailor, and I will work for you all the time."
+
+"I don't know about that. You must speak to the principal."
+
+"Who's he?"
+
+"Mr. Lowington. He is in the cabin now. Where do you belong, Ole?"
+
+"I don't belong anywhere," answered the waif, looking doubtfully about
+him.
+
+"Where were you born?"
+
+"In Norway, sir."
+
+"Then you are a Norwegian."
+
+"I reckon I am."
+
+"In what part of Norway were you born?"
+
+"In Bratsberg."
+
+"That's where all the brats come from," suggested Sheridan.
+
+"This one came from there, at any rate," added Mayley. "But where is
+Bratsberg, and what is it?"
+
+"It is an _amt_, or province, in the south-eastern part of Norway."
+
+"I came from the town of Laurdal," said Ole.
+
+"Do the people there speak English as well as you do?" asked the
+captain.
+
+"No, sir. I used to be a _skydskarl_, and--"
+
+"A what?" demanded the crowd.
+
+"A _skydskarl_--a boy that goes on a cariole to take back the horses.
+I learned a little English from the Englishmen I rode with; and then I
+was in England almost a year."
+
+"But how came you out here, alone in an open boat?" asked the captain,
+returning to his first inquiry.
+
+Ole put one of his dirty fingers in his mouth, and looked stupid and
+uncommunicative. He glanced at the young officers around him, and
+then over the rail at the sea.
+
+"Were you wrecked?" inquired the captain.
+
+"No, sir; not wrecked," replied Ole. "I never was wrecked in my life."
+
+"What are you doing out here, out of sight of land, in a boat half
+full of water?" persisted the captain.
+
+"Doing nothing."
+
+"Did you get blown off from the shore?"
+
+"No, sir; a southerly wind wouldn't blow anybody off from the south
+coast of Norway," answered Ole, with a smile which showed that he had
+some perception of things absurd in themselves.
+
+"You are no fool."
+
+"No, sir, I am not; and I don't think you are," added Ole, again
+glancing at Captain Cumberland from head to foot.
+
+The young tars all laughed at the waif's retort, and the captain was
+not a little nettled by the remark. He pressed Ole rather sharply for
+further information in regard to his antecedents; but the youth was
+silent on this point. While the crowd were anxiously waiting for the
+stranger to declare himself more definitely, eight bells sounded at
+the wheel, and were repeated on the large bell forward by the lookout.
+From each vessel of the fleet the bells struck at nearly the same
+moment, and were followed by the pipe of the boatswain's whistle,
+which was the signal for changing the watch. As the officers of the
+ship were obliged to attend to their various duties, Ole Amundsen was
+left alone with the captain. The waif still obstinately refused to
+explain how he happened to be alone in a water-logged boat, asleep,
+and out of sight of land, though he promptly answered all other
+questions which were put to him.
+
+Mr. Lowington, the principal of the Academy Squadron, was in the main
+cabin, though he had been fully informed in regard to the events which
+had transpired on deck. The young commander despaired of his own
+ability to extort an explanation from the waif, and he concluded to
+refer the matter to the principal.
+
+"How long have you been in that boat?" asked Captain Cumberland, as he
+led the way towards the companion ladder.
+
+"Eighteen hours," answered Ole, after some hesitation, which, perhaps,
+was only to enable him to count up the hours.
+
+"Did you have anything to eat?"
+
+"No, sir."
+
+"Nothing?"
+
+"Not a thing."
+
+"Then you are hungry?"
+
+"I had a little supper last night--not much," continued Ole,
+apparently counting the seams in the deck, ashamed to acknowledge his
+human weakness.
+
+"You shall have something to eat at once."
+
+"Thank you, sir."
+
+Captain Cumberland therefore conducted the stranger to the steerage,
+instead of the main cabin, and directed one of the stewards to give
+him his supper. The man set half a cold boiled ham on one of the mess
+tables, with an abundant supply of bread and butter. Cutting off a
+large slice of the ham, he placed it on the plate before Ole, whose
+eyes opened wide with astonishment, and gleamed with pleasure. Without
+paying much attention to the forms of civilization, the boy began to
+devour it, with the zeal of one who had not tasted food for
+twenty-four hours. Captain Cumberland smiled, but with becoming
+dignity, at the greediness of the guest, before whom the whole slice
+of ham and half a brick loaf disappeared almost in a twinkling. The
+steward appeared with a pot of coffee, in time to cut off another
+slice of ham, which the waif attacked with the same voracity as
+before. When it was consumed, and the young Norwegian glanced
+wistfully at the leg before him, as though his capacity for cold ham
+was not yet exhausted, the captain began to consider whether he ought
+not to consult the surgeon of the ship before he permitted the waif to
+eat any more. But the steward, like a generous host, seemed to regard
+the quantity eaten as complimentary testimony to the quality of the
+viands, and helped him to a third slice of the ham. He swallowed a
+pint mug of coffee without stopping to breathe.
+
+As the third slice of ham began to wax small before the voracious
+Norwegian, Captain Cumberland became really alarmed, and determined
+to report at once to the principal and the surgeon for instructions.
+Knocking at the door of the main cabin, he was admitted. Dr. Winstock
+assured him there was no danger to the guest; he had not been without
+food long enough to render it dangerous for him fully to satisfy
+himself. The quantity eaten might make him uncomfortable, and even
+slightly sick, but it would do the gourmand no real injury. The
+captain returned to the steerage, where Ole had broken down on his
+fourth slice of ham; but he regarded it wistfully, and seemed to
+regret his inability to eat any more.
+
+"That's good," said he, with emphasis. "It's the best supper I ever
+ate in my life. I like this ship; I like the grub; and I mean to go to
+America in her."
+
+"We will see about that some other time; but if you don't tell us how
+you happened to be off here, I am afraid we can do nothing for you,"
+replied the captain. "If you feel better now, we will go and see the
+principal."
+
+"Who's he?" asked Ole.
+
+"Mr. Lowington. You must tell him how you happened to be in that leaky
+boat."
+
+"Perhaps I will. I don't know," added Ole, doubtfully, as he followed
+the commander into the main cabin.
+
+Captain Cumberland explained to the principal the circumstances under
+which Ole had come on board, and that he declined to say anything in
+regard to the strange situation in which he had been discovered.
+
+"Is the captain here?" asked the midshipman of the watch, at the
+steerage door.
+
+"Yes," replied Captain Cumberland.
+
+"Mr. Lincoln sent me down to report a light on the lee bow, sir."
+
+"Very well. Where is Mr. Beckwith?"
+
+"In the cabin, sir."
+
+The captain left the main cabin, and entered the after cabin, where he
+found Beckwith, the first master, attended by the second and third,
+examining the large chart of the North Sea.
+
+"Light on the lee bow, sir," said the first master.
+
+"Do you make it out?"
+
+"Yes; we are all right to the breadth of a hair," added the master,
+delighted to find that his calculations had proved to be entirely
+correct. "It is Egero Light, and we are about fifty miles from the
+Naze of Norway. We are making about four knots, and if the breeze
+holds, we ought to see Gunnarshoug Light by one o'clock."
+
+Captain Cumberland went on deck to see the light reported. Though it
+was half past eight, the sun had but just set, and the light, eighteen
+miles distant, could be distinctly seen. It created a great deal of
+excitement and enthusiasm among the young officers and seamen, who had
+read enough about Norway to be desirous of seeing it. For weeks the
+young gentlemen on board the ship had been talking of Norway, and
+reading up all the books in the library relating to the country and
+its people. They had read with interest the accounts of the various
+travellers who had visited it, including Ross Brown, in Harper's
+Monthly, and Bayard Taylor, and had studied Harper, Murray, Bradshaw,
+and other Guides on the subject. The more inquiring students had read
+the history of Norway, and were well prepared to appreciate a short
+visit to this interesting region.
+
+They had just come from the United States, having sailed in the latter
+part of March. The squadron had had a fair passage, and the students
+hoped to be in Christiansand by the first day of May; and now nothing
+less than a dead calm for forty-eight hours could disappoint their
+hopes. Five years before, the Young America and the Josephine, her
+consort, had cruised in the waters of Europe, and returned to America
+in the autumn. It had been the intention of the principal to make
+another voyage the next year, go up the Baltic, and winter in the
+Mediterranean; but the war of 1866 induced him to change his plans.
+Various circumstances had postponed the cruise until 1870, when it was
+actually commenced.
+
+The Young America was the first, and for more than a year the only,
+vessel belonging to the Academy. The Josephine, a topsail schooner,
+had been added the second year; and now the Tritonia, a vessel of the
+same size and rig, was on her first voyage. The three vessels of the
+squadron were officered and manned by the students of the Academy. As
+on the first cruise, the offices were the rewards of merit bestowed
+upon the faithful and energetic pupils. The highest number of merits
+gave the highest office, and so on through the several grades in
+the cabin, and the petty offices in the steerage. The routine and
+discipline of the squadron were substantially the same as described in
+the first series of these volumes, though some changes had been made,
+as further experience suggested. Instead of quarterly, as before, the
+offices were given out every month. Captains were not retired after a
+single term, as formerly, but were obliged to accept whatever rank and
+position they earned, like other students.
+
+There was no change from one vessel to another, except at the end of a
+school year, or with the permission of the principal. The ship had six
+instructors, three of whom, however, lectured to all the students in
+the squadron, and each of the smaller vessels had two teachers.
+Mr. Lowington was still the principal. He was the founder of the
+institution; and his high moral and religious principles, his love of
+justice, as well as his skill, firmness, and prudence, had made it a
+success in spite of the many obstacles which continually confronted
+it. As a considerable portion of the students in the squadron were
+the spoiled sons of rich men, who had set at defiance the rules of
+colleges and academies on shore, it required a remarkable combination
+of attributes to fit a gentleman for the difficult and trying position
+he occupied.
+
+Mr. Fluxion was the first vice-principal in charge of the Josephine.
+He was a thorough seaman, a good disciplinarian, and a capital
+teacher; but he lacked some of the high attributes of character
+which distinguished the principal. If any man was fit to succeed Mr.
+Lowington in his responsible position, it was Mr. Fluxion; but it was
+doubtful whether, under his sole administration, the institution could
+be an entire success. His love of discipline, and his energetic manner
+of dealing with delinquents, would probably have increased the number
+of "rows," mutinies, and runaways.
+
+The second vice-principal, in charge of the Tritonia, was Mr. Tompion,
+who, like his two superiors in rank, had formerly been an officer of
+the navy. Though he was a good sailor, and a good disciplinarian, he
+lacked that which a teacher needs most--a hearty sympathy with young
+people.
+
+The principal and the two vice-principals were instructors in
+mathematics and navigation in their respective vessels. Mr. Lowington
+had undertaken this task himself, because he felt the necessity of
+coming more in contact with the student than his position as mere
+principal required. It tended to promote friendly relations between
+the governor and the governed, by creating a greater sympathy between
+them.
+
+The Rev. Mr. Agneau still served as chaplain. In port, and at sea when
+the weather would permit, two services were held in the steerage every
+Sunday, which were attended, at anchor, by the crew of all the vessels.
+Prayers were said morning and evening, in the ship by the chaplain, in
+the schooners by the vice-principal or one of the instructors.
+
+Dr. Winstock was the instructor in natural philosophy and chemistry,
+as well as surgeon and sanitary director. He was a good and true man,
+and generally popular among the students. Each vessel had an adult
+boatswain and a carpenter, and the ship a sailmaker, to perform such
+work as the students could not do, and to instruct them in the details
+of practical seamanship.
+
+After the lapse of five years, hardly a student remained of those who
+had cruised in the ship or her consort during the first voyage. But in
+addition to the three vessels which properly constituted the squadron,
+there were two yachts, each of one hundred and twenty tons. They were
+fore-and-aft schooners, of beautiful model, and entirely new. The one
+on the weather wing of the fleet was the Grace, Captain Paul Kendall,
+whose lady and two friends were in the cabin. Abreast of her sailed
+the Feodora, Captain Robert Shuffles, whose wife was also with him.
+Each of these yachts had a first and second officer, and a crew of
+twenty men, with the necessary complement of cooks and stewards. They
+were part of the fleet, but not of the Academy Squadron.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+OFF THE NAZE OF NORWAY.
+
+
+Mr. Lowington examined Ole Amundsen very carefully, in order to
+ascertain what disposition should be made of him. He told where he was
+born, how he had learned English, and where he had passed the greater
+portion of his life, just as he had related these particulars to
+Captain Cumberland.
+
+"But how came you out here in an open boat?" asked the principal.
+
+Ole examined the carpet on the floor of the cabin, and made no reply.
+
+"Won't you answer me?" added Mr. Lowington.
+
+The waif was still silent.
+
+"You have been to sea?"
+
+"Yes, sir; I was six months in a steamer, and over two years in
+sailing vessels," answered Ole, readily.
+
+"What steamer were you in?"
+
+"I was in the Drammen steamer a while; and I have been three trips
+down to Copenhagen and Gottenburg, one to Luebeck, one to Stettin, and
+one to Stockholm."
+
+"Have you been in a steamer this season?"
+
+"No, sir."
+
+"Then you were in a sailing vessel."
+
+Ole would not say that he had been in any vessel the present season.
+
+"Where is your home now?" asked the principal, breaking the silence
+again.
+
+"Haven't any."
+
+"Have you a father and mother?"
+
+"Both dead, sir."
+
+"Have you any friends?"
+
+"Friends? I don't believe I have."
+
+"Any one that takes care of you?"
+
+"Takes care of me? No, sir; I'm quite certain I haven't any one that
+takes care of me. I take care of myself, and it's heavy work I find
+it, sometimes, I can tell you."
+
+"Do you ever go fishing?"
+
+"Yes, sir, sometimes."
+
+"Have you been lately?"
+
+Ole was silent again.
+
+"I wish to be your friend, Ole."
+
+"Thank you, sir," added Ole, bowing low.
+
+"But in order to know what to do for you, I must know something about
+your circumstances."
+
+"I haven't any circumstances, sir. I lost 'em all," replied Ole,
+gravely and sadly, as though he had met with a very serious loss.
+
+Dr. Winstock could not help laughing, but it was impossible to decide
+whether the boy was ignorant of the meaning of the word, or was trying
+to perpetrate a joke.
+
+"How did you happen to lose your circumstances, Ole?" asked Mr.
+Lowington.
+
+"When my mother died, Captain Olaf took 'em."
+
+"Indeed; and who is Captain Olaf?"
+
+Ole looked at the principal, and then returned his gaze to the cabin
+floor, evidently not deeming it prudent to answer the question.
+
+"Is he your brother?"
+
+"No, sir."
+
+"Your uncle?"
+
+"No, sir."
+
+Ole could not be induced to say anything more about Captain Olaf,
+and doubtless regretted that he had even mentioned his name. The waif
+plainly confounded "circumstances" and property. Mr. Lowington several
+times returned to the main inquiry, but the young man would not even
+hint at the explanation of the manner in which he had come to be a
+waif on the North Sea, in an open boat, half full of water. He had
+told the captain that he was not wrecked, and had not been blown off
+from the coast. He would make no answer of any kind to any direct
+question relating to the subject.
+
+"Well, Ole, as you will not tell me how you came in the situation in
+which we found you, I do not see that I can do anything for you,"
+continued Mr. Lowington. "The ship is bound to Christiansand, and when
+we arrive we must leave you there."
+
+"Don't leave me in Christiansand, sir. I don't want to be left there."
+
+"Why not?"
+
+Ole was silent again. Both the principal and the surgeon pitied him,
+for he appeared to be a friendless orphan; certainly he had no friends
+to whom he wished to go, and was only anxious to remain in the ship,
+and go to America in her.
+
+"You may go into the steerage now, Ole," said the principal,
+despairing of any further solution of the mystery.
+
+"Thank you, sir," replied Ole, bowing low, and backing out of the
+cabin as a courtier retires from the presence of a sovereign.
+
+"What do you make of him, doctor?" added Mr. Lowington, as the door
+closed upon the waif.
+
+"I don't make anything of him," replied Dr. Winstock. "The young
+rascal evidently don't intend that we should make anything of him.
+He's a young Norwegian, about fifteen years old, with neither father
+nor mother; for I think we may believe what he has said. If he had no
+regard to the truth, it was just as easy for him to lie as it was to
+keep silent, and it would have been more plausible."
+
+"I am inclined to believe that he is a runaway, either from the shore
+or from some vessel," said the principal. "He certainly cannot have
+been well treated, for his filthy rags scarcely cover his body; and he
+says that the supper he had to-night was the best he ever ate in his
+life. It was only coffee, cold ham, and bread and butter; so he cannot
+have been a high liver. He seems to be honest, and I pity him."
+
+"But he is too filthy to remain on board a single hour. I will attend
+to his sanitary condition at once," laughed the doctor. "He will breed
+a leprosy among the boys, if he is not taken care of."
+
+"Let the purser give you a suit of clothes for him, for we can't do
+less than this for him."
+
+The doctor left the cabin, and Ole was taken to the bath-room by one
+of the stewards, and compelled to scrub himself with a brush and soap,
+till he was made into a new creature. He was inclined to rebel at
+first, for he had his national and inborn prejudice against soap
+and water in combination; but the sight of the suit of new clothes
+overcame his constitutional scruples. The steward was faithful to his
+mission, and Ole left dirt enough in the bath-tub to plant half a
+dozen hills of potatoes. He looked like a new being, even before he
+had donned the new clothes. His light hair, cut square across his
+forehead, was three shades lighter when it had been scrubbed, and
+deprived of the black earth, grease, and tar, with which it had been
+matted.
+
+The steward was interested in his work, for it is a pleasure to any
+decent person to transform such a leper of filth into a clean and
+wholesome individual. Ole put on the heavy flannel shirt and the blue
+frock which were handed to him, and smiled with pleasure as he
+observed the effect. He was fitted to a pair of seaman's blue
+trousers, and provided with socks and shoes. Then he actually danced
+with delight, and evidently regarded himself as a finished dandy; for
+never before had he been clothed in a suit half so good. It was the
+regular uniform of the crew of the ship.
+
+"Hold on a moment, my lad," said Muggs, the steward, as he produced a
+pair of barber's shears. "Your barber did not do justice to your
+figure-head, the last time he cut your hair."
+
+"I cut it myself," replied Ole.
+
+"I should think you did, and with a bush scythe."
+
+"I only hacked off a little, to keep it out of my eyes. Captain Olaf
+always used to cut it."
+
+"Who's Captain Olaf?" asked Muggs.
+
+Ole was silent, but permitted the steward to remove at will the long,
+snarly white locks, which covered his head. The operator had been a
+barber once, and received extra pay for his services on board the ship
+in this capacity. He did his work in an artistic manner, parting
+and combing the waif's hair as though he were dressing him for a
+fashionable party. He put a sailor's knot in the black handkerchief
+under the boy's collar, and then placed the blue cap on his head, a
+little on one side, so that he looked as jaunty as a dandy
+man-of-war's-man.
+
+"Now put on this jacket, my lad, and you will be all right," continued
+the steward, as he gazed with pride and pleasure upon the work of his
+hands.
+
+"More clothes!" exclaimed Ole. "I shall be baked. I sweat now with
+what I have on."
+
+"It's hot in here; you will be cool enough when you go on deck. Here's
+a pea-jacket for you, besides the other."
+
+"But that's for winter. I never had so much clothes on before in my
+life."
+
+"You needn't put the pea-jacket on, if you don't want it. Now you look
+like a decent man, and you can go on deck and show yourself."
+
+"Thank you, sir."
+
+"But you must wash yourself clean every morning."
+
+"Do it every day!" exclaimed Ole, opening his eyes with astonishment.
+
+"Why, yes, you heathen," laughed Muggs. "A man isn't fit to live who
+don't keep himself clean. Why, you could have planted potatoes
+anywhere on your hide, before you went into that tub."
+
+"I haven't been washed before since last summer," added Ole.
+
+"You ought to be hung for it."
+
+"You spend half your time washing yourselves--don't you?"
+
+"We spend time enough at it to keep clean. No wonder you Norwegians
+have the leprosy, and the flesh rots off the bones!"
+
+"But I always go into the water every summer," pleaded Ole.
+
+"And don't wash yourself at any other time?"
+
+"I always wash myself once a year, and sometimes more, when I get a
+good chance."
+
+"Don't you wash your face and hands every morning."
+
+"Every morning? No! I haven't done such a thing since last summer."
+
+"Then you are not fit to live. If you stay in this ship, you must wash
+every day, and more than that when you do dirty work."
+
+"Can I stay in the ship if I do that?" asked Ole, earnestly.
+
+"I don't know anything about it."
+
+"I will wash all the time if they will only let me stay in the ship,"
+pleaded the waif.
+
+"You must talk with the principal on that subject. I have nothing to
+do with it. Now, go on deck. Hold up your head, and walk like a man."
+
+Ole left the bath-room, and made his way up the forward ladder. The
+second part of the starboard watch were on duty, but nearly every
+person belonging to the ship was on deck, watching the distant light,
+which assured them they were on the coast of Norway. The waif stepped
+upon deck as lightly as a mountain sylph. The influence of his new
+clothes pervaded his mind, and he was inclined to be a little
+"swellish" in his manner.
+
+"How are you, Norway!" shouted Sanford, one of the crew.
+
+"How are you, America," replied Ole, imitating the slang of the
+speaker.
+
+"What have you done with your dirt?" added Rodman.
+
+"Here is some of it," answered Muggs, the steward, as he came up the
+ladder, with Ole's rags on a dust-pan, and threw them overboard.
+
+"If you throw all his dirt overboard here, we shall get aground,
+sure," added Stockwell, as Ole danced up to the group of students.
+
+"No wonder you feel light after getting rid of such a load of dirt,"
+said Sanford.
+
+"O, I'm all right," laughed Ole, good-naturedly; for he did not seem
+to think that dirt was any disgrace or dishonor to him.
+
+"How came you in that leaky boat, Norway?" demanded Rodman; and the
+entire party gathered around the waif, anxious to hear the story of
+his adventure.
+
+"I went into it."
+
+"Is that so?" added Wilde.
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"I say, Norway, you are smart," replied Rodman.
+
+"Smart? Where?"
+
+"All over."
+
+"I don't feel it."
+
+"But, Norway, how came you in that old tub, out of sight of land?"
+persisted Rodman, returning to the charge again.
+
+"I went into it just the same as one of you Americans would have got
+into it," laughed Ole, who did not think it necessary to resort to the
+tactics he had used with the principal and the captain. "You could
+have done it if you had tried as hard as I did."
+
+"After you got in, then, how came the boat out here, so far from
+land?"
+
+"The wind, the tide, and the broken oar brought it out here."
+
+"Indeed! But won't you tell us your story, Ole?"
+
+"A story? O, yes. Once there was a king of Norway whose name was Olaf,
+and half the men of his country were named after him, because--"
+
+"Never mind that story, Ole. We want to hear the story about
+yourself."
+
+"About myself? Well, last year things didn't go very well with me; the
+crop of potatoes was rather short on my farm, and my vessels caught
+but few fish; so I decided to make a voyage up the Mediterranean, to
+spend the winter."
+
+"What did you go in, Norway?" asked Wilde.
+
+"In my boat. We don't make voyages on foot here in Norway."
+
+"What boat?"
+
+"You won't let me tell my story; so I had better finish it at once. I
+got back as far as the North Sea, and almost into the Sleeve, when a
+gale came down upon me, and strained my boat so that she leaked badly.
+I was worn out with fatigue, and dropped asleep one afternoon. I was
+dreaming that the King of Sweden and Norway came off in a big
+man-of-war, to welcome me home again. He hailed me himself, with,
+"Boat, ahoy!" which waked me; and then I saw this ship. You know all
+the rest of it."
+
+"Do you mean to say you went up the Mediterranean in that old craft?"
+
+"I've told my story, and if you don't believe it, you can look in the
+almanac, and see whether it is true or not," laughed Ole. "But I must
+go and show myself to the captain and the big gentleman."
+
+"He's smart--isn't he?" said Sanford, as the young Norwegian went aft
+to exhibit himself to the officers on the quarter deck.
+
+"Yes; but what's the reason he won't tell how he happened out here in
+that leaky tub?" added Rodman.
+
+"I don't know; he wouldn't tell the captain, nor the principal."
+
+"I don't understand it."
+
+"No one understands it. Perhaps he has done something wrong, and is
+afraid of being found out."
+
+"Very likely."
+
+"He's just the fellow for us," said Stockwell, in a low tone, after he
+had glanced around him, to see that no listeners were near. "He speaks
+the lingo of this country. We must buy him up."
+
+"Good!" exclaimed Boyden. "We ought not to have let him go till we had
+fixed his flint."
+
+"I didn't think of it before; but there is time enough. If we can get
+hold of his story we can manage him without any trouble."
+
+"But he won't tell his story. He wouldn't even let on to the
+principal."
+
+"No matter; we must have him, somehow or other. Sanford can handle
+him."
+
+"I don't exactly believe in the scrape," said Burchmore, shaking his
+head dubiously. "We've heard all about the fellows that used to try to
+run away from the ship and from the Josephine. They always got caught,
+and always had the worst of it."
+
+"We are not going to run away, and we are not going to make ourselves
+liable to any punishment," interposed Sanford, rather petulantly. "We
+can have a good time on shore without running away, or anything of
+that sort."
+
+"What's the use?" replied Burchmore.
+
+"The principal isn't going to let us see anything at all of Norway. We
+are going to put in at Christiansand, and then go to Christiania. We
+want to see the interior of Norway, for there's glorious fishing in
+the lakes and rivers--salmon as big as whales."
+
+"I like fishing as well as any fellow, but I don't want to get into a
+scrape, and have to stay on board when the whole crowd go ashore
+afterwards. It won't pay."
+
+"But I tell you again, we are not going to run away."
+
+"I don't see how you can manage it without running away. You are going
+into the interior of Norway on your own hook, without the consent or
+knowledge of the principal. If you don't call this running away, I
+don't know what you can call it."
+
+"No matter what we call it, so long as the principal don't call it
+running away," argued Sanford.
+
+"How can you manage it?" inquired Burchmore.
+
+"I don't know yet; and if I did, I wouldn't tell a fellow who has so
+many doubts."
+
+"I shall not go into anything till I understand it."
+
+"We don't ask you to do so. As soon as we come to anchor, and see the
+lay of the land, we can tell exactly what and how to do it. We have
+plenty of money, and we can have a first-rate time if you only think
+so. Leave it all to me, and I will bring it out right," continued the
+confident Sanford, who appeared to be the leader of the little squad.
+
+The traditions of the various runaways who had, at one time and
+another, attempted to escape from the wholesome discipline and
+restraint of the Academy, were current on board all the vessels of the
+squadron. The capture of the Josephine, and her cruise in the English
+Channel, had been repeated to every new student who joined the fleet,
+till the story was as familiar to the present students as to those of
+five years before. There were just as many wild and reckless boys on
+board now as in the earlier days of the institution, and they were as
+sorely chafed by the necessary restraints of good order as their
+predecessors had been. Perhaps it was natural that, visiting a foreign
+country, they should desire to see all they could of its wonders, and
+even to look upon some things which it was the policy of the principal
+to prevent them from seeing.
+
+Whenever any of the various stories of the runaways were related,
+Sanford, Rodman, Stockwell, and others of similar tendencies, were
+always ready to point out the defects in the plan of the operators.
+They could tell precisely where Wilton, Pelham, and Little had been
+weak, as they termed it, and precisely what they should have done to
+render the enterprise a success. Still, running away, in the abstract,
+was not a popular idea in the squadron at the present time; but
+Sanford believed that he and his companions could enjoy all the
+benefits of an independent excursion without incurring any of its
+perils and penalties. Let him demonstrate his own proposition.
+
+Ole Amundsen walked aft, and was kindly greeted by the officers on
+the quarter-deck, who commented freely upon his improved personal
+appearance, though they did it in more refined terms than their
+shipmates on the forecastle had done. Some of them tried to draw from
+him the explanation of his situation in the leaky boat, but without
+any better success than had attended the efforts of others. He yielded
+an extravagant deference to the gold lace on the uniforms of the
+officers, treating them with the utmost respect.
+
+"Well, Ole, you look better than when I saw you last," said Mr.
+Lowington.
+
+"Yes, sir; and I feel better," replied Ole, bowing low to the "big
+gentleman."
+
+"And you speak English very well, indeed."
+
+"Thank you, sir."
+
+"Can you speak Norwegian as well?"
+
+"Yes, sir; better, I hope."
+
+"Monsieur Badois, will you ask him a question or two in Norwegian,"
+added the principal, turning to the professor of modern languages, who
+prided himself on being able to speak fourteen different tongues; "I
+begin to doubt whether he is a Norwegian."
+
+"I will, sir," replied monsieur, who was always glad of an opportunity
+to exhibit his linguistic powers. "_Hvor staae det til?_" (How do you
+do?)
+
+"_Jeg takker, meget vel._" (Very well, I thank you), replied Ole.
+
+"_Forstaaer De mig?_" (Do you understand me?)
+
+"_Ja, jeg forstaaer Dem meget vel._" (Yes, I understand you very
+well.)
+
+"That will do," interposed Mr. Lowington.
+
+"He speaks Norsk very well," added the professor.
+
+"So do you, sir," said Ole, with a low bow to Monsieur Badois.
+
+"_Meget vel_," laughed the professor.
+
+"I am satisfied, Ole. Now, have you concluded to tell me how you
+happened to be in that boat, so far from the land."
+
+The waif counted the seams in the quarter-deck, but nothing could
+induce him to answer the question.
+
+"I have given you a suit of clothes, and I desire to be of service to
+you."
+
+"I thank you, sir; and a good supper, the best I ever had, though I
+have often fished with English gentlemen, even with lords and sirs."
+
+"If you will tell me who your friends are--"
+
+"I have no friends, sir."
+
+"You lived on shore, or sailed on the sea, with somebody, I suppose."
+
+Ole looked down, and did not deny the proposition.
+
+"Now, if you will tell me whom you lived with, I may be able to do
+something for you."
+
+Still the waif was silent.
+
+"Berth No. 72 in the steerage is vacant, and I will give it to you, if
+I can be sure it is right for me to do so."
+
+But Ole could not, or would not, give any information on this point,
+though he was earnest in his desire to remain in the ship.
+
+"Very well, Ole; as you will not tell me your story, I shall be
+obliged to leave you on shore at Christiansand," said the principal,
+as he walked away.
+
+Dr. Winstock also tried to induce the youth to reveal what he plainly
+regarded as a secret, but with no different result. Ole passed from
+the officers to the crew again, and with the latter his answers were
+like those given to Sanford and his companions. He invented strange
+explanations, and told wild stories, but not a soul on board was the
+wiser for anything he said. The waif was permitted to occupy berth No.
+72, but was distinctly assured that he must leave the ship when she
+arrived at Christiansand.
+
+The wind continued light during the night, but at four o'clock in the
+morning the squadron was off Gunnarshoug Point, and not more than four
+miles from the land. The shore was fringed with innumerable islands,
+which made the coast very picturesque, though it was exceedingly
+barren and desolate. Most of the islands were only bare rocks, the
+long swells rolling completely over some of the smaller ones. The
+students on deck watched the early sunrise, and studied the contour
+of the coast with deep interest, till it became an old story, and then
+whistled for a breeze to take them along more rapidly towards their
+port of destination. The fleet was now fully in the Skager Rack, or
+Sleeve, as it is also called on the British nautical charts.
+
+At eight bells, when, with the forenoon watch, commenced the regular
+routine of study in the steerage, all the students had seen the Naze,
+or Lindersnaes, as the Norwegians call it--the southern cape of
+Norway. It is a reddish headland, beyond which were some hills covered
+with snow in the spring time. Ole Amundsen remained on deck all day,
+and had a name for every island and cliff on the coast. He declared
+that he was competent to pilot the ship into the harbor, for he had
+often been there. But when the fleet was off Ox-Oe, at the entrance
+to the port, a regular pilot was taken, at three o'clock in the
+afternoon. The Josephine and the Tritonia also obtained pilots soon
+after. The recitations were suspended in order to enable the students
+to see the harbor.
+
+Ole was wanted to explain the various objects which were presented to
+the view of the young mariners, but no one had seen him since the
+pilot came on board. All the habitable parts of the vessel were
+searched, and the stewards even examined the hold; but he could not be
+found. Mr. Lowington was anxious to see him, to ascertain whether he
+had changed his mind in regard to his secret; but Ole had disappeared
+as strangely as he had come on board of the ship.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+AN ACCIDENT TO THE SECOND CUTTER.
+
+
+The gentle breeze from the southward enabled the fleet to proceed
+without delay up the fjord to the town of Christiansand; and, as there
+was very little ship's duty to be done under such circumstances, the
+students had an excellent opportunity to examine the islands and the
+main shore. On board the ship and her two consorts the boys swarmed
+like bees in the rigging, eagerly watching every new object that was
+presented to their view. As nautical young gentlemen, they criticised
+the Norwegian boats and vessels that sailed on the bay, comparing them
+with those of their own country. The two yachts, which were not
+restrained by any insurance restrictions, stood boldly up the fjord,
+following closely in the wake of the two schooners.
+
+The course of the vessels up the fjord was through an archipelago, or
+"garden of rocks," as it is styled in the Norwegian language. The
+rocky hills in the vicinity were of a reddish color, with a few fir
+trees upon them. The country was certainly very picturesque, but the
+students did not regard it as a very desirable place of residence. The
+fleet passed between the Island of Dybing and the light on Odderoe,
+and came to anchor in the western harbor. For half an hour the several
+crews were occupied in furling sails, squaring yards, hauling taut the
+running rigging, and putting everything in order on board.
+
+The accommodation ladder of the ship, which was a regular flight of
+stairs, had hardly been rigged before a white barge, pulled by four
+men, came alongside. The oarsmen were dressed in blue uniform, and
+wore tarpaulin hats, upon which was painted the word "Grace,"
+indicating the yacht to which they belonged. The bowman fastened his
+boat-hook to the steps, and the rest of the crew tossed their oars in
+man-of-war style. In the stern-sheets, whose seats were cushioned with
+red velvet plush, were three persons, all of whom were old friends of
+our readers. Captain Paul Kendall, the owner and commander of the
+Grace, though he is a few inches taller and a few pounds heavier than
+when we last saw him, was hardly changed in his appearance. Even his
+side whiskers and mustache did not sensibly alter his looks, for his
+bright eye and his pleasant smile were still the key to his
+expression. The Grace carried the American yacht flag, and her
+commander wore the blue uniform of the club to which he belonged.
+
+Three years before, Paul Kendall had experienced a heavy loss in the
+death of his mother. She had inherited a very large fortune, which,
+however, was held in trust for her son, until he reached his majority.
+At the age of twenty-one, therefore, Paul came to an inheritance
+bequeathed by his grandfather, which made him a _millionnaire_. His
+fortune had been carefully invested by the trustees, and now all he
+had to do was to collect and spend his income, of which there was a
+considerable accumulation when he attained his majority. Paul was a
+young man of high moral and religious principle. He had never spent a
+dollar in dissipation of any kind, and though he knew the world, he
+was as child-like and innocent as when he was an infant.
+
+His tastes were decidedly nautical, and the first large expenditure
+from his ample wealth was in the building of the yacht Grace, which
+was now anchored near the Young America. She was a beautiful craft in
+every respect, constructed as strong as wood and iron could make her.
+As her cabin was to be Paul's home during a portion of the year, it
+was fitted up with every appliance of comfort, convenience, and
+luxury. It contained a piano, a large library, and every available
+means of amusement for the hours of a long passage. At the age of
+twenty-one, Paul was more mature in experience and knowledge than many
+young men at twenty-five; and hardly had he been placed in possession
+of his inheritance than he sailed for Europe, and, of course, hastened
+from Queenstown to Belfast, where Mr. Arbuckle, father of the lady who
+occupied the stern-sheets of the barge, resided. Six months later he
+was married to Grace, who still regarded him as "the apple of her
+eye."
+
+On his return to New York his yacht was finished, though too late
+in the season for use that year. Her first voyage in the spring
+was to Brockway, which was the residence of Mr. Lowington, and the
+headquarters of the Academy Squadron. Learning that his old friend the
+principal was about to sail for Europe with his charge, he promptly
+decided to accompany him, and the Grace was one of the fleet that
+crossed the Atlantic in April.
+
+Mrs. Kendall was dressed in a plain travelling suit. She was taller
+and more mature than when she went down the Rhine with the Young
+Americans, but she was not less beautiful and interesting.
+
+If Fortune had been very kind to Paul Kendall, she had not been so
+constant to all who formerly sailed in the Young America, and who had
+then basked in her sunny smile. The third person in the stern-sheets
+of the barge was Mr. Augustus Pelham. He was a fine-looking fellow,
+with a heavy mustache, dressed like his commander, in the uniform
+of the yacht club. By one of those disasters common in American
+mercantile experience, Pelham's father had suddenly been hurled from
+apparent affluence to real poverty. Being well advanced in years, he
+could do nothing better for himself and his family than to accept a
+situation as secretary of an insurance company, which afforded him a
+salary only sufficient to enable him to live in comfort. Augustus
+had completed his course in the Academy ship when the change of
+circumstances compelled him to abandon all luxurious habits, and work
+for his own living. This was by no means a calamity to him, any more
+than to other young men. Doubtless it was annoying to have his
+allowance of pocket money suddenly stopped, and to find himself face
+to face with one of the sternest realities of life. His training in
+the Academy ship had been a blessing to him, for it had reformed his
+life, and elevated his tastes above the low level of dissipation. It
+had made a new man of him, besides preparing him for a useful
+calling. He was competent, so far as nautical skill and knowledge were
+concerned, to command any vessel to any part of the world, though he
+lacked the necessary experience in the management of a miscellaneous
+crew, and in the transaction of business. He was ready to accept a
+situation as chief or second mate of a ship, when he happened to meet
+Paul Kendall, and was immediately engaged as chief officer of the
+Grace, at a salary of one hundred dollars a month. Another ex-student
+of the ship, Bennington, upon whose father fickle Fortune had not
+continued to smile, had been appointed second officer. Pelham had
+shipped the crew of the Grace, and no better set of men ever trod a
+deck.
+
+The barge came up to the steps, and Paul and Pelham assisted Mrs.
+Kendall out of the boat, and the three went upon the deck of the ship.
+Mr. Lowington, who had not seen them, except at a distance, since the
+fleet sailed from Brockway harbor, gave them a warm greeting, shaking
+hands heartily with the lady first, and then with her companions.
+
+"I am glad to see you looking so well, Mrs. Kendall," said the
+principal.
+
+"I have enjoyed myself every moment of the voyage, and have never been
+sick a single hour," she replied.
+
+"We have had a fine passage, and there was no excuse for an old salt
+like you to be sick," laughed the principal.
+
+"But I think we shall go on shore, and stay at a hotel a few days,
+just for a change," added Paul.
+
+"That's a good plan; of course you will see more of the town and the
+people, than if you remain in your yacht."
+
+"I am sure I like the cabin of the yacht better than any hotel I ever
+visited," laughed Mrs. Kendall.
+
+"But a change will do you good, my dear," suggested Paul.
+
+"What did you pick up last evening, when you hove to, Mr. Lowington?"
+
+"We picked up a young Norwegian, about sixteen years old," answered
+the principal, detailing the circumstances under which Ole had been
+taken on board.
+
+"Where is he now?" asked Paul, looking about him to obtain a sight of
+the stranger.
+
+"We clothed and fed him, and had become quite interested in him; but
+just as the pilot came alongside we missed him. I have had the ship
+searched for him, but we have not been able to find him, though he
+must be concealed somewhere on board."
+
+"That's strange!" exclaimed Mrs. Kendall, glancing at her husband.
+
+"Perhaps not very strange," continued the principal. "The boy refused
+to tell us how he came in an open boat, half full of water, and out of
+sight of land. Probably he has run away from his friends, and has
+concealed himself to avoid being recognized by the pilot, or other
+Norwegian people who may come on board. I judged by his appearance
+that he had some reason for running away from his master or his
+friends, for he was only half clothed, in the filthiest rags that ever
+covered a human being."
+
+"I should like a Norwegian in my yacht, to act as interpreter for us,"
+added Paul.
+
+"I intended to keep him for that purpose myself, if I could ascertain
+who his friends were, and make an arrangement with them, for I will
+not encourage any boy in running away from his employers. Very likely
+we shall find him again in the course of the day."
+
+"Very well, sir; if you want him, I will look out for some one on
+shore," added Paul. "At what time do you pipe to lecture, Mr.
+Lowington?"
+
+"Not before to-morrow forenoon, at two bells."
+
+"I want to hear the lecture."
+
+"So do I," laughed Mrs. Kendall. "I think it is a capital idea to have
+a professor tell us all about a country before we attempt to see it. I
+used to read about the Norsemen, but I have forgotten all about them
+now, and I want to refresh my memory."
+
+"I wish all our boys had the same view of the matter," said Mr.
+Lowington.
+
+"We will come on board before nine to-morrow morning, sir," added
+Paul, as he handed his lady up the steps over the rail.
+
+Descending to the boat, the three oarsmen shoved off, and pulled for
+the shore, where they landed. The boat had not reached the land,
+before another barge, the counterpart of the first, and similarly
+manned, left the Feodora, and pulled alongside the ship. Mr. Robert
+Shuffles, the owner and commander of the second yacht, assisted his
+wife up the ladder to the deck of the ship, where they were cordially
+received by the principal. The yacht Feodora was only six months older
+than the Grace, for which she had served as the model. Shuffles had
+not come into possession of any inheritance yet, but his father was
+as liberal as he was wealthy, and gave his son an annual allowance,
+which enabled him to marry and keep a yacht. He and Paul had been
+intimate friends since they were graduated from the Academy ship, and
+they had made their plans in concert. He had married Lady Feodora a
+year before, and she had now dropped her aristocratic title, and
+become a republican lady. Like her husband, she had acquired nautical
+tastes, and was even more enthusiastic than he in anticipating the
+pleasures of a yacht cruise up the Baltic, and up the Mediterranean.
+Shuffles had not been so fortunate as Paul in finding needy graduates
+of the Academy to officer his yacht, and a fat old shipmaster served
+as first officer in the Feodora, while the second mate was a young
+tar, not yet of age. Having paid their respects to the principal, the
+young couple returned to the boat, and followed Paul to the hotel on
+shore.
+
+"That's the way to go about Europe," said Sanford, who was sitting on
+the rail with several of his shipmates.
+
+"What's the way?" asked Stockwell.
+
+"Why, as Kendall and Shuffles do it--in a yacht, with no Latin and
+geometry to bother their heads, and no decks to wash down on a cold
+morning."
+
+"That's so; but those fellows were the lambs of the squadron, we are
+told," laughed Stockwell. "They didn't have black marks; didn't pick
+upon the professors, and didn't run away from the ship."
+
+"What has all that to do with yachting?" asked Rodman.
+
+"They were good boys, and therefore they have yachts as their
+reward," replied Stockwell, laughing.
+
+"Pelham was as good as Shuffles, but he has no yacht, and has to work
+on a salary for his living."
+
+"He has the fun of it all the same, and Paul Kendall will not overwork
+him. But I haven't a word to say against them. They were all good
+fellows, if they were the ship's lambs."
+
+"All the second cutters!" shouted the boatswain's mate, after his pipe
+had sounded through the ship.
+
+"That means us," said Sanford. "Take your money and pea-jackets,
+fellows. Something may turn up before we come back."
+
+"Ay, ay," replied Stockwell. "Pass the word to all our fellows."
+
+In a few moments the fourth cutters appeared in the waist, with
+pea-jackets on their arms, and touched their caps to De Forrest, the
+fourth lieutenant, who appeared as the officer detailed to go in the
+boat, which now, as formally, was called the professors' barge,
+because it was generally appropriated to the use of the instructors.
+It was pulled by eight oarsmen, and Sanford was the coxswain. The
+party who had been considering the plan for an independent excursion
+on shore without incurring the perils and penalties of running away,
+were the crew of the second cutter. The fact of being together so much
+in the boat, had united them so that they acted and plotted in
+concert.
+
+"What are you going to do with those pea-jackets?" asked De Forrest,
+when he saw their extra clothing.
+
+"It's rather chilly up here in the evening, and we thought we might
+want them, while we were waiting," replied Sanford.
+
+"I don't think it is very cold, and as to the evening, the sun don't
+set till about eight o'clock," added the officer, as he went aft to
+the professors who were going on shore, and reported that the boat was
+ready; for it had already been lowered into the water, and made fast
+to the swinging boom.
+
+Her crew went over the side, and seated themselves in the cutter.
+
+"Ready!" said the coxswain, as the stern-sheets of the barge ranged
+alongside the little stage at the foot of the ladder. "Up oars!"
+
+Up went the eight oars to a perpendicular position, where they were
+held till the boat should be ready to go.
+
+"I wonder where Ole is," said Sanford.
+
+"Sh!" whispered Stockwell, who pulled the bow oar, shaking his head
+with energy.
+
+"What do you mean?" demanded the coxswain, in a low tone, for he was
+very much mystified by the pantomime of the bow oarsman.
+
+"Don't say a word."
+
+"Where is he?" persisted Sanford, who was not willing to have a secret
+kept from him even for a moment.
+
+Stockwell pointed into the bottom of the boat, and then looked up at
+the sky, with an affectation of cunning, while the rest of the crew
+smiled as though they were in possession of the secret. Sanford said
+no more, and joined the bowman in studying the aspect of the sky. Ole
+was in the boat to act as guide and interpreter, and if they chose to
+leave without running away, everything seemed to be favorable to the
+enterprise. Mr. Mapps and Dr. Winstock presently descended the steps,
+and seated themselves in the boat, followed by De Forrest.
+
+"All ready, coxswain," said the latter.
+
+"Ready! Let fall!" said Sanford, as he shoved off the stern of the
+cutter. "Give way--together!"
+
+The well-trained crew bent to their oars, and the boat shot away from
+the ship towards the shore. Mr. Mapps was going to the town to obtain
+some additional material for his lecture the following morning, and
+the surgeon intended to call on Paul Kendall and lady at the hotel.
+
+"This is a very picturesque town, doctor," said Mr. Mapps, as he gazed
+at the high, rocky steeps which surround Christiansand.
+
+"Very; and I am rather sorry we are not to see more of the environs of
+the place," replied the surgeon. "I understand we sail to-morrow
+night."
+
+"I dare say the students will see enough of Norway before they leave
+it."
+
+"We want to go into the interior," said De Forrest. "There is fine
+fishing in the streams of Norway."
+
+"Very likely Mr. Lowington will take you into the interior from
+Christiania," suggested Dr. Winstock.
+
+"I don't exactly see how it is possible to do so," added Mr. Mapps.
+"The only conveyance of the country is the cariole, which seats but
+one person--perhaps two boys; and our squadron has nearly two hundred
+students. I am afraid there are not carioles enough in Christiania to
+carry the whole of them."
+
+"I think it's too bad we can't have a trial at the salmon," pouted De
+Forrest.
+
+"Perhaps, if you waited till July, you might catch them," replied Mr.
+Mapps.
+
+"We should be contented with trout, then."
+
+"I have no doubt Mr. Lowington will do the best he can for you," said
+Dr. Winstock, as the boat neared the pier.
+
+"In, bows!" called the coxswain; and the two bowmen tossed and boated
+their oars, taking their stations in the fore-sheets, one of them with
+the boat-hook in his hand. "Way enough!" added Sanford; and the rest
+of the crew tossed their oars, and then dropped them upon the thwarts,
+with a precision which seemed to astonish the group of Norwegians on
+the wharf, who were observing them.
+
+The two gentlemen landed, and walked up to the town together, leaving
+the barge to wait for them.
+
+"Part of you may go on shore for half an hour, if you wish, and walk
+about," said De Forrest to his crew.
+
+"I don't care about going ashore," replied Sanford.
+
+"Nor I either," added Stockwell; and so they all said, very much to
+the astonishment of the fourth lieutenant, who naturally supposed that
+boys who had been at sea about four weeks would like to stretch their
+legs on the solid land for a short time.
+
+"Don't any of you wish to go on shore?" he inquired.
+
+"Not yet," replied Sanford. "If you wish to take a walk, I will push
+off from the shore, and wait till you return," said Sanford, very
+respectfully.
+
+"What's up? You won't go on shore, and you wish me to do so!"
+exclaimed the suspicious officer.
+
+"Nothing, sir," protested Sanford. "We don't intend to run away. We
+think that is played out."
+
+"If you wanted to do so in this desolate country, I would let you do
+it, if I were the principal. But you are up to some trick, I know."
+
+"What trick, sir?" demanded the coxswain, innocently.
+
+"I don't know, but it is your next move," replied De Forrest, as he
+seated himself, and seemed confident of his ability to check any
+mischief which might be in the minds of his crew. "Shove off, bowman!
+Up oars! Let fall! Give way together!"
+
+The oarsmen, rather vexed at the turn of events, obeyed the several
+orders, and the boat was again cutting the still waters of the fjord.
+All around them were rocks, with several large and small islands in
+sight. In various places on the rocks were affixed iron rings, to
+which vessels could make fast in warping out of the bay when the wind
+was light or foul. A portion of the rock to which they were attached
+was whitewashed, so that the rings could easily be found, even in the
+night. To one of these rings, on a small island near Odderoe, which
+commanded a full view of the landing-place, De Forrest directed the
+coxswain to steer the boat.
+
+"Make fast to that ring," said the officer.
+
+"Ay, ay, sir," replied the bowman.
+
+"Perhaps you would like to land here," added the lieutenant, in a
+jeering tone, as though he felt that he had checkmated his crew in any
+evil purpose they entertained. "Whether you do or not, I think I shall
+stretch my legs on these rocks."
+
+De Forrest leaped from thwart to thwart, and then over the bow upon
+the island, as though he felt nothing but contempt for the power of
+the boat's crew to do mischief. He walked up the rough rocks to the
+summit of the islet, where he paused, and for the first time glanced
+at his companions, whom he suspected of harboring some design against
+the peace and dignity of the ship. As he did so, he discovered a
+steamer, which had just passed through the narrow opening between
+Odderoe and the main land, and whose course lay close to the point of
+the island where the cutter was moored. He saw that the swash of the
+steamer was likely to throw the boat on the rocks, and grind her
+planking upon the sharp points of the island.
+
+"In the boat!" he shouted, lustily. "Shove off!"
+
+Sanford saw the danger which the lieutenant wished to avert, and
+promptly obeyed the orders.
+
+"Shove off, Stockwell!" he promptly shouted. "Up oars! Stern, all!
+Give way!"
+
+Stockwell gave a tremendously hard push when he shoved off, and the
+cutter shot far out upon the still waters; in fact, so far that she
+was forced directly into the way of the approaching steamer.
+
+[Illustration: THE ACCIDENT TO THE SECOND CUTTER. Page 57.]
+
+"Oars!" yelled the coxswain furiously, when he saw that he had
+overdone the matter. "Hold water! Go ahead! Give way!"
+
+The crew, even in this moment of deadly peril,--for it looked as
+though, in another instant, they would all be under the wheels of the
+steamer,--obeyed every command with their wonted precision. But it was
+a second too late to take the back track. If the boat had continued to
+back as at first, she would probably have escaped, for the steamer put
+her helm a-starboard a little, in order to favor her manoeuvre. When
+a collision seemed inevitable, the steamer's bell was rung to stop
+her, and then to back her.
+
+She struck the cutter; but as her progress had been powerfully
+checked, the blow did not carry her under, though it stove in the side
+of the boat. The water poured in through the broken broadside, and the
+crew sprang for their lives. They leaped upon the guys and bob-stays
+of the steamer, and were hauled in by the people on the bow.
+
+"Come out of there, Ole," said Stockwell, as he pulled the boat's sail
+from the extended form of the waif, who was concealed in the bottom of
+the boat.
+
+Ole lost not a moment in following the example of his companions. As
+the steamer's headway had now been entirely checked, Stockwell held
+the wrecked cutter in her position, while Rodman passed the
+pea-jackets up to the forecastle of the steamer. Having done this,
+they abandoned the boat, and followed the example of their companions.
+No one was drowned, or even wet above his knees, for the steamer had
+struck the boat just hard enough to stave in her side, without
+carrying her under.
+
+The Norwegians hooked up the boat's painter, and taking it in tow,
+proceeded on her course; for the captain--as interpreted by
+Ole--declared that his boat carried the mail, and he could not wait
+for anything.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+NORWAY IN THE PAST AND THE PRESENT.
+
+
+"Clear away the first cutter!" shouted the first lieutenant of the
+Young America, from whose deck the catastrophe to the second cutter
+had been observed.
+
+"All the first cutters!" piped the boatswain, with an energy inspired
+by the stirring occasion.
+
+"That was very carelessly done," said Mr. Lowington, whose attention
+had been called to the scene.
+
+"The steamer ran within a couple of rods of the island," added Captain
+Cumberland. "I saw the fourth lieutenant order the boat to shove off;
+I suppose he did it to prevent the swash of the steamer from grinding
+the cutter on the rocks."
+
+"What is he doing among those rocks?" asked the principal.
+
+"I don't know, sir. He landed Mr. Mapps and the doctor, and was
+ordered to wait for them. I don't see why he went over to that
+island."
+
+The second lieutenant was directed to take charge of the first cutter;
+Peaks, the adult boatswain, and Bitts, the carpenter, were ordered to
+go also, to render any assistance which might be required in succoring
+the stove boat. The cutter shoved off, her twelve oars struck the
+water together, and the crew gave way with an energy which caused
+their oars to bend like twigs, while the barge leaped through the
+water as though it was some monster of the deep goaded to his utmost
+to escape the wrath of a more potent pursuer.
+
+"With a will, my lads!" shouted the coxswain. "Steady! Keep the
+stroke, but use your muscle!"
+
+"There's a job for you, Bitts," said the boatswain, as the Norwegian
+took the second cutter in tow.
+
+"And a heavy job it will be, too," replied Bitts. "I wonder there is
+anything left of the boat."
+
+"The steamer stopped her wheels, and backed some time before she
+struck, or there would not have been much left of the boat, or her
+crew," added Peaks. "Thank God, the boys are all safe."
+
+"It's a lucky escape for them."
+
+"So it was; and we needn't say anything about the boat."
+
+"The steamer is going ahead," said the carpenter.
+
+"No matter for that, so long as the boys are all safe," replied Peaks.
+
+The people in the steamer seemed to take no notice of the first
+cutter, appearing not to understand that it had come out for the
+wrecked crew. But as the boat pulled towards her, she cast off the
+cutter in tow.
+
+"Steamer, ahoy!" shouted Norwood, the second lieutenant, as he saw the
+cutter cast adrift.
+
+She made no reply, but hoisted a flag, on which appeared the word
+"Post," with something else which none in the first cutter could
+understand.
+
+"She's a mail boat," said the boatswain; "and I suppose she intends to
+say she is in a hurry."
+
+"Does she mean to carry off the crew of that boat?" demanded the
+second lieutenant, not a little vexed at the conduct of the
+Norwegians.
+
+"She will not carry them far," suggested Dunlap, the coxswain.
+
+"She may take them to Bergen."
+
+"I think not, sir. If she is a mail steamer, she stops at all the
+ports on the coast. I don't think she will carry them far. Very likely
+they will be sent back, on some other steamer, before night," added
+Dunlap, who had studied the coast of Norway more carefully than the
+lieutenant in command.
+
+"First cutter, ahoy!" shouted De Forrest, on the island.
+
+"On shore!" replied Norwood. "We can't catch the steamer--that is
+certain; steer for the island, coxswain."
+
+The first cutter ran up to the rocky island, and as soon as the bow
+touched the rocks, De Forrest leaped into the fore-sheets. He was
+nervous and excited, feeling, perhaps, that he had failed in his duty,
+and was, therefore, responsible for the accident to the second cutter.
+From feeling that he had circumvented his crew in carrying out some
+unexplained trick, he realized that he had led them into a trap, from
+which they had narrowly escaped with their lives.
+
+"What are you doing on this island, De Forrest?" asked Norwood, as the
+discomfited officer took his place in the stern-sheets, and the boat
+shoved off again.
+
+The second lieutenant declared that he had come over to the island to
+prevent his crew from running away, or from carrying out some trick
+whose existence he suspected, but whose nature he could not
+comprehend.
+
+"Sanford wanted I should go ashore at the town, and offered to look
+out for the crew while I did so," he continued. "Of course I wouldn't
+leave my crew; but I told them that half of them might go on shore and
+take a walk. None of them wanted to go, and then I was satisfied they
+were up to something. I went on the island for the sole purpose of
+watching them. I wanted to know what their plan was."
+
+"Well, what did you discover?"
+
+"Nothing at all. I saw that steamer coming, and I ordered Sanford to
+shove off, so that her swash should not damage the boat."
+
+"I don't believe they intended to play any trick," added Norwood. "You
+are too suspicious, De Forrest."
+
+"Perhaps I am; but fellows that have been at sea for a month are
+rather glad of a chance to stretch their legs on shore. They wouldn't
+do so, when I told them they might; and I don't believe such a thing
+was ever heard of before. Besides, they all looked as though they were
+up to something, and just as though they had a big secret in their
+heads."
+
+"Perhaps you were right, but I don't believe you were," said Norwood,
+too bluntly for good manners, and too bluntly for the harmony of the
+officers' mess.
+
+"I suppose I am responsible for the smashing of the second cutter, but
+I was trying to do my duty," replied De Forrest, vexed at the implied
+censure of his superior.
+
+"If you had staid at the pier this could not have happened."
+
+"But something else might have happened; and if my crew had run away,
+I should have been blamed just as much," growled the second
+lieutenant.
+
+"You were too sharp for your own good--that is all. But I don't mean
+to blame you, De Forrest," said Norwood, with a patronizing smile.
+"Perhaps I should have done the same thing if I had been in your
+place."
+
+"Stand by to lay on your oars!" shouted the coxswain, as the boat
+approached the water-logged second cutter. "Oars!"
+
+The crew stopped pulling, and levelled their oars.
+
+"In, bows! Stand by the boat-hooks!" continued the coxswain; and the
+two forward oarsmen grasped the boat-hooks, and took their station in
+the fore-sheets. "Hold water." And the ten oars dropped into the water
+as one, checking the onward progress of the cutter.
+
+The bowmen fastened to the second cutter, and recovering her painter,
+passed it astern to the coxswain, who made it fast to a ring on the
+stern-board. By this time the steamer, with the luckless crew of the
+stove boat, had disappeared behind an island. The first cutter pulled
+back to the ship, and De Forrest immediately reported to the first
+lieutenant, and explained his conduct in presence of the principal and
+the captain. He detailed his reasons for supposing his crew intended
+to run away, or to play some trick upon him.
+
+"I think you have done all that a careful and vigilant officer could,
+De Forrest; and so far as I can see, you are free from blame," replied
+Mr. Lowington.
+
+The fourth lieutenant glanced at Norwood.
+
+"Just what I said," added the latter, in a low tone.
+
+"If you made any mistake, it was in leaving your boat at the island,"
+continued the principal.
+
+"Just exactly my sentiments," whispered Norwood. "I don't blame the
+fourth lieutenant, but I shouldn't have done just as he did."
+
+"Where is that steamer bound?" asked Mr. Lowington of the pilot, who
+had not yet left the ship, and was really waiting to be invited to
+supper.
+
+"To Christiania, sir," replied the pilot, who, like all of his class
+on the coast of Norway, spoke a little English.
+
+"Where does she stop next?"
+
+"At Lillesand."
+
+"How far is that?"
+
+"About two miles."
+
+"Two miles! Why, it is farther than that to the sea," exclaimed Mr.
+Lowington.
+
+"He means Norwegian miles," suggested one of the instructors, who was
+listening with interest to the conversation.
+
+"True; I did not think of that. A Norwegian mile is about seven
+English miles. It is fourteen miles, then, to Lillesand."
+
+With the assistance of Professor Badois, who acted as interpreter, the
+pilot explained that the steamer which had just left was several hours
+late, and would go that night to Frederiksvaern, where the steamers
+from Bergen and Christiania made connections with the boat for
+Gottenburg and Copenhagen. The Christiania steamer would reach
+Christiansand the next evening, and the boys who had been carried
+away could return in her.
+
+"Why did she carry them off? It would not have taken five minutes to
+land them," added the principal.
+
+"She was very late, and her passengers for Gottenburg and Copenhagen
+would lose the steamer at Frederiksvaern if she does not arrive in
+season," the pilot explained through Professor Badois.
+
+But Mr. Lowington was so grateful that the crew of the second cutter
+had all escaped with their lives, that he was not disposed to be very
+critical over the conduct of the Norwegian steamer. The boys were
+safe, and would return the next night at farthest. The accident was
+talked about, during the rest of the day, on board of all the vessels
+of the squadron. The officers and seamen on board of the ship had
+witnessed the accident, and had seen all the crew of the second cutter
+go over the bows of the steamer. They had not observed, in the
+excitement of the moment, that ten, instead of nine, had left the
+wrecked boat; and as Ole Amundsen was dressed precisely like the crew,
+his presence in the cutter was not even suspected.
+
+The first cutter was sent to the town for Dr. Winstock and Mr. Mapps,
+and in an hour or two the excitement had entirely subsided. The
+routine of the ship went on as before, and as there was little work to
+be done, the absentees were hardly missed.
+
+At half past eight the next morning, the signal, "All hands, attend
+lecture," was flying on board of the Young America. The boats from
+the Josephine and the Tritonia came alongside the ship, bringing all
+the officers and crews of those vessels. Paul Kendall and lady, and
+their friends, were brought off from the shore; Shuffles and his wife
+also appeared, and a further delegation from each of the yachts asked
+admission to the ship to hear the lecture, or rather to attend the
+exercise in geography and history, for the occasion was even less
+formal than on the first cruise of the ship. The steerage was crowded,
+after the boatswain had piped the call, and Mr. Mapps was doubtless
+duly flattered by the number of his audience. On the foremast hung a
+large map of Sweden and Norway.
+
+"If you please, young gentlemen, we will begin with Scandinavia," said
+the professor, taking his place near the foremast, with the pointer in
+his hand. "What was Scandinavia?"
+
+"The ancient name of Norway, Sweden, and Denmark," replied one of the
+students.
+
+"The barbarous tribes from the northern part of Europe at different
+times invaded the southern sections, conquering various other tribes,
+occupying their territory, and thus mingling with all the people from
+whom originated the present nations of Europe. Thus, in remote ages,
+the Scandinavians, among others, by their conquests and their
+emigration, have contributed largely to the modern elements of
+society. With this explanation we will look at Scandinavia in detail,
+beginning with Norway. Between what degrees of latitude does it lie?"
+
+"Between forty and ninety," replied an enthusiastic youth.
+
+"True--quite right; and a safe answer. If you had said between one and
+ninety, the answer would have been just as good for any other country
+as for Norway. I would like to have the jacket fit a little closer."
+
+"Between fifty-eight and seventy-one, north," answered one who was
+better posted.
+
+"Exactly right; about the same latitude as Greenland, and our
+newly-acquired Alaska. Our ship is anchored in the same parallel as
+the northern part of Labrador, and one degree south of the southern
+point of Greenland. But it is not as 'cold as Greenland, here,' the
+temperature being some twelve degrees milder, because the warm waters
+of the Gulf Stream are discharged upon its shores. You know its
+boundaries. It is one thousand and eighty miles from the Naze to the
+North Cape, and varies from forty to two hundred and seventy miles in
+width. How many square miles has it?"
+
+"One hundred and twenty-three thousand square miles."
+
+"Or a little larger than the six New England States, New York, and New
+Jersey united. The country is mountainous, and abounds in picturesque
+scenery. Precipices, cataracts, and rushing torrents are very numerous
+in the central and northern parts. The Voeringfos is a waterfall, and
+the Rjukanfos, near the central part, are cataracts of about nine
+hundred feet perpendicular descent; but of course the volume of water
+is not very large. The highest mountains are between eight and nine
+thousand feet high. Norway has an abundance of rivers, but none of
+them are very long. The coast, as you have seen, is fringed with
+islands, which, with the numerous indentations, form a vast number of
+bays, straits, channels, and sounds, which are called _fjords_ here.
+One of the principal of these is Christiania Fjord, which you will
+ascend in a few days. The country also abounds in lakes, which, as in
+most mountainous regions, are very narrow, being simply the widenings
+of the rivers. The largest of these is Mioesen Lake, fifty-five miles
+long, and from one to twelve wide.
+
+"The soil is not very good, and the Norwegians are not progressive
+farmers. They cling to the methods of their sires, and modern
+improvements find but little favor among them. The winter is long, and
+the summer short; but by a provision of provident nature, the crops
+mature more rapidly than in some of the southern climes, as grain has
+been reaped six weeks after it was sowed. The principal crops are the
+grains; but the supply is not equal to the demand, and considerable
+importations are received from Denmark and Russia. In the south the
+farmers devote themselves to stock-raising, while in the north the
+Lapps derive nearly all the comforts of life from the reindeer, the
+care of which is their chief industry.
+
+"The extensive product of pine and fir have created a vast trade in
+lumber, which constitutes three fourths of the exports to the United
+Kingdom, and a considerable portion of the inhabitants in the wooded
+districts are employed in cutting, sawing, and sending to market the
+wealth of the forests. Next in importance to this are the fisheries,
+which yield about five million dollars a year. Cod, haddock, and
+herring are cured for exportation, and are an important source of
+revenue. Besides these, the roe of the cod is sent to France, Italy,
+and Spain, as bait for sardines. Norway supplies London with lobsters.
+Norway iron, as well as Swedish, is very celebrated; but the mines are
+poorly managed, as are those of copper and silver.
+
+"The kingdom of Norway is divided into eighteen provinces, which are
+called Amts. Its population, in 1865, was one million seven hundred
+thousand, showing an increase of about two hundred thousand in ten
+years. The government is a constitutional monarchy."
+
+"I thought it was a part of Sweden," said one of the students.
+
+"Not at all. The King of Sweden is also the King of Norway; but each
+country has its own independent and separate government. Each has its
+own legislature, makes its own laws, and raises and expends its own
+revenues. The king exercises his functions as ruler over both kingdoms
+through a council of state, composed of an equal number of Swedes and
+Norwegians, whose duty it is to advise the sovereign, and, in
+accordance with a peculiar feature of monarchy, to take the
+responsibility when any blunder is made; for "the king can do no
+wrong." If anything is wrong, some one else did it. Having the same
+king, who rules over each nation separately, is the only connection
+between Norway and Sweden. The former pays about one hundred and
+twenty thousand dollars of his civil list, and he is obliged to reside
+in Norway during a small portion of each year.
+
+"The constitution of Norway is one of the most democratic in Europe.
+The legislative and part of the executive power is vested in the
+Storthing, which means the 'great court,' composed of the
+representatives of the people. The king has but little power, though
+he has a limited veto upon the acts passed by the legislative body. He
+can create no order of nobility, or grant any titles or dignities. The
+members of the Storthing are elected indirectly by the people; and
+when they assemble, they divide themselves into two houses,
+corresponding to our Senate and House of Representatives. All acts
+must pass both chambers, and in case of disagreement, the two bodies
+come together, and discuss the subject.
+
+"The religion of Norway is Lutheran, and few of any other sect are to
+be found; formerly, no other was tolerated, but now religious freedom
+prevails, though Jesuits and monks of any order are sternly excluded.
+The clergy, who are generally very well educated, have an average
+income of about a thousand dollars a year, and I think are better paid
+than even in our own country. The people are well instructed, and one
+who cannot read and write is seldom found.
+
+"The early history of Norway is that of most of the countries of
+Europe--a powerful chief subjugated his neighbors, and united the
+tribes into a nation. Harold the Fair-haired, whose father had
+conquered the southern part of the country, fell in love with Gyda,
+the daughter of a petty king, who refused to wed him till he had
+absolute sway over the entire country. Pleased with the lady's spirit,
+he vowed never to cut or comb his hair till all Norway lay at his
+feet. It appears that he eventually had occasion for his barber's
+services, and wedded the lady. This was in the ninth century; and the
+victories of Harold drove many of the Norsemen, or Northmen, to seek
+their fortunes in other lands. They discovered and colonized Greenland
+and Iceland, and even established settlements on the continental
+portion of North America. Traces of them have been found on the Gulf
+of St. Lawrence, and some claim that they founded settlements farther
+south. They figure largely in the early history of England and
+Scotland, and even carried their piratical arms into Russia, Flanders,
+France, Italy, and other territories.
+
+"A son of Harold, who had been educated in England, brought
+Christianity into Norway; but, it was three centuries before the new
+faith had established itself. Like the Hindoos, Greeks, and Romans,
+the ancient Scandinavians had a mythology, upon which their religion
+was based. They believed that in the beginning all was chaos, in which
+was a fountain that sent forth twelve rivers. These streams flowed so
+far from their source that the waters froze, and the ice, defying the
+modern law of nature, sank till the fathomless deep was filled up. Far
+south of the world of mist, in which this miracle was wrought, was a
+world of fire and light, whence proceeded a hot wind that melted the
+ice, from the drops of which came the ice-giant, whose name was Ymir,
+and from whom proceeded a race of ice-giants. From the wedding of the
+ice and heat of the two extremes of the world came a cow, from which
+ran four streams of milk, the food of the ice-giants. While this
+wonderful beast was licking the salt stones in the ice, which formed
+her diet, a quantity of human hair grew out of them, and the next day
+a human head was developed, and then appeared a whole man. Boer, the
+son of this man, married a daughter of one of the ice-giants, and they
+had three children, the oldest of whom was Odin, who became the rulers
+of heaven and earth, because they were all good, while the children of
+Ymir, the ice-giant, were evil. Then, as now, the Good and the Evil
+were at war. Finally the ice-giant was slain, and being thrown into
+space, the world was created from his body; his blood forming the sea
+and the rivers; his flesh the earth; his hair the grass; his bones the
+rocks; his teeth and broken jaws the stones; and of his head the
+heavens, at the four ends of which were placed four dwarfs, called
+North, South, East, and West. Of this giant's brains, thrown into the
+air, they formed the clouds, while of the sparks from the land of fire
+were made the stars.
+
+"As the sons of Boer, who, you must remember, were the gods of heaven
+and earth, were walking on the shore of the sea, they discovered two
+blocks, whereof they created a man and a woman. Odin gave them life
+and souls, while his brothers endowed them with other human faculties
+and powers. Odin was the Jupiter, the chief, of the northern gods. He
+is the god of song and of war, and was the inventor of the Runic
+characters, or alphabet. He was the ruler of Valhalla, the home of
+heroes slain in battle. There is much more that is curious and
+interesting in the mythology of the Scandinavians, which I must ask
+you to read for yourselves.
+
+"Olaf II. propagated Christianity with fire and sword. He demolished
+the temples of paganism, and founded Trondhjem, or Drontheim, as it is
+called on our maps. His successor, St. Olaf, followed his example,
+till his cruelty excited a rebellion, and Canute the Great, of
+Denmark, landing in Norway, was elected king. Olaf fled into Sweden,
+where he organized an army, and attempted to recover his throne; but
+he was defeated and slain in a battle near Trondhjem. His body was
+found, a few years later, in a perfect state of preservation, which
+was regarded as a miracle, and Olaf was canonized as a saint. His
+remains are said to have wrought many miracles, and up to the time of
+the Reformation, thousands of pilgrims annually visited his shrine at
+Trondhjem. Even in London churches were dedicated to this saint.
+
+"Canute gave Norway to his son Sweyn, who, upon the death of his
+father, was dispossessed of the throne by Magnus I., the son of St.
+Olaf. He was succeeded by Harold III., a great warrior, who founded
+Osloe, now Christiania. After Olaf III. and Magnus III. came Sigurd,
+who, in 1107, made a pilgrimage of four years to Jerusalem, with a
+fleet of sixty vessels, and distinguished himself in the holy wars.
+His death was followed by civil dissensions, until Hako IV. obtained
+the throne. He lost his life in an attempt to retain the Hebrides
+Islands, claimed by Scotland. Then war with Denmark, the monopoly of
+trade by the Hanse towns, and a fearful plague, which depopulated
+whole sections, produced a decline in the national prosperity of
+Norway. Hako VI., who died in 1380, had married the daughter of the
+King of Denmark, and the crown of Norway descended to his son, Olaf
+III., of Denmark, in whom the sovereignties of Norway and Denmark were
+united. Olaf was succeeded by his mother Margaret, celebrated in
+history as 'the Semiramis of the North.' She conquered Sweden, and
+annexed it to her own dominions. By the 'Union of Calmar,' signed by
+the principal nobles and prelates of the three Scandinavian kingdoms,
+the three crowns were united in one person, the subjects of each to
+have equal rights. This compact was disregarded, and Norway was
+hopelessly oppressed by the ruler. The Union, however, continued till
+1623; but Norway was subject to Denmark till 1814.
+
+"When the allied powers of Europe, which were engaged in putting down
+the first Napoleon, rearranged the map of Europe, the destiny of
+Norway was changed. Russia wanted Finland, and she offered Norway in
+compensation for it to Sweden, with the further condition that
+Bernadotte should join the allies. He accepted the terms, and the King
+of Denmark was compelled, by force of arms, to cede Norway to Sweden.
+The Norwegians would not submit to the change, and declared their
+independence. Prince Christian, of Denmark, who was then governor
+general of Norway, called a convention of the people at Eidsvold, and
+a new constitution was framed, and the prince elected King of Norway.
+Bernadotte invaded Norway with a Swedish army, while the allies
+blockaded the coast. Resistance was hopeless, and as Sweden offered
+favorable terms, Christian abdicated, and an arrangement was
+immediately effected. The constitution was accepted by the king, and
+Norway became an independent nation, united to Sweden under one king.
+Bernadotte became King of Sweden and Norway under the title of Charles
+XIV., John. He refused the Norwegians a separate national flag; but
+when he attempted to alter the constitution to suit his own views, the
+Storthing resolutely and successfully resisted his interference. This
+body abolished titles of nobility--an act which the king vetoed; but
+three successive Storthings passed the law, and thus, by the
+constitution, made it valid in spite of the veto. The Norwegians were
+not to be intimidated even by the appearance of a military force, and
+have ever been jealous to the last degree of their rights and
+privileges as a nation.
+
+"Bernadotte was succeeded by his son Oscar I., who gave the Norwegians
+a separate national flag; and he flattered the vanity of the people by
+allowing himself to be styled the 'King of Norway and Sweden' in all
+public acts relating to Norway, instead of 'Sweden and Norway.' In
+1859, Oscar was succeeded by his son Charles XV., who is now the King
+of Sweden and Norway. In the history of Denmark and Sweden, more will
+be said of this kingdom.
+
+"In French, Norway is _Norvege_; in German, _Norwegen_; in Spanish,
+_Noruega_; and _Norge_ in the Scandinavian languages. Now, I dare say
+you would like to visit the shore."
+
+The professor closed his remarks, and the several boatswains piped
+away their crews.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+MR. CLYDE BLACKLOCK AND MOTHER.
+
+
+Belonging to the squadron were fourteen boats, ranging from the
+twelve-oar barge down to the four-oar cutter. In the waters of
+Brockway harbor, rowing had been the principal exercise of the
+students, though the daily evolutions in seamanship were well
+calculated to develop the muscles and harden the frame. They had been
+carefully trained in the art, and, enjoying the amusement which it
+afforded, they were apt scholars. As the safety of the squadron and
+the saving of life at sea might often depend upon the skill with which
+the boats were handled, the principal devoted a great deal of
+attention to this branch of nautical education. To give an additional
+zest to the exercise, he had occasionally offered prizes at the
+boat-races which the students were encouraged to pull; and the first
+cutter was now in possession of a beautiful silk flag, won by the
+power of the crew in rowing.
+
+Every boy in the squadron was a swimmer. In the summer season this
+accomplishment had been taught as an art, an hour being devoted to the
+lesson every day, if the weather was suitable. Cleats, the adult
+boatswain of the Josephine, was the "professor" of the art, having
+been selected for the responsible position on account of his
+remarkable skill as a swimmer. The boys were trained in diving,
+floating, swimming under water, and taught to perform various
+evolutions. Not alone in the tranquil bay were they educated to the
+life of the fishes, but also in the surf, and among the great waves.
+They were taught to get into a boat from the water in a heavy sea. A
+worn-out old longboat had done duty during the preceding summer as a
+wreck, in order to familiarize the students with the possibilities of
+their future experience. It was so prepared that a portion of its
+planking could be suddenly knocked out, and the boat almost instantly
+filled with water; and the problem was, to meet this emergency in the
+best manner. Other boats were at hand in case of a real accident, or
+if any naturally timid fellow lost his presence of mind. While the
+"wreck," as the practice boat was called, was moving along over the
+waves, pulled by half a dozen boys, Cleats, without warning or notice
+of his intention, opened the aperture near her keel. Sometimes she was
+loaded with stones, so that she went to the bottom like a rock, though
+this part of the programme was always carried out on a beach, where
+the receding tide would enable the professor to recover the boat. The
+crew were then to save themselves by swimming ashore, or to another
+boat. Sometimes, also, the "wreck" was loaded with broken spars,
+pieces of board, and bits of rope; and the problem was for the crew
+to construct a raft in the water, often in a rough sea. All these
+exercises, and many others, were heartily enjoyed by the boys, and a
+ringing cheer always announced the safety of a crew, either on the
+shore, in a boat, or on the raft.
+
+Many persons, and even those who are tolerable swimmers, have been
+drowned simply by the loss of their presence of mind. The dashing of
+the waves, or the great distance of the land or other place of safety,
+intimidates them, and they are unable to use their powers. But the
+students of the squadron were gradually and carefully accustomed to
+the water, so that they could swim a reasonable distance without
+wearing themselves out, could rest their limbs by floating, and were
+taught to avail themselves of any expedient to secure their safety. If
+a boat was stove on the rocks in a surf, or was run down by a vessel,
+the fact of being in the water did not frighten them out of their
+wits, for they had been trained to feel quite at home, as in their
+native element. They were actually drilled to confront danger in
+every imaginable form. But a gentle and timid boy was not pitched
+into the water, even after he had learned to swim. His constitutional
+shrinking was slowly and skilfully overcome, so that even the most
+delicate--though but few such ever found their way into the ranks of
+the squadron--took to the water as a pastime. Of course the degree of
+proficiency in the art of swimming, and of the acquired ability to
+meet danger in the water, differed very widely in different boys; but
+all were accustomed to the waves, and, in a measure, to leading the
+life of a duck or a fish.
+
+The crews of the several boats piped over the side, and took their
+places, the rest of the students being distributed in the barges and
+cutters, till only the adult officers remained in the ship. Each one,
+as it was loaded, pulled off, and took its station in the order in
+which the boat squadron usually moved. The commodore's barge and the
+ship's first cutter, each twelve oars, led the van, while the other
+boats came in four ranks of three each. All the boats carried the
+American flag at the stern, and each one had its number at the bow.
+All the Young America's boats had their numbers on a white, the
+Josephine's on a green, and the Tritonia's on a blue flag.
+
+The tactics of the boat squadron were many and various, which had
+been adopted more to give interest to the exercise than for any
+inherent utility. These movements were regulated by signals from the
+commodore's barge. Mr. Lowington had decided to make an excursion
+among the islands in the Fjord before dinner, and visit the town in
+the afternoon. A pilot was put in the commodore's barge, and Captain
+Cumberland, as acting flag officer, was in command of the squadron.
+The principal and Professor Badois were passengers in his barge.
+
+The cutters were formed in their usual array, and the two boats
+from the yachts brought up the rear. The signal officer, who was a
+quartermaster from the ship, at the order of the captain, elevated the
+white flag crossed with red, with which all the signals were made. The
+coxswains of the several boats could see this flag, while the oarsmen
+could not, being back to the barge, and not allowed to look behind
+them.
+
+"Oars!" said each coxswain, as soon as the signal appeared.
+
+At this command the several crews, who had been laying on their oars,
+prepared for the stroke. The signal officer dropped the flag to the
+port side of the barge.
+
+"Give way!" added each coxswain; and the boat squadron moved off.
+
+In order to keep the lines full, the larger quarter boat of the Grace
+had been borrowed and manned, and now took the place of the second
+cutter, which had been stove, and upon which the three carpenters of
+the squadron were now at work, making the necessary repairs. The fleet
+made a splendid appearance, with the flags flying, and with the
+officers and crews in their best uniforms. The people on the shore,
+and on board of the various vessels in the harbor, gathered to see the
+brilliant array. The crew of an English steamer cheered lustily, and
+the lady passengers waved their handkerchiefs. Suddenly the signal on
+the commodore's barge went up again.
+
+"Stand by to toss!" said the several coxswains, as the fleet of boats
+came abreast of the steamer, which was the Orlando, bound from Hull to
+Christiania.
+
+The signal went down to the port side.
+
+"Toss!" continued the coxswains, only loud enough to be heard by the
+crews, for they had been taught that the unnecessary screaming of
+orders makes an officer seem ridiculous, and injures the effect of the
+manoeuvre.
+
+At the word every oar went up, and was held perpendicularly in the air
+with the left hand. A bugle blast from the barge at this moment
+brought every student to his feet, with his right hand to his cap.
+
+"One!" said the coxswain of each boat, at a dip of the signal flag.
+
+A rousing cheer, accompanied by a swing of the cap, followed, and
+was twice repeated, making up the complement of the three cheers, in
+return for the salutations of the steamer's people. Her crew returned
+the compliment in like manner. At another blast of the bugle, the
+crews were seated with their oars still up. Again the signal in the
+barge was elevated.
+
+"Stand by!" said the coxswains, which was only a warning to be ready.
+
+The flag dropped to port.
+
+"Let fall!" added the coxswain; and all the oars dropped into the
+water together, while the flag was again elevated. "Give way!" and the
+stroke was resumed.
+
+The passengers of the Orlando clapped their hands vigorously, as they
+witnessed the perfection of the movements. The fleet proceeded up
+the bay towards the west front of the town, where a considerable
+collection of people had assembled to witness the novel parade. The
+barge led the way to the extreme west of the bay, where the signal
+flag was again exhibited, and then swung first to the port and then to
+the starboard. This was the signal for coming into single line, and
+the coxswain of each boat gave the orders necessary to bring it into
+range. It was so managed that each boat came into the new order as it
+turned to pass in front of the town; so that they proceeded in a
+single line before the people, but not more than twenty feet apart.
+Once more the signal flag appeared, with a double motion upwards.
+
+"Stand by to lay on your oars!" said the coxswains. "Oars!" they
+continued, as the flag swung down to starboard. "Hold water!"
+
+These orders soon brought the boats to a stand. The signal flag moved
+in a horizontal circle.
+
+"Pull, starboard; back, port. Give way!" continued the coxswains; and
+the effect of this evolution was to turn the boats as on a pivot.
+"Oars!" and the crew ceased pulling, with their oars all on a level,
+and the blades feathered.
+
+The boats had been turned half round, and each coxswain aligned his
+own by the barge on the right. In this position three cheers were
+given in compliment to the people on the shore, though the Norwegians
+seemed to be too dull and heavy to comprehend the nature of the
+movement. The boats swung again, and continued on their way, in single
+line, through the narrow passage between Odderoe and the main land.
+Under the direction of the native pilot, the barge led the way among
+the islands, affording the students an opportunity to see the shores.
+When the fleet came into the broad channel, the order was resumed, as
+at first, and after various manoeuvres, it was dismissed, each boat
+returning to the vessel to which it belonged.
+
+The appearance of the fleet, including the two beautiful yachts, and
+the evolutions of the boats, had created a decided sensation on board
+of the Orlando, which was crowded with passengers, most of them
+tourists on their way to the interior of Norway. The crews of the
+several vessels piped to dinner as soon as they returned from the
+excursion; but the meal was hardly finished before visitors from the
+steamer began to arrive, and the boatmen in the harbor made a good
+harvest on the occasion. Among those who came to the ship was an
+elegantly dressed lady, with her son and daughter, attended by a
+servant man in livery. Mrs. Garberry Blacklock was duly presented to
+the principal by one of the gentlemen who had introduced himself. She
+was evidently a very fine lady; for she was "distinguished" in her
+manners as well as in her dress. And her son, Clyde Blacklock, was as
+evidently a very fine young gentleman, though he was only fourteen
+years of age. It is doubtful whether Miss Celia Blacklock could be
+regarded as a very fine young lady, for she appeared to be very
+pretty, and very modest and retiring, with but a very moderate
+estimate of her own importance.
+
+For the tenth time Mr. Lowington briefly explained the nature of the
+institution over which he presided; and the fine lady listened with
+languishing _ennui_.
+
+"But it is a very rough life for young gentlemen," suggested Mrs.
+Blacklock. "I should fancy they would become very, _very_ rude."
+
+"Not necessarily," replied the principal. "We intend that the students
+shall behave like gentlemen, and we think the discipline of the ship
+has a tendency to promote good manners."
+
+"They must live like sailors, and sailors are very, _very_ rude."
+
+"Not necessarily, madam. There is nothing in the occupation itself
+that--"
+
+"But I wish to know what the fellows do," interposed Mr. Clyde
+Blacklock.
+
+"There is nothing in the occupation itself that begets rudeness,"
+added Mr. Lowington, giving no attention to the young gentleman, who
+had so impolitely broken in upon the conversation of his elders. "I
+see no reason why a young man cannot be a gentleman in a ship as well
+as on shore."
+
+"I dare say you have sailors to do the dirty work."
+
+"No, madam; our students do all the work."
+
+"Do they put their own fingers into the pitch and the tar?" inquired
+the lady, with a curl of the lip which indicated her horror.
+
+"Certainly; but we think pitch and tar are not half so defiling as
+evil thoughts and bad manners."
+
+"They are very, _very_ disagreeable. The odor of tar and pitch is
+intolerable."
+
+"We do not find it so, for--"
+
+"I say, I wish to know what the fellows do."
+
+"We are accustomed to the odor of them," continued the principal. "To
+some people the scent of musk, and even otto of roses, is not
+pleasant; and, for my part, I rather enjoy that of tar and pitch."
+
+"That is very, _very_ singular. But Clyde desires to know what the
+young gentlemen do," added the lady, glancing at her son, behind whom
+stood the man in livery, as though he were the boy's exclusive
+property.
+
+"They have a regular routine of study," replied Mr. Lowington,
+addressing the lady, and declining even to glance at the original
+inquirer, for the rudeness of Mr. Clyde in interrupting the
+conversation seemed to merit a rebuke. "They attend to the studies
+usually pursued in the highest class of academies, including the
+modern languages and navigation, the latter being a speciality in the
+course."
+
+"I don't care what they study," said Clyde. "What do they do in the
+ship?"
+
+"We prepare boys for college, and beyond that pursue a regular college
+course, so far as our facilities will permit. Our students have the
+advantage of travel; for, in the present cruise, we shall visit all
+the principal nations of Europe."
+
+"What do they do in the ship?"
+
+"Clyde desires to know what the boys do in the ship," added the lady.
+
+"They learn good manners, for the first thing, madam. There are
+fifteen officers in this vessel, and nine in each of the others. They
+are all students, who take their rank according to their merit. The
+best scholar in each is the captain, and so on."
+
+"Does the captain manage the ship?" asked Clyde.
+
+"Certainly."
+
+"I should like to be the captain," exclaimed the young gentleman.
+
+"Do you think you could manage the ship?" asked his mother, with a
+smile which expressed the pride she felt in the towering ambition of
+her son.
+
+"I could, if any fellow could."
+
+"Clyde is very fond of the sea; indeed, he worries me sadly by his
+adventurous spirit," said his mother.
+
+"I think it would do him good to go to sea," added the principal,
+rather dryly.
+
+"The students made a beautiful appearance in their boats to-day,"
+continued Mrs. Blacklock. "It was really very, _very_ wonderful."
+
+"They handle the boats very well indeed, but their skill was only
+acquired by long and careful training. As we have a considerable
+number of visitors on board, madam, we will show you a little
+seamanship. Captain Cumberland," he added, turning to the young
+commander, who had been making himself agreeable to Miss Celia
+Blacklock.
+
+The captain asked the young lady to excuse him, and stepping up to the
+principal, bowed gracefully, and raised his cap.
+
+"He's a regular swell," said Clyde to his man.
+
+"He's a young gentleman as is highly polished, which these naval
+officers is generally," replied Jeems.
+
+Mr. Lowington directed the captain to call all hands, and go through
+the evolutions of loosing and furling, for the gratification of the
+guests of the ship. Captain Cumberland bowed and raised his cap again
+as he retired, and the principal hoped that Clyde would take a lesson
+in good manners from him.
+
+"Will you walk to the quarter-deck, Miss Blacklock," said the captain,
+touching his cap to the young lady, to whom he had been formally
+introduced by the principal. "We are going to loose and furl, and you
+can see better there than here."
+
+"With pleasure," replied Miss Celia. "But what did you say you were
+going to do?"
+
+"Loose and furl the sails," replied the captain, as he conducted the
+fair miss to the quarter-deck, where they were followed by Mr.
+Lowington and the rest of the party.
+
+"Mr. Judson," said the commander.
+
+"Here, sir," replied the first lieutenant.
+
+"Call all hands to loose and furl."
+
+"All hands, sir," responded Judson, touching his cap to his superior,
+as all on board were required to do.
+
+"They are all swells," said Clyde to his man.
+
+"All hands, loose sails!" shouted the boatswain, as he blew the proper
+blast on his whistle.
+
+In a few moments every officer and seaman was at his station for the
+manoeuvre indicated by the call. The students, aware that they were
+simply to "show off," were fully determined to astonish the wondering
+crowd on the decks.
+
+"Stand by to lay aloft, the ready-men!" shouted the first lieutenant,
+as he received the order from the captain.
+
+It was repeated by the second lieutenant on the forecastle, the third
+in the waist, and the fourth on the quarter-deck.
+
+"All ready, sir!" reported the several officers.
+
+"Lay aloft!"
+
+At the command those whose duty it was to prepare the sails and
+rigging for the manoeuvre sprang up the rigging, and in three
+minutes the midshipman aloft reported that all was ready.
+
+"Lay aloft, sail-loosers!" continued the first lieutenant.
+
+The seamen, who were arranged in proper order on deck, the royal
+yard men first, then those who belonged on the top-gallant yards, the
+topsail, and the lower yards, placed in succession, so that each could
+reach his station without passing others, leaped into the rigging, and
+went up like so many cats.
+
+"Man the boom tricing-lines!"
+
+These are ropes by which the studding-sail booms, which lie on the
+yards, are hauled up out of the way.
+
+"Trice up!"
+
+The studding-sail booms were drawn up.
+
+"Lay out! Loose sails!"
+
+The hands jumped upon the foot-ropes, and worked themselves out to
+their places on the yards, where they loosed the sails, overhauled the
+rigging, and made everything ready for the final evolution. The
+midshipman in the tops reported to the officers on deck when the
+preparations were completed, and the lieutenants on deck, in their
+turn, reported to the first lieutenant.
+
+"Let fall!" said the executive officer; and all, as one, the sails
+dropped from the yards.
+
+The precision of the movement called forth a demonstration of applause
+from the visitors. Mr. Clyde Blacklock stood with his mouth open,
+looking up at the students on the yards, but occasionally glancing at
+the "swellish" first lieutenant, who seemed to be the master-spirit of
+the occasion, because he spoke in a loud voice, while the captain, who
+really controlled the evolutions, could hardly be heard, except by the
+executive officer, to whom alone his order was given.
+
+"Lay in! Lay down from aloft!" said the first lieutenant; and in a
+moment more all hands were on deck again.
+
+"Do you ever man the yards, sir?" asked a gentleman of the principal.
+
+"Occasionally, sir--not often. You are aware that it requires some
+preparation, for we are obliged to extend life-lines over the yards,"
+replied Mr. Lowington. "We are not in condition to do it now. If we
+should happen to be visited by the king at Copenhagen or Stockholm,
+and had previous notice, we should certainly do it."
+
+The crew were then required to go through the manoeuvre of furling
+sails, which was performed with the same precision as the first
+evolution, and to the great satisfaction of the guests, who were then
+invited to visit the cabins and steerage of the ship.
+
+"Mother, I like this thing," said Mr. Clyde Blacklock.
+
+"It's all very, _very_ fine, Clyde," replied the tender mother.
+
+"And the ship's going up the Baltic, and then up the Mediterranean."
+
+"Yes, Clyde."
+
+"And I want to go in her."
+
+"You, Clyde!"
+
+"Yes, that's what I say."
+
+"And be a sailor?"
+
+"I always told you I wanted to be a sailor. Didn't that head master,
+or whatever he is, say it would do me good to go to sea?"
+
+"Perhaps he did, but I can't go with you, my dear."
+
+"I don't want you to go with me. I'm not a baby!" protested the
+indignant youth.
+
+"But you are my only son, dear."
+
+"If you had forty only sons, it would be all the same to me. I say I
+want to go in this ship, and be a sailor."
+
+Mrs. Blacklock was appalled, and was sorely disturbed by the
+announcement of her son. The young gentleman insisted that he should
+be entered at once as a member of the ship's company. He suggested to
+his anxious mother that she could travel by land while he went by sea,
+and that she could see him every time the ship went into port. The
+lady appeared to see no alternative, but evidently felt compelled to
+yield to her son's demand. It was plain enough, even to a casual
+observer, that Clyde was the head of the family. Mrs. Blacklock
+promised to speak to the principal, but she hoped he would not be
+able to take her son. Before she had an opportunity to make the
+application, the Orlando's bell rang for her passengers to return. The
+sound seemed to be a relief to the lady; but Mr. Clyde put his foot
+down just there, and upset all her hopes.
+
+"Come, Clyde; the Orlando is ready to go," said she.
+
+"Let her go," replied the hopeful son.
+
+"But we must go on board."
+
+"You may go. I'm off to sea in this ship."
+
+"Not now, my dear," pleaded Mrs. Blacklock.
+
+"Now's the time. If you don't speak to that head master yourself, I
+shall do so."
+
+"Not now, my dearest boy. This ship is going to Christiania, and we
+will speak to the gentleman on the subject when she arrives. Come,
+Clyde; the boat is waiting for us, and all the other passengers have
+gone."
+
+"You can't fool me, mother. I'm going to sea now. I like this ship,
+and I rather like those swells of officers."
+
+Clyde positively refused to leave the ship, though his mother, almost
+in tears, begged him to accompany her.
+
+"My son won't go with me," said she, as Mr. Lowington came towards her
+to ascertain the cause of their delay.
+
+"If you desire, madam, the boatswain will put him into the boat for
+you," replied the principal.
+
+"Put me into the boat!" exclaimed the indignant youth. "I should be
+glad to see him do it!"
+
+"Should you? Peaks!"
+
+"On deck, sir," replied the big boatswain, touching his cap to the
+principal.
+
+"Pray, don't, sir--don't!" begged the lady. "Clyde wants to go to sea
+in your ship."
+
+"O, does he, indeed!" exclaimed the principal. "We have a vacant
+place, and he can be accommodated."
+
+The fond mother's heart sank at this announcement. Mr. Lowington,
+though his experience with students of this description had been far
+from satisfactory, felt that his duty to humanity required him to take
+this boy, who was evidently on the high road to ruin through the weak
+indulgence of his mother.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+A DAY AT CHRISTIANSAND.
+
+
+"But, madam, your steamer seems to be on the point of starting,"
+suggested Mr. Lowington, as the Orlando rang her bell, and whistled
+violently.
+
+"I cannot help it," replied the lady, apparently taking no notice of
+the steamer. "I came over here on a pleasure excursion, and now I feel
+as though I had lost my son."
+
+"Lost him, madam! We intend to save him," laughed Mr. Lowington. "But
+we have no claim upon him. If you desire to leave in the steamer, the
+boatswain shall put the boy on board whether he is willing or not."
+
+"No, no; that would be very, _very_ harsh. Let the steamer go. This
+matter is of vastly more consequence than going to Christiania.
+James," she added, turning to the man in livery, "you will take the
+boat, get our baggage from the steamer, and take it to the hotel on
+shore."
+
+"Yes, mem," replied James, as he very deliberately went over the side
+into the boat.
+
+"This will be a sad day to me, sir," continued Mrs. Blacklock, as she
+glanced at her son, who was whistling an air from the last opera, as
+indifferent as though his mother had been at peace in her own
+drawing-room.
+
+"I beg to repeat, madam, that I have not the slightest wish to take
+your son into this institution."
+
+"But Clyde insists upon joining the ship, and what can I do?"
+
+"You can say no, if you please."
+
+"You had better not say it, mother; if you do, I will run away, and go
+to sea in a merchant ship," added Clyde, shaking his head.
+
+"You hear, sir, what he says," replied Mrs. Blacklock, with a long and
+deep sigh.
+
+"That would be the very best thing in the world for a boy troubled
+with his complaint," answered Mr. Lowington.
+
+"I have no complaint; I'm not sick," growled Clyde.
+
+"I'm afraid you are, my boy, though you don't know it. The most
+dangerous maladies often make great progress even before their
+existence is suspected."
+
+"Nothing ails me," added Clyde.
+
+"This seems to be a very nice ship, and you say the students are all
+gentlemen," continued the lady, glancing around her at the ship and
+the crew. "If Clyde must go to sea--"
+
+"I must, mother," interposed the young gentleman, very decidedly.
+
+"If he must go to sea, he had better go with you, sir."
+
+"If you will walk into the cabin, madam, I will show you our
+regulations," said the principal, leading the way down the steps.
+
+Clyde followed, apparently unwilling that a word should be said which
+he could not hear.
+
+"I want to speak with your mother alone," interposed Mr. Lowington.
+
+"I'm going too," persisted Clyde, after Mrs. Blacklock had descended
+the stairs.
+
+"I prefer to see your mother alone," added the principal, firmly.
+
+"You are going to talk about me, and I want to hear what is said,"
+replied the youth, rudely.
+
+"Peaks, remain here," said the principal to the big boatswain, who had
+followed them to the companionway.
+
+Mr. Lowington descended the steps, and Peaks slipped in behind him,
+fully understanding his duty without any explanations. Clyde attempted
+to follow, but the entrance was effectually blockaded by the stalwart
+forward officer.
+
+"Get out of my way; I want to go down there," said Clyde, in no gentle
+tones.
+
+"It can't be done, my hearty," replied Peaks.
+
+"I'm going down, any way."
+
+"I think not, my little gentleman."
+
+"Yes, I am! Get out of my way."
+
+"Ease off, my hearty. Don't get up a squall."
+
+"I want to see my mother," growled Clyde.
+
+"You were not invited to the cabin, and your mother was," answered
+Peaks, very mildly.
+
+"I don't care if I wasn't; I'm going down."
+
+"So you said before;" and the boatswain tried to pacify the youngster,
+and to induce him to be reasonable; but Clyde had always had his own
+way, and was ready to fight for it now, even though he had nothing to
+gain by it.
+
+Captain Cumberland was still walking with Miss Celia, explaining to
+her the nature of the discipline on board, and giving her an account
+of the voyage across the Atlantic. A group of the officers had
+collected on the quarter-deck, and, much amused at the scene, were
+observing the conduct of Clyde. As he became more violent, his sister
+tried to quiet him, and induce him to behave like a gentleman; but he
+replied to her in a tone and with words which made the captain's
+cheeks tinge with indignation.
+
+Finally, when he found that abuse had no effect upon the stout
+boatswain, he drew back, and made a desperate plunge at his heavy
+opponent. Peaks caught him by the shoulders, and lifted him off his
+feet like a baby. Taking him in his arms, with one hand over his
+mouth, to smother his cries, he bore him to the waist, where his yells
+could not be heard by his mother.
+
+"Be quiet, little one," said Peaks, as he seated himself on the
+main-hatch, and twined his long legs around those of the prisoner, so
+that he was held as fast as though he had been in the folds of an
+anaconda. "Hold still, now, and I'll spin you a sea-yarn. Once on a
+time there was a little boy that wanted to go to sea--"
+
+"Let me go, or I'll kill you!" sputtered Clyde; but the boatswain
+covered his mouth again, and silenced him.
+
+"Kill me! That would be wicked. But I'm not a mosquito, to be cracked
+in the fingers of such a dear little boy as you are. But you snapped
+off my yarn; and if you don't hold still, I can't spin it ship-shape."
+
+Clyde had well nigh exhausted his breath in his fruitless struggle,
+and before his sister went far enough forward to see him, he was
+tolerably calm, because he had no more strength to resist. Then the
+boatswain told his story of a boy that wanted to go to sea, but found
+that he could not have his own way on board the ship.
+
+In the cabin, Mrs. Blacklock told a pitiful story of the wilfulness of
+her son; that she was obliged to do just as he said, and if he wanted
+anything, however absurd it might be, she was obliged to give it to
+him, or he made the house too "hot" for her. Her husband had died when
+the children were small, and the whole care of them had devolved on
+her. Clyde had made her miserable for several years. She had sent
+him to several celebrated schools; but he had got into trouble
+immediately, and she had been compelled to take him away, to prevent
+him from killing himself and her, as she expressed it. Her husband had
+left her a handsome property, but she was afraid her son would spend
+it all, or compel her to do so, before he became of age.
+
+Mr. Lowington repeated only what most of her friends had told her
+before--that her weak indulgence would be the ruin of the boy; that he
+needed a strong arm. He was willing to take him into the Academy ship,
+but he must obey all the rules and follow all the regulations. The
+perplexed mother realized the truth of all he said.
+
+"You will take him as an officer--won't you, sir?" she asked, when
+she had in a measure reconciled herself to the discipline proposed.
+
+"Certainly not, madam," replied the principal. "If he ever becomes an
+officer, he must work himself up to that position, as the other
+students do."
+
+"But you could let him have one of the rooms in the cabin. I am
+willing to pay extra for his tuition."
+
+"No, madam; he must go with the other students, and do precisely as
+they do."
+
+"Where will his servant lodge?"
+
+"His servant?"
+
+"Yes, James. He will want a servant, for I don't know that he ever
+dressed himself alone."
+
+"He can have no servant, except those of the ship."
+
+"That's very, _very_ hard."
+
+"Perhaps it is, but if the boy can't dress himself alone, he must lie
+in his berth till he acquires the art by hard thinking. I wish you to
+understand the matter thoroughly before you leave him, madam."
+
+Mrs. Blacklock struggled with the hard terms; but even to her the case
+seemed like a desperate one, and she was willing at last to try the
+experiment, though she intended to follow the ship wherever she went,
+to save him from suicide when his situation became absolutely
+hopeless. The terms arranged, she followed Mr. Lowington on deck,
+where Clyde was discovered in the loving embrace of the big boatswain,
+who released him as soon as he saw the lady.
+
+"Now, Clyde, my dear, we have arranged it all," said Mrs. Blacklock;
+and it ought to be added that such a result would have been utterly
+impossible if the subject of the negotiations had been present.
+
+"I don't care if you have," replied Clyde, bestowing a fiery glance
+upon the boatswain, who was smiling as blandly as though earth had no
+naughty boys.
+
+"Why, what's the matter, Clyde!" demanded the anxious mother.
+
+"I've had enough of this ship," howled the little gentleman, as he
+glanced again at the stout forward officer.
+
+The complacent face of Peaks maddened him, and Clyde felt that,
+perhaps for the first time in his life, he had lost a battle. He could
+not bear the sight of the boatswain's placid features, unruffled by
+anything like anger or malice. He felt that he had not even provoked
+his powerful adversary. He howled in his anger, and then he cried in
+his desperation. Suddenly he seized a wooden belaying-pin from the
+rail, and shied it at the boatswain's head. Peaks caught it in his
+hand, as though he had been playing toss-ball with his victim; but the
+next instant his anaconda fold encircled the youth again. Mrs.
+Blacklock screamed with terror.
+
+"There is no harm done, madam," interposed the principal. "We don't
+allow boys to throw things here."
+
+"You are very, _very_ harsh with the poor boy."
+
+"And the poor boy is very, very harsh with us. He throws belaying-pins
+at our heads."
+
+"He did not mean any harm."
+
+"Perhaps not; but that's an unpleasant way of manifesting his regard."
+
+"I've had enough of this ship! I won't go in her!" howled Clyde,
+struggling to escape from the grasp of the officer.
+
+"Do you hear that, sir? Poor boy!"
+
+"He will soon learn better than to behave in this violent manner. We
+can cure him in ten minutes after you have left the ship."
+
+"What! whip him?" exclaimed the mother, with horror.
+
+"No, madam; we never strike a student under any circumstances, unless
+it be in self-defence; but if a boy won't go when ordered, we carry
+him. We always have force enough to do this without injury to the
+person."
+
+"But see the poor boy struggle!"
+
+"It will do him no harm."
+
+"He says now that he will not go in the ship."
+
+"If I were his parent, it would be as I said, not as he said, after he
+had ceased to be reasonable. I would consult the wishes and opinions
+of a boy of mine, as long as he behaved properly--no longer. You have
+only to leave him, and I assure you he shall be treated as kindly as
+he will permit us to treat him. I do not wish to influence you, but I
+am confident that ruin lies in that boy's path, unless he is
+reformed."
+
+Mrs. Blacklock actually wept. She loved the boy with a blind affection
+in spite of the disrespect and even abuse that he heaped upon her. It
+was a terrible struggle to her, but she finally decided to leave him
+on board of the ship, perhaps satisfied that nothing else could ever
+save him from himself, and her from the misery his reckless conduct
+constantly occasioned her.
+
+"You wished to go to sea, Clyde, and I have decided to leave you in
+this ship," said the poor mother, trembling with emotion.
+
+"But I tell you I won't stay in this ship," roared Clyde, as Peaks, at
+a signal from the principal, released his prisoner.
+
+"I can do nothing with you, my dear boy. You won't obey me, and I must
+leave you to those who can control you. I am going on shore now, but I
+shall see you again at Christiania."
+
+"I won't stay!" howled Clyde.
+
+"Good by, Clyde," said Mrs. Blacklock, desperately, as she folded her
+son in her arms, and kissed him on both cheeks.
+
+"I tell you I won't stay!" cried the angry youth, breaking away from
+his mother's embrace.
+
+"Make it short, madam," suggested Mr. Lowington.
+
+"Do try to be good, Clyde, and then you can come home very, _very_
+soon," added Mrs. Blacklock, as the principal conducted her to the
+accommodation ladder, where the first cutter had been manned to put
+her on shore.
+
+"I tell you again, I won't stay! If you leave me, I'll jump
+overboard."
+
+"O!" groaned the weak mother.
+
+"If you do, young man, we will pick you up with the greatest
+pleasure," said Mr. Lowington, as he hurried the lady to the side.
+
+"O, if he should!" gasped she.
+
+"There is not a particle of danger, madam; Mr. Peaks will take
+excellent care of him," replied her comforter.
+
+The boatswain, at a nod from Mr. Lowington, again embraced Clyde, but
+did not injure him, nor permit him to injure himself. The lady was
+handed into the boat, and Captain Cumberland politely performed this
+service for Miss Blacklock. Of course the poor mother was in an agony
+of doubt and anxiety, but the students in the cutter seemed to be so
+cheerful, contented and gentlemanly, that she hoped for the best.
+
+Clyde was appalled at the situation, and one of the stern realities
+of life seemed suddenly to dawn upon him. As soon as his mother
+disappeared over the side, he ceased to struggle, for he gained
+nothing by it, and the students appeared to be amused by his
+sufferings. Peaks released him, and the victim of wholesome discipline
+looked about him with a wondering stare; but there was no mother to
+cajole or intimidate, and he was thrown entirely upon his own
+resources for the means of resistance, if he purposed to resist. He
+appeared to be stupefied by the situation, and Mr. Lowington, taking
+advantage of his bewilderment, invited him into the main cabin, where
+he kindly but firmly "laid down the law" to him. Clyde was by no means
+conquered, but was rather considering how he should escape from this
+trying position. At the close of the interview, the principal handed
+the patient over to one of the stewards, and requested him to see the
+new comer clothed in the uniform of the ship. Peaks was directed to
+keep an eye on the victim while the crew were on shore.
+
+All hands were soon seated in the boats, and in half an hour all
+the students in the squadron were turned loose in the streets of
+Christiansand. Though the instructors were of the party, they were not
+required to exercise any particular supervision over their pupils.
+There was hardly anything to be seen, and as a large number of the
+students had never crossed the Atlantic before, they wanted to know if
+they had come so far to see such a town. Most of the houses were of
+wood, but they were neat and well kept. As the capital of the province
+of Christiansand, the town was the residence of the Stift Amtmand, or
+governor, and of the bishop of the diocese. It was founded in 1641,
+and having an excellent harbor, it is a place of considerable
+commercial importance, having a population of about ten thousand.
+
+The boys visited the cathedral, which is a fine building of gray
+stone, and being the first which most of them had seen, it had a
+considerable interest to them. They observed the people, and their
+manners and customs, so far as they could, with more interest than the
+buildings, which differed in no important respect from those in the
+United States. Passing across the water front of the town, they came
+to the Torrisdal River, over which there is an excellent bridge. They
+crossed the stream, and walked to an antiquated church. Some of the
+houses on the way were very neat, pretty structures, not unlike the
+one-story dwellings seen all over New England.
+
+"Here's a Runic stone," said Dr. Winstock, as the captain and several
+of the officers followed him into the burying-ground connected with
+the ancient church.
+
+"What is a Runic stone?" asked Lincoln, the third lieutenant.
+
+"A stone with Runic characters upon it."
+
+"I haven't the least idea what the word means, though Poe sings, in
+the 'Bells,'----
+
+    'Keeping time, time, time,
+     In a sort of Runic rhyme!'
+
+Runic is derived from a word which means secret; and a Runic stone
+is any memorial, table, or column, on which Runic characters are
+inscribed, as a tombstone, a boundary mark. There are sixteen of
+these characters, forming an alphabet, which were used by the ancient
+Scandinavians, and were thought by them to possess magical properties,
+and willow wands inscribed with them were used by the pagans of the
+north in their magic rites. Sticks were used as almanacs, to keep the
+account of the days and months, and also constituted the day-books and
+ledgers of the ancients. In Germany, in modern times, the baker, for
+example, and the purchaser of bread, each had a stick, and the number
+of loaves delivered was notched upon both. Scarcely less primitive was
+the custom of some of our American farmers, who kept their accounts on
+the barn door; and I have heard a story of one who, when required to
+produce his books in court at a lawsuit, carried in the barn door, and
+held it up before the judge and jury. In Denmark and Sweden you will
+see more Runic writings, especially in the museum at Copenhagen."
+
+"They seem to bury people here, in about the same manner as with us,"
+said Captain Cumberland.
+
+"There is not half so much difference between things here and those at
+home as I expected to find," added Judson.
+
+"The houses are almost the same, and so are the people," continued
+Norwood.
+
+"People coming to Europe are often disappointed because they find
+almost everything so near like what they have been accustomed to,"
+replied the doctor. "You will find Norway and Sweden more like New
+England than any other countries on the continent. But I think you
+will find differences enough to excite your interest and attention
+before you return."
+
+The students walked back to Christiansand, and having exhausted the
+town, went on board the vessels of the squadron, ready and even
+anxious to continue the voyage. The pilots were on deck, Paul Kendall
+and lady had returned to the Grace, and the principal only waited the
+arrival of the steamer Moss, from Frederiksvaern, to give the order to
+get under way. The boats were all hoisted up except the first cutter,
+which was to bring off the unfortunate crew of the professor's barge,
+as soon as they arrived.
+
+At eight o'clock the steamer came in, and the first cutter, with the
+principal on board, hastened to her landing-place, to meet Sanford and
+his companions. To his great astonishment and regret, they were not on
+board of the Moss. The captain, who spoke English very well, knew
+nothing about the absentees, and was quite confident they were not on
+board of the Foldin, the boat which had picked them up. Captain Hoell
+had said nothing to him about the accident, but then the Foldin had
+arrived only that morning, instead of the night before, when she was
+due, and their interview had been very hurried. "Did any person in the
+Moss know anything about the unfortunates?" the captain was kind
+enough to inquire; and a passenger was found who heard some one say
+that a party of young men had been landed by the Foldin at Lillesand.
+But the Moss had left Lillesand at six o'clock, and her captain had
+not seen or heard of the persons described. Mr. Lowington was very
+anxious about the fate of the second cutter's crew, and feared that
+some of them had been injured by the collision, so that they were
+unable to take the steamer back to Christiansand. He returned to the
+cutter and pulled off to the Tritonia, and directed Mr. Tompion, the
+second vice-principal, in charge of her, to run into Lillesand, and
+ascertain what had become of the absentees. Without waiting for the
+signal, the Tritonia got under way, and under full sail, with a fresh
+breeze, stood out of the harbor. The other vessels followed her soon
+after, the principal intending to lay off and on till the Tritonia
+reported.
+
+The ship had been searched from keel to truck for Ole Amundsen on the
+day before. Of course he was not found, and the conclusion was that he
+had dropped into the water and swam ashore, though it was difficult to
+understand how he had accomplished the feat without detection.
+Inquiries in regard to him were made on shore, but if any one knew
+him, application was not made to the right persons.
+
+Mr. Clyde Blacklock had not yet jumped overboard, and during the busy
+scene of getting under way, he stood with his mouth agape, watching
+the proceedings with wondering interest. He was not quite sure, after
+his anger had subsided, that he had made a bad bargain. There was
+something rather pleasant in the motion of the ship, and the zeal and
+precision with which the students worked, showed that they enjoyed
+their occupation. No one noticed Clyde, or even seemed to be aware
+of his presence. Before, when he behaved in an extravagant and
+unreasonable manner, the boys only laughed at him. They did not beg
+him to be pacified, as his mother and James always did; on the
+contrary they seemed to enjoy his chagrin.
+
+As soon as the ship was under way, the new student was informed that
+he belonged to the port watch, second part, and the silver star, which
+designated his watch, was affixed to his left arm. He was told that he
+would be called with the others to take his turn on deck during the
+night.
+
+"What am I to do?" he asked, rather blankly.
+
+"Just the same as the others do?" replied De Forrest, the fourth
+lieutenant, who had the deck with the second part of the port watch.
+"I have your station bill."
+
+"What's that?"
+
+"It is a card on which all your duties are explained. Here it is,"
+added De Forrest, producing the station bill. "You are No. 71; all the
+even numbers belong to the starboard watch, and all the odd numbers to
+the port."
+
+These cards were all printed; for among the various amusements
+provided for the students, a couple of octavo Novelty presses, with
+a sufficient supply of type and other printing material had been
+furnished. All the blanks for use in the ship were printed on board,
+and the Oceanic Enterprise, a weekly Journal, had been regularly
+issued during the voyage across the Atlantic, though a gale of wind,
+which disturbed the equilibrium of the press and the printers, had
+delayed its publication a couple of days on one occasion.
+
+Clyde read the station bill which was handed to him by the officer,
+but it would have been just as intelligible to him if it had been in
+Runic character.
+
+"'Reefing, main-topsail, and main-topsail halyards,'" said Clyde,
+reading from the card. "What does all that mean?"
+
+"You mind only what you have to do yourself, and not trouble your head
+about orders that have nothing to do with your work; for the orders
+come as thick as snow flakes at Christmas. When all hands are called
+to reef topsails, you are one of them, of course. When any thing is
+said about topsails, or topsail-halyards, you are the man."
+
+"Good; I understand that, and I shall make a sailor, I know," added
+Clyde.
+
+"I hope you will. The order will come to 'settle away the topsail
+halyards.' Be ready to help then."
+
+"But I don't know the topsail halyards from a pint of soup."
+
+"Here they are," added the lieutenant, conducting his pupil to the
+rail, and pointing out the main-topsail halyards. "Then, when the
+officer says, 'Aloft, top-men,' you will run up the main rigging here,
+and the midshipman in the top will tell you what to do. At the word,
+you will lay out on the yard, and do as the others do. At the words,
+'Lay down from aloft,' you will come on deck, and hoist up the
+main-topsail. Nearly all your duty is connected with the main-topsail.
+In tacking, you will go to the clew-garnets."
+
+"What are they?"
+
+"These ropes, by which the corners of the mainsail are hauled up,"
+answered De Forrest, pointing out the clew-garnets. "You will also
+let go the main tack. In getting under way, you will help loose the
+main-topsail. In anchoring, you are at the main clew-lines, and the
+main brace. Here they are. In loosing and furling you are on the
+main-topsail. In boat service, you are attached to the third cutter.
+You sleep in berth No. 71, your ship's number, and eat with mess No.
+6."
+
+De Forrest, as instructed by the principal, carefully explained the
+duties of the new comer, indicating every rope as he mentioned it, and
+describing its use. He was prudent in his manner, and tried to give
+the proud youth no offence by making him feel the superiority of an
+officer. The lieutenant then conducted him to his mess room, and
+pointed out his berth.
+
+The wind was still from the southward, and quite fresh; and though the
+squadron went under short sail, it was off Lillesand in a couple of
+hours. The Tritonia, which was a fast vessel, did not detain her
+consorts more than a couple of hours. Mr. Tompion boarded the ship,
+and reported that the crew of the second cutter had landed at
+Lillesand, and fearing that they should miss the ship if they returned
+to Christiansand, had taken carioles, and left early in the morning
+for Christiania. There were ten of the party, and one of them was a
+Norwegian, though he was dressed like the others. Mr. Lowington could
+not imagine who the Norwegian was that wore the Academy's uniform, for
+it did not occur to him that Ole could have joined them. He was glad
+to hear that all of them were well, and able to travel; and had no
+doubt they would arrive in safety at Christiania. He was aware that
+the crew of the second cutter were rather wild boys; but as there were
+no large towns in the interior, he had no fear that they would be led
+astray among the simple Norwegians.
+
+The fleet filled away again, and at eight bells the following morning
+was off Frederiksvaern.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+UP THE CHRISTIANIA FJORD.
+
+
+"I should like to know where this place is," said Ryder, the second
+master, as he appeared upon the quarter-deck of the ship, with one of
+the forty bound volumes of Harper's Magazine, which were contained in
+the library.
+
+"What place?" asked Lincoln, the third lieutenant, as he glanced at
+the volume.
+
+"That's more than I know; but here is a picture of a steamer between
+two high bluffs of rock, and under it, she is said to be entering the
+fjord."
+
+"We are just at the mouth of the fjord now, and if there are any such
+rocks as those here, I should like to see them. Why, you see they rise
+above the steamer's main-topmast."
+
+Lincoln took the book, and read the description; but he was none the
+wiser for his labor, for the narrow strait through which the steamer
+in the picture was passing was not particularly described. The book
+was shown to the pilot, who did not know just where the place was; but
+after he had been told that the steamer came from Gottenburg, and was
+on her way to Christiania, he thought that the bold rocks must be in
+the vicinity of Frederiksvaern. He offered to take the ship through
+the pass, as the wind was fair, and Mr. Lowington consented that he
+should do so, for in order to enable the students to see the fine
+scenery on the fjord, the studies were to be laid aside for the day.
+
+"I don't see where there can be anything like this," said Ryder, as he
+surveyed the shores.
+
+"There are plenty of islands here, but certainly none of them rise to
+any such heights as those in the picture," replied Lincoln. "They are
+bare rocks out at sea, but some of them are a little green farther in.
+It don't begin to be so wild as I supposed it was in these parts. Why,
+I have read and heard so much about the Christiania Fjord, that I
+supposed it was the grandest scenery in the world."
+
+"It don't look much like the picture--does it?" laughed Ryder.
+
+In a short time the ship was approaching the narrow pass. The cliffs
+on each side were very bold and rugged, and if the students had not
+been feasting themselves with grand anticipations, they would have
+appreciated the scenery much better. Ryder and Lincoln laughed when
+they compared the reality with the pictures they had. The scenery
+could not be called grand, though it was certainly very fine. The
+strait was very narrow, and on each side of it rings were fastened in
+the rocks, which were painted white around them, for the convenience
+of vessels warping out in a calm or against the wind. On the high
+rock,--it could not have been a hundred feet high,--at the right, was
+a small fort, which looked grim and terrible in its way, but which any
+well-ordered man of war, with modern ordnance, could have battered
+down in half an hour.
+
+Passing through the strait, the ship came in sight of the small
+village of Frederiksvaern, which is a naval station, where a number of
+gunboats are housed in a series of uniform buildings. The town itself
+is only a hamlet, but as the vessels proceeded, those on board saw
+Laurvig at the head of the bay, which is a place of considerable
+importance.
+
+"Little Foerder," said the pilot, an hour later, as he pointed to a
+tall, red light-house, at the entrance of the fjord.
+
+"Then the land we see beyond must be Sweden," added Ryder.
+
+"_Sverige_," nodded the pilot.
+
+"I suppose that is Sweden, but I don't see the use of having half a
+dozen names to a country."
+
+"And this is _Norge_," added the second master, pointing to the other
+side.
+
+"Yes, _Norge_," answered the pilot, pleased to hear the young officer
+apply the Norwegian name.
+
+On the port hand of the ship was a vast sea of rocky islands, of all
+shapes and sizes. Those farthest from the mainland were entirely
+destitute of soil or verdure; but in the distance a few pines, and the
+fresh tints of the early grass, could be seen.
+
+"Keep her north-north-east," said the pilot.
+
+"Man the weather and stand by the lee braces!" shouted the first
+lieutenant.
+
+Clyde Blacklock took out his station card, and looked to see whether
+the order applied to him.
+
+"You are on the main brace," said Scott, a good-natured young tar,
+who happened to be near the new student. "There you are, on the
+weather side."
+
+"Who spoke to you?" demanded Clyde, dropping his card, and looking
+Scott in the face.
+
+"I haven't been introduced to you, I know; but I thought you wanted to
+know your duty," laughed Scott.
+
+"You take care of yourself, and I'll mind my own duty," growled Clyde.
+
+"All right, my lad," replied the good-natured student, whose station
+was at the weather fore brace.
+
+Clyde walked aft, and placed himself in the line of those who were to
+haul on the weather main brace.
+
+"Slack the lee, and haul on the weather braces," said the first
+lieutenant, and the other officers repeated the order.
+
+"Walk away with it!" shouted the fourth lieutenant to those at the
+main brace.
+
+Clyde took hold, and tugged with all his might; but the brace would
+not come away. To tell the exact truth, there was a disposition among
+the students to haze the new comer, and the main brace men had agreed
+among themselves to let him do the whole of the work. They pretended
+to haul, but not one of them bore a pound upon the brace.
+
+"Pull!" shouted Clyde, at the top of his lungs, as he strained at the
+rope. "Why don't you pull, boys?"
+
+"Silence on the quarter-deck!" cried the executive officer--for all
+work was required to be performed in silence. "Walk away with the main
+brace."
+
+"Come, boys, why don't you pull?" roared Clyde, who was blest with a
+pair of hearty lungs.
+
+"Silence, Blacklock! You mustn't hollo like that when you are on
+duty," interposed De Forrest.
+
+"Who says I mustn't?" demanded Clyde, dropping his hold upon the
+brace, and walking up to the officer who had dared to give him these
+words of counsel, which were uttered in a mild and pleading tone,
+rather than in those of authority.
+
+"Starboard the helm," said the executive officer.
+
+"Starboard, sir," repeated the quartermaster at the wheel.
+
+"Walk away with that main brace!" added the first lieutenant.
+
+The main brace men, finding that Clyde was at issue with the fourth
+lieutenant, applied themselves to their work, and the main yard swung
+round.
+
+"Steady!" said the executive officer.
+
+"Steady, sir."
+
+"Avast hauling! Belay, all."
+
+By these manoeuvres the ship had been kept away, and was now headed
+directly up the fjord.
+
+"I don't allow any fellow to speak to me like that," blustered Clyde.
+"I want you to understand that I am a gentleman."
+
+"Go forward, Blacklock, and don't make a row on the quarter-deck,"
+replied De Forrest, mildly.
+
+"I'll not go forward!"
+
+"Then I must report you to the first lieutenant."
+
+"I'm willing to do my work, but I won't be fagged by any nob in gold
+lace."
+
+"You are making a mistake, Blacklock," said De Forrest, in a low
+tone, as he walked towards the angry Briton, with the intention of
+reasoning with him upon the absurdity of his conduct.
+
+Mr. Lowington had cautioned him and other officers to be very prudent
+in dealing with the new student till he had become accustomed to his
+duty, and certainly De Forrest was prudent in the extreme. Perhaps
+Clyde misunderstood the purpose of this officer when approaching him,
+and suspected that he intended to use violence, for, drawing back, he
+made a pass at De Forrest with his fist. But the latter detected the
+nature of the demonstration in season to ward off the blow, and, still
+in the exercise of the extreme prudence which had before characterized
+his conduct, retreated to the other side of the quarter-deck.
+
+"Enough of that," said Judson, the first lieutenant, as he stepped
+between Clyde and De Forrest.
+
+Clyde was very angry. Though he had made up his mind to perform his
+duty in the beginning, he fancied that no one had the right to command
+him to be silent. In his wrath he pulled off his blue jacket, tossed
+it upon the deck with a flourish, and intimated that if the first
+lieutenant wanted to fight, he was ready for him. Happily the first
+lieutenant did not wish to fight, though he was fully prepared to
+defend himself. At this crisis, the principal observed the hostile
+attitude of the young Briton, and quietly ordered Peaks to interfere.
+
+"Go forward, Blacklock," said Judson, calmly.
+
+"I won't go forward! I have been insulted, and I'll break the sconce
+of the fellow that did it," added Clyde, glancing at the fourth
+lieutenant.
+
+"Come, my hearty, let us go forward, as we are ordered," interposed
+Peaks, as he picked up Clyde in his arms, and in spite of his
+struggles, carried him into the waist.
+
+It was useless to resist the big boatswain, and the pressure of
+Peaks's arms soon crushed out Clyde's anger, and like a little child,
+he was set down upon the deck, amid the laughter of his companions. He
+felt that he was not getting ahead at all; and though he reserved the
+expression of his anger, he determined at the first convenient
+opportunity to thrash both Judson and De Forrest. He had also decided
+to run away at the first chance, even if he had to camp on a desolate
+island in doing so. He regarded Peaks as a horrible ogre, whose only
+mission in the ship was to persecute and circumvent him.
+
+"I'll have it out with those nobs yet," said Clyde, as Peaks left him,
+restored to his senses, so far as outward appearances were concerned.
+
+"Have it out! Have what out?" asked Scott, the good-natured.
+
+"I'll whip that nob who told me to be silent."
+
+"Don't you do it, my jolly Briton," laughed Scott.
+
+"I can do it."
+
+"Do you mean the first lieutenant?"
+
+"Yes, that I do; and I'll teach him better manners."
+
+"I wouldn't hurt him; Judson's a good fellow."
+
+"I don't care if he is; he'll catch it; and De Forrest, too. They
+insulted me."
+
+"I dare say they didn't mean to."
+
+"If they didn't, I'll give them a chance to apologize," added Clyde,
+a little mollified by the mild words of his companion.
+
+"That's very kind of you; but officers don't often apologize to seamen
+for telling them of it when they disobey the rules of the ship."
+
+"Rules or not, I'll hammer them both if they don't apologize."
+
+"Don't be cruel with them," laughed Scott.
+
+"And that big boatswain--I'll be even with him yet," blustered Clyde,
+as he shook his head menacingly.
+
+"Are you going to thrash him too?" asked Scott, opening his eyes.
+
+"I'll take care of him. He don't toss me round in that way without
+suffering for it."
+
+"Well, don't hurt him," suggested the good-natured seaman.
+
+"He'll get a broken head before he grows much older," added Clyde,
+drawing out a belaying-pin from the fife-rail. "I shall not be in this
+ship a great while longer; but I mean to stay long enough to settle my
+accounts with the big boatswain and the two nobs on the quarter-deck."
+
+"How are you going to do it, my dear Albion?"
+
+"Leave that to me. No man can insult me without suffering for it."
+
+"Perhaps the officers will apologize, but I don't believe Peaks will.
+He's an obstinate fellow, and would do just what the principal told
+him to do, even if it was to swallow you and me, and half a dozen
+other fellows. You don't mean to lick the principal too--do you?"
+
+"I haven't had any trouble with him."
+
+"But he is at the bottom of it all. He told Peaks to persecute you.
+I'm not sure that the principal isn't more to blame than all the
+others put together."
+
+"No matter for him; he has done very well."
+
+"Then you mean to let him off?"
+
+"I say I've nothing against the head master."
+
+"Don't be too hard on Peaks," added Scott, as he climbed upon the rail
+to see the scenery of the fjord.
+
+"I suppose all these islands, points, bays, and channels have names,
+just as they do on the other side of the ocean," said Laybold, at
+whose side the good-natured tar seated himself.
+
+"Of course," nodded Scott.
+
+"I wonder what they are."
+
+"Don't you know?"
+
+"Certainly not--how should I?"
+
+"I didn't know but you might have seen the chart," added Scott,
+gravely.
+
+"There's a town!" exclaimed the enthusiastic Laybold, as the progress
+of the ship opened a channel, at the head of which was a village, with
+a church.
+
+"I see; that's Bossenboggenberg," said Scott.
+
+"O, is it? Is that a river?"
+
+"Not at all. That's only a channel, called the Hoppenboggen, which
+extends around the Island of Toppenboggen. That channel is navigable
+for small vessels."
+
+"Where did you learn all those names?" demanded Laybold, amazed at the
+astonishing words which his companion rolled off so glibly.
+
+"My father had to send me to sea to keep me from learning too much.
+My hair all fell off, and the schoolmasters were afraid of me."
+
+"There's another town ahead on the port hand," said Laybold, a little
+later.
+
+"That is Aggerhousenboggen, I think. Let me see; here's Cape
+Tingumboggen, and that must be the opening to the Stoppenboggen Fjord.
+Yes, that must be Aggerhousenboggen."
+
+"Where did you learn to pronounce Norwegian so well, Scott?"
+
+"O, I learned Norwegian when I was an infant. I could speak it first
+rate before I learned to utter my mother tongue."
+
+"Go 'way!" protested Laybold. "Do you know what island that is on the
+starboard hand."
+
+"To be sure I do. Do you think my education has been neglected to that
+extent? That's Steppenfetchenboggen. A very fine island it is, too,"
+continued Scott, rattling off the long names so that they had a
+decidedly foreign ring.
+
+"I don't see how you can pronounce those words," added Laybold. "They
+would choke me to death."
+
+"I don't believe they would," laughed Scott.
+
+The squadron passed through several narrow passages, and then came to
+a broad expanse of water at the mouth of the Drammen River. The
+students were perched on the rail and in the rigging of the various
+vessels, observing with great interest the development of the
+panorama, which seemed to be unrolled before them.
+
+"It is rather fine scenery," said Lincoln, who still carried the book
+in his hand, and occasionally glanced at the pictures; "but I think
+the artist here must have multiplied the height of the cliffs by two,
+and divided the height of houses, men, and masts by the same number."
+
+"It certainly looks like an exaggeration," replied Ryder.
+
+"Look at this," added Lincoln, pointing to a scene on the coast of
+Norway. "There's a large steamer carrying a top-gallant yard on the
+foremast. That mast is probably a hundred and fifty feet high, and
+there are hills and bluffs beyond it--which would lose by the
+perspective--five times as high."
+
+"Still it is very fine scenery."
+
+"So it is; but no finer than we have on the coast of Maine. You
+remember last summer we went through the Reach, down by Machias? That
+was something like this, and quite as pleasant."
+
+"We mustn't be too critical, Lincoln," laughed Ryder.
+
+"I don't intend to be critical; but I had an idea, from the pictures
+I have seen, that Christiania Fjord was something like the Saguenay
+River, where the cliffs rise perpendicularly four or five hundred feet
+high. These pictures would certainly lead one to expect such sights."
+
+"Horton," said the pilot, pointing to a town which now came into view,
+as the vessel passed beyond a point of land.
+
+It was a small place, in appearance not unlike a New England village.
+At the wharf were a couple of small steamers, one of which had come
+down the Drammen, and the entire population of the town seemed to
+have turned out on the occasion, for the shore was covered with
+people. They were all neatly dressed. On the opposite side of the
+fjord was the town of Moss, where the convention by which Norway and
+Sweden were united was drawn up and agreed upon.
+
+The fleet sailed rapidly before the fresh breeze across the broad
+expanse, and then entered a narrow passage. There was a gentle
+declivity on each side of the fjord, which was covered, as far as the
+eye could see, with pines. Droebak, on the right, is a village of one
+street, on the side of the hill. The houses are mostly of one story,
+painted yellow, with roofs covered with red tile. Before noon the
+passage began to widen, and the fleet entered another broad expanse of
+water, filled with rocky islands, at the head of which stood the city
+of Christiania. Some of the islets were pretty and picturesque, in
+some instances having a single cottage upon them, with a little
+garden. The rocks were often of curious formation, and the shore of
+one island was as regular and smooth as though it had been a piece of
+masonry. After rounding a point of rocks, the fleet came into full
+view of Christiania. The city and its environs are spread out on
+the southern slope of a series of hills, and presents a beautiful
+landscape to the eye. On the left the country was covered with villas,
+prominent among which was Oscarshal, a summer palace of the late king.
+On the right was the castle of Agershuus, rising abruptly from the
+water. At a little distance from the town was a kind of hotel, built
+on a picturesque island, with its pretty landing-place, not unlike
+some similar establishments near the head of Narragansett Bay. At the
+wharf in front of the city, and lying in the bay, was a considerable
+number of steamers, some of them quite large. The fleet ran up to the
+front of the city and anchored.
+
+"This is the end of my voyage," said Clyde Blacklock, when everything
+had been put in order on board of the ship.
+
+"You are not going yet--are you?" laughed Scott.
+
+"Very soon."
+
+"I thought you were going to stop, and whip Peaks and the two
+lieutenants."
+
+"Time enough for that. I suppose the ship will stay here two or three
+days--won't she?"
+
+"Perhaps a week. I suppose we shall go on shore this afternoon, and
+see the sights."
+
+"I say, Scott, if you tell those officers what I've been saying to
+you, I'll serve you in the same way," added Clyde, as for the first
+time it occurred to him that he had been imprudent in developing his
+plans to another.
+
+"No! You won't lick me, too--will you?"
+
+"Not if you behave like a man, and don't peach," answered Clyde, in a
+patronizing tone.
+
+"I will try to be a good boy, then," laughed Scott.
+
+"I only want to catch them on shore, where I can have fair play. I'm
+not to be fagged by any fellow that ever was born."
+
+Clyde walked uneasily about the deck till the crew were piped to
+dinner, evidently thinking how he should carry his big intentions into
+execution. To one less moved by fancied insults and indignities the
+case would have looked hopeless. He devoured his dinner in a much
+shorter period than is usually allotted by well-bred Englishmen to
+that pleasing diversion, and hastened on deck again. Peaks was there,
+acting as ship-keeper, while the carpenter was painting the second
+cutter, the repairs upon which had been completed. The big boatswain
+was seated on one of the cat-heads, where he could see the entire deck
+of the ship, and observe every craft that approached her. The new
+student observed his position, and thought he was seated in a very
+careless manner. A very wicked thought took possession of the Briton's
+mind, and he ascended to the top-gallant forecastle. The boatswain sat
+very composedly on the cat-head, with his feet hanging over the water,
+and was just then studying the beauties of the landscape. A very
+slight exercise of force would displace him, and drop him into the
+water.
+
+"Well, my hearty, you stowed your grub in a hurry," said Peaks, when
+he discovered the new pupil.
+
+"I was not very hungry, and thought I would take another look at the
+town," replied Clyde. "What's that big building off there, near the
+hills?"
+
+"That may be the county jail, the court-house, or the lunatic asylum.
+I haven't the least idea what it is," answered Peaks, indifferently.
+"The professors can tell you all about those things."
+
+"I wonder where that ship came from?" added Clyde, pointing to a
+vessel which was standing in ahead of the Young America.
+
+"That isn't a ship," replied Peaks, as he turned partly round, so that
+he could see the craft. "That's a 'mofferdite brig; or, as bookish
+people would say, an hermaphrodite brig--half brig and half schooner.
+You must call things, especially vessels, by their right names, or you
+will fall in the opinion of--"
+
+At that instant the big boatswain dropped into the deep waters of the
+fjord.
+
+"And you will fall, in my opinion," said Clyde, as, taking advantage
+of his antagonist's attention to the brig, he gave him a smart push,
+which displaced him from the cat-head.
+
+But Peaks, who was half man and half fish, was as much at home in the
+water as on the deck, and struck out for the cable, by which the ship
+was anchored, as the nearest point of support. Clyde walked along the
+rail till he came to the swinging-boom, where the boats which had been
+lowered for use after dinner were fastened. Climbing out on the boom,
+he dropped down by the painter into the third cutter, one of the
+four-oar boats. Bitts, the carpenter, who had been the only person on
+board except the boatswain, was in the waist busily at work upon the
+boat, and did not observe that anything unusual had transpired. Clyde
+had practised gymnastics a great deal, and was an active, agile
+fellow. Casting off the painter of the third cutter, he worked her
+astern, so as to avoid Peaks. Then, shipping a pair of oars, he pulled
+for the shore.
+
+In the mean time, the boatswain, disdaining to call for assistance,
+and not having observed the movements of Clyde, climbed up the cable
+to the hawse-hole, and then, by the bowsprit guys, made his way to the
+top-gallant forecastle, where he discovered the Briton in the cutter,
+pulling with all his might for the shore. Shaking the water from his
+clothes, he hastened to the main cabin, and informed the principal
+that the new scholar had left the ship.
+
+"Left the ship!" exclaimed Mr. Lowington. "Were you not on deck while
+the students were at dinner?"
+
+"Yes, sir, most of the time; but just at the moment when the young
+sculpin left the ship, I happened to be in the water," answered Peaks,
+shrugging his shoulders like a Frenchman, and glancing at his wet
+garments.
+
+"How came you in the water?"
+
+"The little Britisher pushed me overboard, when I was sitting on the
+cat-head."
+
+"I see," added the principal. "We must get him back before his mother
+arrives."
+
+By this time most of the students had come up from the steerage, and
+the order was given to pipe away the first cutter. Peaks was directed
+to change his clothes, and go in her. He was ready by the time the
+crew were in their seats, for, as he was not a fashionable man, his
+toilet was soon made. The boats from the other vessels of the fleet,
+including those of the yachts, were already on their way to the town.
+The first cutter pulled to the shore; but Clyde had already landed,
+and disappeared in the city.
+
+As at Christiansand, Paul Kendall and lady decided to remain on shore
+during the stay of the fleet. They had several pieces of baggage, and
+the custom-house officers on the wharf were obliged to examine them,
+after which they followed a porter to the Victoria Hotel, which was
+said to be the best in the place. Peaks found a man who could speak
+English, and immediately applied himself to the business of finding
+the runaway. Clyde had been seen going up one of the streets, but no
+one knew anything about him.
+
+The fugitive felt that he had achieved a victory. He had "paid off"
+the big boatswain, and no fellow on board of the ship could believe
+that he had not kept his word. He walked up the street till he came to
+Dronningensgaden. People looked at him as though he were a stranger,
+and he became aware that his uniform was exciting attention. In the
+Kirkegade he found a clothing store, in which the shop-keeper spoke
+English. In changing his dress on board of the ship, he had retained
+the contents of his pockets, including a well-filled purse. He
+selected a suit of clothes which pleased him, and immediately put it
+on. At another store he bought a hat, and then he appeared like a new
+being. With the bundle containing his uniform, he walked till he found
+a carriage, in which he seated himself, and ordered the driver to
+leave him at the Victoria Hotel. He thought it would only be necessary
+for him to keep out of sight till evening, when his mother would
+probably arrive in the Foldin, and he was confident he could induce
+her to withdraw him from the Academy. He would stay in his room the
+rest of the day, and by that time the search for him, if any was made,
+would be ended.
+
+"I want a nice room for myself, another for my mother and sister, who
+will arrive this evening, and a place for the man," said Clyde, as the
+porter of the hotel touched his cap, and helped him out of the
+carriage.
+
+The young man was evidently a person of some importance. The porter,
+the clerk, and the head waiter, who came out to receive him, bowed
+low. A man took his bundle, and he was ushered to a room on the ground
+floor. As he crossed the court, he discovered several of the Orlando's
+passengers in the reading-room. He had not entered his chamber before
+there was another arrival,--Paul Kendall and lady,--who were assigned
+to the next room.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+THE SIGHTS OF CHRISTIANIA AND OTHER MATTERS.
+
+
+As there was in Christiania much to be seen that needed explanation,
+the students were required to keep together, and several guides from
+the hotel were obtained, to conduct the party to the various objects
+of interest in the city. A walk through some of the principal streets
+brought them to the new Parliament house, which is called the
+_Storthingsbyggningen_. It is a fine building, but with nothing
+remarkable about it. In the lower house, the students seated
+themselves in the chairs of the members, and Mr. Mapps took the
+speaker's desk.
+
+"Christiania was founded in 1624, on the site of the ancient city of
+Osloe, which was destroyed by fire. It is the residence of the king
+during his sojourn in Norway, and the new palace, which you saw on the
+hill, was completed for his use in 1848. The city, as you have seen,
+is regularly laid out, and the buildings are either of brick or stone.
+Formerly the dwellings were of wood, but the frequent fires caused the
+adoption of a law that no more wooden buildings should be erected
+within the precincts of the city. The place has considerable commerce,
+and now contains nearly sixty thousand inhabitants.
+
+"A street here is called a _gade_, and you observe that the street and
+its name form one word, as Carl-Johansgade, or Charles John Street;
+Kongensgade, or King Street; Kirkegaden, or Church Street. The same
+word is used in German.
+
+"The money of Norway is different from that of Sweden or Denmark. The
+specie dollar, which is generally called a 'specie,' is the unit, and
+contains five marks of twenty-four skillings each. A specie, or
+_specie-daler_, as it is written, is worth about one dollar and eight
+cents of our money. It is near enough for our purpose to say that a
+mark is twenty-two cents, and a skilling one cent. The coins in
+circulation are the mark, the two, the four, and the twelve skilling
+piece. Species and half species are coined, but paper money is
+generally used for large sums, each denomination being printed on a
+particular colored paper.
+
+"It is probable that the French system of weights and measures will
+soon be introduced in Sweden and Norway; but now a Norwegian _pund_ is
+one and one tenth pounds avoirdupois; a _fod_ is twelve and two
+hundredths inches; and a _kande_ is three and three tenths pints."
+
+Mr. Mapps descended from the rostrum, and after the party had looked
+at the chamber of the upper house, and other apartments, they walked
+to the king's palace--the first royal dwelling which most of the
+students ever saw. They passed through the throne room, the court
+saloon, the dining room, and other rooms, and some of them concluded
+that royalty was not half so splendid as they had supposed. But Norway
+is a poor country compared with many others in Europe, and it is a
+pity that she ever thought it necessary to spend a million and a half
+of dollars in a weak attempt to imitate the grandeur of other realms.
+There was nothing in the palace to astonish even our young
+republicans, though the rooms of the queen, on the first floor, were
+pretty and prettily furnished. The building, which is a great,
+overgrown structure, without symmetry or elegance, is in a beautiful
+situation, and surrounded by pleasant grounds, well laid out, from
+which a fine view of the city and fjord is obtained.
+
+Connected with the university are several museums and cabinets, which
+are open to the public, and well worth a visit, though they do not
+compare with those of the great cities of Europe. The party walked
+through all these rooms, one of which contained a small collection of
+northern antiquities. From the university the students went to a kind
+of garden, which is a weak imitation of "Tivoli," in Copenhagen,
+containing promenades, concert room, a small opera house, and a
+drinking saloon. The castle of Agershuus, on a hill at the southern
+side of the city, was next visited. Its guns command the harbor, and
+it is regarded as a place of great strength, for it has successfully
+resisted several sieges. Climbing a long flight of steps, the party
+reached the ramparts, which are laid out in walks, and are much
+resorted to by the citizens, as they command a lovely view of the
+fjord and the surrounding country. A portion of the castle is used as
+a prison, and the convicts work in gangs about the premises.
+
+"This was Robin Hood's prison--wasn't it, Mr. Mapps?" asked Lincoln,
+who had an inquiring mind, after he had enjoyed the prospect from the
+ramparts for a while.
+
+"I think not," replied the instructor. "Hoeyland, sometimes called the
+Robin Hood, but, I think, more properly the Baron Trenck, of Norway,
+was sentenced to imprisonment for life in this castle."
+
+"What for?" inquired Norwood.
+
+"For robbery and other crimes. Like Robin Hood and Mike Martin, he
+robbed the rich and gave to the poor, which none of you should believe
+makes the crime any less wicked; especially as he did not scruple to
+use violence in accomplishing his purpose. For some small theft he was
+shut up in this prison; but while the overseer was at church, Hoeyland
+broke into his room, stole some of his clothes, and quietly walked out
+of the castle and out of the town. He was recaptured, but repeatedly
+made his escape. Though he was heavily ironed, this precaution was
+found to be useless, and he was placed in solitary confinement in the
+lowest room of the citadel, where he was kept securely for several
+years. One evening his jailer told him that he could never get out of
+this room, and that he might as well promise not to attempt such an
+impossible feat; but Hoeyland replied that it was the turnkey's duty to
+keep him in prison if he could, and his to get out if it were
+possible. The next day the prisoner was missing, and the means of his
+escape were not at first apparent; but on further examination it was
+found that he had cut through the thick plank flooring of his cell,
+under the bed, and tunnelled under the wall into the yard of the
+prison. He had replaced the planks when he left, and passing over the
+ramparts without difficulty, dropped into the ditch, and departed
+without bidding any one good by. All attempts to find him were
+unsuccessful, and it was believed that he had left the country.
+
+"A year afterwards the National Bank of Norway was robbed of sixty
+thousand _specie-dalers_, in the most adroit and skilful manner, even
+without leaving any marks of violence on the iron box in which the
+money was kept. Not long after this occurrence, in the person of a
+prisoner who had been committed to the castle for a petty theft, the
+officers recognized Hoeyland. He was considerate enough to inform the
+authorities that his late escape had been effected, after three years
+of patient labor, with no other tool than a nail, while others slept.
+As a portion of his ill-gotten wealth was concealed in the mountains,
+he had the means of making friends in Christiania, where he had hidden
+himself. Making the acquaintance of the bank watchman, he cunningly
+obtained wax impressions of the key-holes of the locks on the
+money-chest, by which he made keys, opened the box, took the money,
+and locked it after him. But, like all other evil-doers, he came to
+grief at last. Though he was a skilful carver in wood and stone, he
+was not allowed to have tools, of which he made a bad use, and he was
+compelled to amuse himself by knitting socks on wooden pins. Unable to
+escape again, and not having the patience to exist without something
+to do, in utter despair he committed suicide in his prison."
+
+After the visit to the fortress, the boys were allowed to walk about
+the city at their own pleasure; and a few of the officers went with
+Mr. Lowington and the doctor to the establishment of Mr. Bennett, an
+Englishman, who fitted out travellers intending to journey in the
+interior with carioles and all the other requisites. His rooms were
+stored with books and Norwegian curiosities and antiquities. In the
+court-yard of the house was a large number of second-hand carioles,
+which are the sole vehicles used for crossing the country. A
+traveller, wishing to go to Trondhjem or Bergen, would purchase the
+cariole in Christiania, and when he had done with it, dispose of it at
+the other end of his route, horses between being supplied according to
+law at the post stations on the road. Travellers coming from Trondhjem
+or Bergen sell their vehicles to Mr. Bennett. In his rooms are
+miniature models of the cariole for sale, which visitors purchase as
+a memento of their tour; as those who climb Pilatus and Rhigi, in
+Switzerland, buy an alpenstock on which are printed the names of the
+mountains they have ascended with its help.
+
+The principal and his companions walked up to the Victoria Hotel, and
+inquired for Captain Kendall. He had just returned from a ride, and
+while the waiter was taking Mr. Lowington's card to him, Peaks
+presented himself in the court-yard.
+
+"Can't find him, sir," said the boatswain, touching his hat.
+
+"He must be somewhere in the city."
+
+"This man has toted me all over the town, but we can't hear a word of
+him. He wore the uniform of the ship, and people can't tell one
+student from another."
+
+"I am confident he has not left the city."
+
+"Perhaps he has," replied Peaks, as the servant returned, followed by
+Captain Kendall.
+
+"Have you lost anything or anybody?" asked Paul, laughing, after he
+had saluted the principal.
+
+"Yes, we have lost a student; an English boy we shipped at
+Christiansand. Have you seen him?"
+
+"Yes, sir; his room is No. 32--next to mine," replied Paul, still
+laughing, as though he were much amused.
+
+He was much amused; and that others may sympathize with him, let the
+reader return to Clyde Blacklock, who had shut himself up in his room
+to await the arrival of his mother. He had not been in the house ten
+minutes before he began to be impatient and disgusted with his
+self-imposed confinement. He examined himself carefully in the
+looking-glass, and was satisfied that his new clothes disguised him
+from his late shipmates, and also from those whom he had met on board
+of the Orlando. Certainly they had wrought a very great change in
+his appearance, and with the round-top hat on, which was entirely
+different from anything he had worn before, even his mother would not
+recognize him, unless they came near enough together to enable her to
+scrutinize his features. Of course none of the people from the
+squadron would come to the hotel, and he had not yet been called upon
+to register his name.
+
+He unlocked his door, and went into the long entry which opened into
+the court-yard. It was stupid to stay alone in his chamber. It was
+some relief even to promenade the hall, for one so nervous as he was
+at this time. If any of the Orlando's passengers came near him, he
+could retreat into his room. He walked up and down several times, but
+this soon became stale amusement.
+
+"Who's in the next room to mine?" he asked, as one of the waiters
+passed him in his promenade.
+
+"Gentleman and lady from America, sir," replied the man; "an uncommon
+handsome young woman, sir."
+
+Before the waiter could further express his opinion of the guests in
+No. 31, Paul Kendall came out of the room, and, seeing the servant,
+ordered a carriage to be ready in half an hour.
+
+"Is there much to see in this place, sir?" asked Clyde, politely.
+
+"Not much, I think," replied Paul.
+
+"I dare say you are going into the interior, sir."
+
+"Not far."
+
+"There is fine fishing there," persisted Clyde.
+
+"So I am told; but I haven't much time to spend in such sport, and I
+am afraid my wife would not enjoy it as well as I should. Do you go to
+the interior?"
+
+"Yes, sir; I intend to do so when my mother and sister arrive. My
+mother goes a-fishing with me."
+
+"Does she, indeed? You are from England, I suppose," added Paul, who
+suspected that the young man was one of those lonesome travellers
+eager to make a friend, and actually suffering from the want of one.
+
+"Yes; Mockhill Manor, New Forest, Hampshire."
+
+"Are you travelling alone?" asked Paul, who was full of sympathy for
+the apparent loneliness of the young man.
+
+"I am alone just now, but I expect my mother and sister from
+Christiansand to-night," replied Clyde.
+
+"Can I do anything for you?" inquired Paul, who, after this
+explanation, did not regard the young gentleman's situation as so
+hopeless.
+
+In his own travels he had himself experienced that sense of loneliness
+which is a decided misery, and had met others afflicted with it. From
+the manner of Clyde, he concluded he had an attack of it, and he
+desired to alleviate his sufferings; but if the young man's friends
+were coming that night, his case could not be desperate.
+
+"No, sir; I don't know that you can. I thought, as your room is next
+to mine, we might make it jolly for each other. You are an American,
+sir, the waiter says."
+
+"Yes, I am," laughed Paul.
+
+"But you don't talk through the nose."
+
+"Don't I? Well, I don't perceive that you do, either."
+
+"I'm not a Jonathan," protested Clyde. "I dare say you are a fine
+gentleman, but I can't say that of all the Americans."
+
+"Can't you? Well, I'm sorry for them. Can you say it of all the
+Englishmen?"
+
+"Yes, sir; I think I can of all we meet travelling. The Americans are
+big bullies. I settled accounts with one of them this very day,"
+chuckled Clyde.
+
+"Ah! did you, indeed?"
+
+"I think some of them know what it is to bully and insult an
+Englishman by this time," added Clyde, rubbing his hands, as he
+thought of poor Peaks, floundering in the waters of the Fjord.
+"Perhaps you've heard of that American Academy ship that came into
+Christiania to-day."
+
+"Yes, I have heard of her," answered Paul, curiously.
+
+"I saw her first at Christiansand, and went on board of her with my
+mother and sister. I liked the looks of her, and fancied the young
+chaps on board of her were having a nice time. I wanted to ship in
+her, and I did so; but I was never among such a set of tyrants in the
+whole course of my life."
+
+"Then you joined the ship," replied Paul, who had heard of the new
+addition to the Young America's crew, but had not seen him.
+
+"I'm blamed if I didn't; but before my mother left the ship, a big
+bully of a boatswain insulted me, and I changed my mind. Yet the head
+master persuaded my mother to let him keep me in the ship, and I'm
+blamed if she didn't leave me there."
+
+"Left you there," added Paul, when Clyde paused, apparently to give
+his auditor the opportunity to express his sympathy for his
+unfortunate situation.
+
+"Yes, sir; she left me there, and she won't hear the last of it for
+one year," replied Clyde, shaking his head. "It was a mean trick, and
+I'll pay her for it."
+
+"Probably she did it for the best," suggested Paul, disgusted with the
+assurance, and especially with the want of respect for his mother
+which the youth manifested, though he was anxious to hear the
+conclusion of his story.
+
+"I don't care what she did it for; it was a scurvy trick. I told her
+I wouldn't stay in the ship, any how, and she permitted the big
+boatswain to hold me while she went ashore in a boat. But I knew
+myself, if my mother didn't know me, and I determined not to stay in
+her three days; and I didn't," chuckled Clyde, as he thought of what
+he called his own cleverness.
+
+"What did you do?" asked Paul, deeply interested.
+
+"I was willing to bide my time, and so I hauled sheets, and luffed,
+and tacked, and all that sort of thing, till we got to Christiania.
+When I was pulling the main boom, or something of that kind,--I don't
+just know what it was now,--one of the fellows in gold bands insulted
+me."
+
+"What did he say to you?"
+
+"He ordered me to be silent, and another nob did the same thing. I
+offered to fight them both, and I would have liked to show them what
+an English boy's fist is made of; but the cowards set the boatswain on
+me again. I would have licked him if he had fought fair; but he caught
+me foul, and I could do nothing. I meant to be even with that big
+boatswain, and I think I am," said Clyde, rubbing his hands again with
+delight, and laughing heartily when he thought of his brilliant
+achievement.
+
+"Well, what did you do?"
+
+"I just waited till the ship got to Christiania; and then, when all
+the students were at dinner, I found the big boatswain sitting on a
+beam that runs out over the water--I forget what they call the beam,
+but it's at the bow of the ship."
+
+"The bowsprit," suggested Paul.
+
+"No; I know the bowsprit. It wasn't that. There was another beam like
+it on the other side."
+
+"O, the cat-head!"
+
+"That's just it. Well, I went up to the big boatswain, and asked him
+to look at a ship,--or a 'mofferdite brig, he called it. He looked,
+and I just gave him a push, which dropped him off the cat's head into
+the bay," continued Clyde, who told his story with many a chuckle and
+many a laugh, seeming to enjoy it hugely himself, in spite of the want
+of sympathy on the part of his listener.
+
+"You pushed him overboard!" exclaimed Paul.
+
+"That I did, and did it handsomely, too. He never knew what hurt him
+till he struck the water. He swam for the bow, and I dropped into a
+boat, and came ashore. I saw him climb up to the deck, but I was out
+of his way then. Wasn't that cleverly done?"
+
+"Rather," replied Paul, concealing his indignation.
+
+"I think it was very cleverly done," added Clyde, annoyed at the
+coolness of his companion. "You couldn't have done it better yourself,
+sir."
+
+"I don't think I could," replied Paul, dryly. "And you expect your
+mother this evening."
+
+"Yes; and she shall take my name off the books of the ship."
+
+"Perhaps she will not."
+
+"O, but she will. Then the two nobs that insulted me on the ship shall
+hear from me."
+
+"What do you intend to do with them?"
+
+"I'll whip them both; if I don't my name isn't Clyde Blacklock!"
+
+"But they will take you back to the ship before your mother arrives."
+
+"I dare say they will, if they see me; but I don't intend to go out of
+the hotel till my mother comes. I shall stay in my room, or near it,
+the rest of the day."
+
+The conversation was interrupted by the appearance of Mrs. Kendall,
+who had been preparing for a ride about the city. Paul conducted her
+to the carriage, satisfied that the new scholar could be found when
+wanted. During their excursion he told his wife the adventures of
+Clyde.
+
+"But what a simpleton he was to tell you these things!" added Grace.
+
+"He did not suspect me of knowing anything about the ship. He is one
+of those fellows, who, having done what he regards as a good thing,
+cannot help boasting of it. He considers himself a first-class hero."
+
+When Paul returned from the ride, he found Clyde still walking about
+the hall, as uneasy as a fish out of water.
+
+"Did you see anything of the Academy ship, sir?" asked he, after Mrs.
+Kendall had gone to her room.
+
+"I saw her at anchor in the harbor, and all her people are walking
+about the town," replied Paul.
+
+"I've kept clear of them so far; but I want to catch the two fellows
+with the gold bands."
+
+"Perhaps some of them will catch you."
+
+"Not they! I'm too cunning for clumsy fellows like them."
+
+"I see you are," laughed Paul, amused at the assurance of the young
+Briton.
+
+"If I see them, I'll settle the Alabama claims with them on my own
+account. But you ought to have seen the big boatswain floundering in
+the water, sir."
+
+"No doubt it was very funny."
+
+"It was, indeed," added Clyde, as the waiter appeared, and handed a
+card to Captain Kendall.
+
+"In the court yard, sir," said the servant; and Paul followed the man
+to the place where the visitors were waiting.
+
+Peaks, as dry, clean, and good-natured as ever, was talking to Mr.
+Lowington. Paul could not help laughing as he thought of the
+confidence which Clyde had reposed in him, and that the fugitive had
+voluntarily, and without any precautions, told his adventures to one
+who really belonged to the fleet.
+
+"He has told me all about it," said Paul.
+
+"Told you?" exclaimed Mr. Lowington.
+
+"Yes, sir; how he pushed Peaks overboard, and then ran away," laughed
+Paul. "I don't often wear my uniform on shore, for my wife thinks it
+attracts too much attention; so that he did not suspect me of any
+connection with the fleet."
+
+"But where is he now?" asked the principal.
+
+"I left him in the hall only a moment since."
+
+"Show me his room, my hearty," said Peaks to the waiter.
+
+"Call a carriage," added Mr. Lowington. "He will make a disturbance in
+the streets."
+
+The servant led the way to the room of Clyde, followed by the rest of
+the party. All were rather anxious to see the clever Briton, who had
+done such wonders of valor and cunning, captured.
+
+But Clyde had a pair of eyes, and, withal, a pair of ears. From
+the hall where he promenaded were several doors opening into the
+court-yard. Perhaps the youth had a Yankee's curiosity to see who
+called upon his new acquaintance, and he went to one of these doors.
+He saw Paul walk up to the principal, and shake hands with him. There
+was the big boatswain too, and there were two of the nobs with the
+gold bands. It was evident enough to Clyde, then, that he had made a
+blunder in relating his exploits to a stranger. But the battle was not
+lost yet. His chamber was on the ground floor, and had a window which
+opened into Dronningensgaden. Without losing another instant, he
+opened the window, and dropped out into the street. He did not even
+wait to take the bundle which contained his ship's uniform.
+
+When Peaks entered the chamber, the bird had flown, and the open
+window indicated the means by which he had escaped; but Clyde had
+several minutes the start of his pursuers, and had made good use of
+his time. The boatswain dropped out of the window, followed by Norwood
+and Lincoln, while the principal and the doctor went round by the
+doors as the more dignified means of egress. Peaks went one way, and
+the two lieutenants the other way.
+
+Clyde, fearful that haste might look suspicious, walked a short
+distance, till he came to a building on which was a sign, _Hotel du
+Nord_, and which appeared to be under repairs. He stepped in at the
+open door, and went up stairs. Men were at work in some of the rooms;
+but he avoided them, and appeared to be looking over the building. At
+last he came to an open window on the street from which he had
+entered. He looked out, and in the distance saw his pursuers running
+rapidly in opposite directions. After he had remained in the hotel
+about an hour, he ventured to leave, and walked very cautiously up the
+street. Feeling the need of an overcoat, he entered a store, and
+purchased one, which still further disguised him, so that if he met
+any of his late shipmates, they would be still less likely to
+recognize him. He walked till he came to a carriage stand; where,
+entering a vehicle, he pointed in the direction he wished to go, which
+was towards the king's palace. When the driver stopped at the gate, he
+pointed towards the hills in the rear of the city. The Norwegian
+looked astonished, and could not understand him.
+
+"I want to go out of town."
+
+The driver drove his horse to the other side of the street, and hailed
+a short, stout man, who was passing at the time.
+
+"Do you want a guide, sir?" asked the stranger.
+
+"Yes," promptly replied Clyde.
+
+"Where do wish to go?"
+
+"Over there," replied Clyde, pointing again in the direction he wished
+to go.
+
+"To Sandviken?"
+
+"Yes; that's the place," added the youth, who did not care where he
+went, if he could only get out of the city.
+
+"It is more than eight miles," suggested the guide.
+
+"I don't care if it is eighty; that's where I want to go. Are you a
+_commissionaire_?"
+
+"Yes. I belong to the Victoria Hotel."
+
+"All right; jump in."
+
+The man made a bargain with the driver, and in a few moments Clyde was
+on his way to Sandviken, confident that he had escaped any further
+pursuit. He had already come to the conclusion not to see his mother
+until after the Young America had left Christiania.
+
+In the mean time, Peaks had given up the chase. Paul assured the
+principal that Clyde would come back as soon as his mother arrived.
+Mr. Lowington did not care to have the new scholar see his mother
+again if he was to be a student in the Academy; but as Clyde could not
+be found, there appeared to be no alternative.
+
+In a couple of hours, the fugitive reached Sandviken, where he
+informed his astonished guide that he intended to proceed to
+Christiansand by land. His courier was willing to go with him so long
+as he was paid; and as Clyde had plenty of money, and disbursed it
+freely, there was no difficulty. Though the next day was Sunday, the
+young traveller continued his journey, and on Monday afternoon arrived
+at Apalstoe, at the head of one of the inland lakes, where he intended
+to sleep; but the station-house was full. Clyde was tired, and did not
+feel like going any farther. While he was sending his courier to look
+up a bed for him, about a dozen boys wearing the uniform of the
+Academy ship flashed upon his view. He was astonished and alarmed. He
+suspected that this party had been sent to the interior to head him
+off. He was determined not to be an easy victim.
+
+One of the party had a good-sized salmon in his hand, which indicated
+that they had been a-fishing.
+
+They took no notice of him, though they could not help seeing him, and
+Clyde took courage from this circumstance.
+
+The fishing squad was composed of the crew of the second cutter--the
+unfortunates who had been run down by the steamer.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+THE EXCURSION WITHOUT RUNNING AWAY.
+
+
+The second cutter was a wreck on the water, and the crew saved
+themselves by climbing up the bow of the steamer which had run down
+the boat. They received prompt assistance from those on board, and, as
+the cutter did not sink, and would not have done so, having no
+ballast, even if she had been cut in two, the crew were so well
+trained that not one of them was guilty of the absurdity of jumping
+overboard, and therefore no one was even very wet.
+
+It appeared to be one of those cases where both parties had struggled
+to avoid the catastrophe, but the more they struggled the worse was
+the situation. If the cutter, on the one hand, had continued on her
+course, she would have escaped. If the steamer, on the other hand, had
+not changed her course when the calamity was threatened, the boat
+could have avoided her. The change of purpose in each had confused the
+other, and rendered unavailing the attempt to avoid the collision. The
+boat would have gone clear of the steamer if the latter had not put
+her helm to starboard. But the catastrophe was accomplished so quickly
+that there was not much time to philosophize; and as nothing worse
+than a stove boat had resulted from it, there was not much reason to
+complain. We are not aware that any one did complain; and we only
+state the appearances, not the facts.
+
+The steamer started her wheels again after the cutter had been secured
+and made fast astern. The captain spoke only a few words of English,
+and Sanford found it quite impossible to hold a conversation with him.
+But Ole Amundsen was at hand in this emergency.
+
+"Tell him he needn't stop for us, Ole," said the coxswain.
+
+"Don't you want to return to the ship?" asked the astonished waif.
+
+"No, no," replied Sanford, in a low tone, so that some of the doubtful
+members of his crew might not hear him. "Where is the steamer going,
+Ole?"
+
+"To Christiania, stopping at all the ports on the coast," answered
+Ole, when he had obtained the information from the captain.
+
+"All right; we will go to the first place where she stops," added
+Sanford. "Don't say a word to the rest of the fellows, Ole."
+
+"The first port she stops at is Lillesand," said Ole.
+
+"Very well; we will go there."
+
+Ole explained to the captain that the boys he had picked up wished to
+go to Lillesand, where they could join their ship. This plan exactly
+suited the young Norwegian, for he did not like the idea of being
+landed at Christiansand, or taken back to the ship.
+
+"Where are we going? Why don't he put us on shore, or on board of the
+ship?" demanded Burchmore.
+
+"It's a mail steamer; she is very late," replied Ole.
+
+"But is she going to carry us off, because she is in a hurry?"
+
+"Only to a port up here a little ways. We can come right back in
+another steamer," Ole explained; and Burchmore was satisfied.
+
+Now, the captain had certainly declared that he was in a great hurry,
+and was not willing to wait for the boat which had put off from the
+ship; but he proposed to hail a boat which was passing, and send his
+involuntary passengers to the town in her. Ole assured him his
+companions wished to go to Lillesand, and he was too glad to avoid any
+delay. As the first cutter followed the steamer, it was decided, after
+consultation with the captain, to turn the stove boat adrift, so that
+it could be towed back to the ship by the first cutters. Sanford cast
+off the painter, and the pliant master of the steamer was glad to get
+rid of this check upon the speed of his boat. The boys watched the
+water-logged craft till it was picked up by the first cutter, and then
+passing behind an island, the squadron was out of view.
+
+"How came you here, Ole?" asked Rodman.
+
+"Came in the boat; but I didn't think you were going to smash her. I
+thought I was killed that time, sure," laughed the waif.
+
+"But how came you in the boat?" inquired Wilde.
+
+"I got in, of course; nobody put me in."
+
+"When?"
+
+"When it hung at the davits in the ship, just before the pilot came on
+board."
+
+"What do you get in there for?"
+
+"My education has been neglected, and I have to do a great deal of
+thinking to make up for it. I don't like to be disturbed when I'm
+thinking; so I got into the boat, and covered myself with the sail."
+
+"Tell that to the fishes," snuffed Wilde.
+
+"You can, if you wish; I don't speak their language," laughed Ole.
+
+"But really, Norway, what did you get into the second cutter for?"
+said Sanford.
+
+"The pilot was a first cousin of mine, and I was afraid he would whip
+me for making faces at him when I was a baby. He never forgets
+anything."
+
+"Nonsense!"
+
+"Well, if you know better than I, don't ask me any more about it."
+
+Ole was no more inclined to explain how he came in the second cutter
+than he had been to solve the mystery of being in a water-logged
+bateau, out of sight of land. It only appeared that while the students
+covered the rail and crowded the rigging to see the land, he had put
+himself into the boat. When the hands were called to man the braces,
+he, having no duty to perform, had not answered the call, and was left
+alone in the cutter. At sea, every precaution was taken to provide for
+the safety of the crew in case of any calamity. Each boat was provided
+with a sail, a mast, a compass, and several breakers of water, and a
+quantity of provisions was ready to be put in when needed. Ole stowed
+himself beneath the sail, which lay under the middle board, extending
+fore and aft. Before De Forrest took his place in the stern-sheets,
+Stockwell had discovered the absentee, and communicated the fact of
+his presence to those near him. The crew of the second cutter were
+entirely willing to keep his secret, as they were that of any one who
+needed their help. Among such boys it was regarded as dishonorable in
+the highest degree to betray any one; and, indeed, the principal
+discountenanced anything like "tale-bearing," to which the students
+gave a very liberal construction. Sanford had proposed that De Forrest
+should take a walk on shore, in order to give Ole an opportunity to
+escape from his confinement, which, on account of the singular
+obstinacy and suspicion of that officer, had threatened to be
+indefinitely continued, till the collision came to his aid.
+
+"How's this?" said Stockwell, as he seated himself by the side of the
+coxswain, on one of the settees on the quarter-deck of the steamer.
+
+"How's what?" asked Sanford.
+
+"It seems to me that we are clear of the ship, and without running
+away."
+
+"Don't say a word. We got spilled out the boat, and it was not our
+doing. We obeyed De Forrest's orders to the very letter, so that no
+fault can be found with us."
+
+"Of course not."
+
+"If De Forrest had not ordered me to shove off, I shouldn't have done
+so."
+
+"Then the boat might have been ground up on the rocks."
+
+"Do you see anything green in my eye?" replied Sanford, suggestively.
+
+"You don't mean to say that you smashed the boat on purpose?"
+
+"Certainly I don't mean to _say_ anything of the sort. I obey orders
+if I break owners, or boats either, for that matter."
+
+"What are you going to do next?"
+
+"I don't know. The programme is to go back in the steamer that returns
+to Christiansand to-morrow night."
+
+"O, then you mean to go back."
+
+"Your head's as thick as the broadside of an iron-clad. Of course I
+mean to go back."
+
+"Immediately?"
+
+"In the next boat."
+
+Stockwell did not exactly like the sharp way with which Sanford dealt
+with his innocence. Certainly the coxswain and himself had talked
+about an excursion to the interior of Norway without running away; but
+now, though the circumstances favored the plan, his friend plainly
+announced his intention to return to Christiansand and join the ship.
+But it could be said of the coxswain that his ways were dark, and
+Stockwell was more inclined to wait than to question him. In two hours
+the steamer arrived at Lillesand, and the party went on shore. The
+place was only a small village, but they found accommodations for the
+night.
+
+"What time does the steamer for Christiansand leave this place?" asked
+Sanford, as the party gathered at the station-house, which is the
+hotel, post-office, and establishment for furnishing horses to
+travellers.
+
+"To-morrow evening," replied Ole.
+
+"To-morrow evening!" exclaimed the coxswain. "That will never do! What
+time?"
+
+"About eight o'clock," answered the waif, whose devotion to the truth
+did not prevent him from stating the time two hours later than the
+fact warranted. "She may be two or three hours later."
+
+"The squadron sails for Christiania to-morrow afternoon," added
+Sanford. "The ship will be gone before we can get there."
+
+"She will not go without us," suggested Burchmore.
+
+"Yes, she will," said Stockwell, who was beginning to fathom the dark
+ways of the coxswain. "The principal will suppose we have gone on to
+Christiania."
+
+"That's so."
+
+"But what are we to do?" demanded Tinckner.
+
+"That's the question," added Sanford, with a blank look, as though he
+considered the situation as utterly hopeless.
+
+"We are not so badly off as we might be," said Boyden.
+
+"I don't see how it could be any worse," replied Sanford. "But I don't
+know that it is our fault. The captain of the steamer would not stop,
+after he had picked us up; at least, I don't know anything about it;
+but Ole said he wouldn't stop."
+
+"He could not stop," protested the waif, vehemently. "He had only just
+time enough to reach Frederiksvaern in season for the other steamer. If
+he lost her, he would be turned off. He wouldn't stop for love or
+money."
+
+"No matter, for that; here we are, and what are we going to do? It's
+no use to cry for spilled milk," continued Stockwell. "The ship will
+go to Christiania, and won't come near this place. Mr. Lowington will
+expect to find us there when he arrives, and all we have to do is to
+make good his calculation. We have plenty of money, and we can get
+there somehow or other."
+
+Involuntarily, every fellow put his hands into his pocket; and then,
+if not before, they recalled the suggestion of the coxswain, made
+before they took their places in the cutter, that they should bring
+their money and their pea-jackets; but then, it seemed simply absurd
+that the boat had been smashed by his contrivance.
+
+"Was it for this, Sanford, that you told us to bring our money?" said
+Burchmore.
+
+"I should say a fellow ought always to carry his money with him. No
+one can tell what will happen to him when he goes away from the ship,"
+replied the coxswain. "You can see that it's lucky you have it with
+you. We might have to spend the summer here if we had no money. When
+will a steamer go from here to Christiania, Norway?"
+
+"Next Friday--just a week from to-day," replied the Norwegian, very
+seriously.
+
+"A week!" exclaimed Burchmore.
+
+"That is not long; a week is soon gone."
+
+"But we can't stay here a week," protested Tinckner.
+
+"I don't want to do it," added Sanford; "but if we have to do it, I
+suppose I can stand it as well as the rest of you."
+
+"We can't any of us stand it," said Wilde. "Who's going to stay a week
+in such a place as this? I'm not, for one. I'll swim up to
+Christiansand first."
+
+"Can't we hire a boat, and go back to Christiansand?" Burchmore
+proposed. "It is not more than twenty miles, and it would be a fine
+sail among these beautiful islands."
+
+"All right; look up a boat, Norway," replied Sanford, as though
+entirely willing to adopt this plan.
+
+Ole walked about the place for half an hour, accompanied by three of
+the boys. Perhaps he was careful not to find what he wanted; at any
+rate, no boat seemed to be available for the purpose desired, and when
+the excursionists met again, it was reported that no boat suitable for
+the accommodation of the party could be found.
+
+"Then can't we engage horses, and go round to Christiansand by land?"
+inquired Burchmore.
+
+"In carioles?" queried Ole, with an odd smile.
+
+"Carioles or wagons; anything we can find."
+
+"You can, but it will take you a day and a half," replied Ole.
+
+"A day and a half to go twenty miles."
+
+"About seventy miles by land," added Ole. "You must go almost up to
+the north pole before you can cross the river."
+
+"O, nonsense!" exclaimed Burchmore, who could not help feeling that
+Ole was not altogether reliable on his figures and facts.
+
+"If you don't believe it, go and ask the postmaster, or any one in the
+town," continued the waif.
+
+"That's all very well to talk about asking any one, when no one speaks
+a syllable of English."
+
+"I will do the talking for you."
+
+"Of course you will; you have done it all thus far."
+
+"I don't mean to say that you must really double the north pole, or
+that it is just seventy miles by land; but it's a long distance," Ole
+explained.
+
+"No matter how far it is; we will go," added the pliant coxswain. "I'm
+willing to do whatever the fellows wish. It shall not be said that I
+was mulish."
+
+"But if it is seventy miles, or anything like it, we couldn't get to
+Christiansand before the ship left."
+
+"That's just what I was thinking," answered Sanford, with a puzzled
+expression on his face. "Ole says it is a long way, and I have been
+told that these Norwegians are very honest, and will not lie; so I
+suppose he has told the truth."
+
+It was barely possible that the waif had learned to lie in England,
+where he had acquired his English.
+
+"I suppose we must give up the idea of going in a boat, or going by
+land. We can only wait till the steamer comes," continued Burchmore,
+putting on a very long face.
+
+"We can't stand that," protested Wilde.
+
+"Well, what are you going to do?" demanded Burchmore.
+
+"Can't you tell us, Norway?" said Tinckner.
+
+"I know what I should do if I were in your situation, and wanted to
+make a sure thing of it."
+
+"Well, what?" asked Burchmore, gathering a hope from the words of the
+waif.
+
+"I should go to Christiania."
+
+"But how?"
+
+"By land, of course."
+
+"It's up by the north pole."
+
+"It is about a hundred and fifty miles from here by water, and it
+can't be any more by land," said Sanford. "But I don't care what you
+do; I will do as the others say."
+
+"I like the idea," added Stockwell. "It is the only safe thing we can
+do. If we go back to Christiansand, we shall be too late for the ship.
+If we wait for a steamer to Christiania, she will be gone when we get
+there."
+
+"How much will it cost to go to Christiania in this way?" inquired
+Wilde, who did not feel quite sure that his funds would stand such a
+drain.
+
+"Here are the prices in the post-house," said Ole, as he led the way
+to a partition on which the posting was put up. "For one mile, one
+mark six skillings."
+
+"We know all about it now," laughed Rodman. "What's a mark, and what's
+a skilling?"
+
+"Twenty-four skillings make a mark, and a skilling is about a
+halfpenny English," Ole explained.
+
+"About a cent of our money," continued Rodman. "One mark and six
+skillings would be thirty skillings, or about thirty cents."
+
+"That will never do," interposed Wilde, shaking his head. "One hundred
+and fifty miles, at thirty cents a mile, would be forty-five dollars;
+and I suppose we have to pay for our grub besides."
+
+"It would come to ten or twelve pounds, and Wilde has only ten
+pounds," added Rodman.
+
+"No, no; you are all wrong. That means a Norwegian mile--about seven
+of ours. It would be only four and two sevenths cents a mile; say, six
+or seven dollars to Christiania; and the grub would cost as much
+more," said Stockwell. "Three pounds will cover the whole expense,
+and that won't break any body."
+
+After considerable discussion, it was agreed to adopt the plan
+proposed, and Ole was instructed to make the necessary arrangements
+with the station-master. The party went out to the stable to examine
+the carioles. They were a kind of gig, without any hood or top, with a
+small board behind, on which stands or sits the boy who drives the
+team back to the station after it has left the passenger. Tourists
+generally purchase the carioles in which they ride, and are not
+bothered with the boys. The students were not very nice about their
+accommodations; and finding that when two persons went in the same
+vehicle only half a fare extra was charged, they decided to engage but
+five carioles. As the law did not require the station-master to keep
+this number of horses in waiting, it was necessary to send "forbud"
+before the party started. This was an order to all the stations on the
+road to have five horses ready, and may be forwarded by mail or by
+special messenger, the expense of which was paid by the young
+tourists.
+
+It was solemnly agreed that the expense should be equally divided, and
+Burchmore was elected cashier and paymaster. With the assistance of
+Ole, he changed twelve pounds into Norwegian money, and found himself
+heavily loaded with the small coins of the country, which would be
+needed in making change at the stations. After all this important
+business had been disposed of, the party walked all over the town and
+its suburbs, and were duly stared at by the astonished people.
+
+"We ought to write a letter to Mr. Lowington, and tell him how we are
+situated," suggested Churchill, as they were returning to the station.
+
+"Exactly so; and carry it to him ourselves," replied Stockwell. "I
+move you that Burchmore be appointed bearer of despatches."
+
+"I mean to have the letter sent by mail," added Churchill.
+
+"We shall be in Christiania as soon as any mail, if there is no
+steamer for a week," said Sanford.
+
+"True; I didn't think of that," continued the proposer of this
+precaution. "The principal will be worried about us."
+
+"Let him worry," replied the coxswain; "that is, we can't do anything
+to relieve his mind."
+
+"I don't see that we can," added Churchill.
+
+For the want of something better to do, the students turned in at an
+early hour in the evening, and turned out at an early hour in the
+morning. They all slept in the same room, some of them in beds, and
+the rest on the floor; but those who slept on the floor were just as
+well satisfied as those who slept in the beds. After a breakfast
+consisting mainly of fish, they piled into the carioles. They were
+all in exceedingly jolly humor, and seated themselves in and on the
+vehicles in various uncouth postures. One boy in each cariole was to
+drive the horse, and he was carefully instructed to do nothing but
+simply hold the reins, and let the well-informed animal have his own
+way. The horses were rather small, and very shaggy beasts; but they
+went off at a lively pace. At the first hill they insisted upon
+walking up, and most of the boys followed their example. Behind three
+of the carioles were the small boys who were to bring the teams back.
+These juvenile Norwegians were as sober and dignified as though they
+had been members of the Storthing, refusing to laugh at any of the
+wild tantrums of the crazy students.
+
+At the first station, where the road from Lillesand joins that from
+Christiansand to the north, the horses ordered by "forbud" were in
+readiness, and the party had only to pass from one set of carioles to
+another. The grim post-boys did smile faintly when they received their
+perquisites, and others, just as immovable, took their places for the
+next post. The road now lay along the banks of a considerable river,
+and the scenery was rather interesting, though by no means grand. They
+passed an occasional farm; but generally the buildings were of the
+rudest and shabbiest description, though occasionally there was a neat
+residence, painted white or yellow, with roof of red tile. The boys
+walked up all the hills, leaving the sagacious horses to take care of
+themselves. All the students voted that it was jolly to travel in this
+manner, and there was no end to the sky-larking and racing on the
+road. At noon, they stopped long enough to dine, and at night found
+themselves at Tvetsund, at the foot of Nisser Lake, where they lodged.
+As this was as far as they had sent their "forbud," they decided to
+proceed by boat through the lake, a distance of about twenty miles.
+
+The next day was Sunday, which was always observed with great
+strictness on board of the ship, no play and no unnecessary work being
+permitted. There was a little church in the village, but none but Ole
+could understand a word of the preacher's prayer or sermon; so that
+the students voted it would be useless for them to go there. Four of
+the party, still controlled by the influences which prevailed on board
+of the ship, did not wish to travel on Sunday; but when it was
+represented that the ship might leave Christiania before the party
+arrived, they yielded to the wishes of the other five, and procuring
+boats, they proceeded on their way. At the head of the lake they took
+the road, and walked about seven miles to Apalstoe.
+
+"We are stuck here," said Sanford, after they had taken supper at the
+station-house. "This posting is a first-class fraud."
+
+"Why, what's the matter?" demanded Burchmore, alarmed by the manner of
+the coxswain.
+
+"No horses to be had till Tuesday morning."
+
+"That's a fraud."
+
+"Well, it can't be helped," added Sanford, philosophically. "I'm
+willing to walk, if the rest of the fellows say so."
+
+"We can't walk to Christiania."
+
+"That's so; and we should not find any more horses at the next station
+than here. Norway says we didn't send 'forbud,' which must be done
+when more than three horses are wanted."
+
+"Why didn't Ole send 'forbud,' then?"
+
+"He said we had better go by boat part of the way; it would be easier.
+But part of us can take the three horses that are ready, and go on
+with them."
+
+"I don't believe in separating."
+
+"We are only a day and a half from Christiania, and we shall arrive by
+Wednesday noon. The ship won't leave before that time."
+
+So Burchmore was persuaded to submit to his fate like a philosopher,
+which, however, was not considered very hard, when it was announced
+that there was excellent fishing in the vicinity. It is to be feared
+that Ole and the coxswain had created this hinderance themselves, for
+the law of the country allows only three hours' delay in the
+furnishing of horses. The farmers are compelled to supply them, and
+doubtless twenty could have been provided in the time allowed, though
+the young tourists were able to give twelve hours' notice. This,
+however, did not suit the coxswain's purposes, and as he and Ole had
+occupied the same cariole, there was no want of concert in their words
+and actions. On Monday the students went a-fishing, paying a small sum
+for a license to do so, though this is not necessary in all parts of
+Norway. The united catch of the whole party was one salmon, taken by
+Burchmore, and weighing about eight pounds. It was voted by the party,
+before this result was reached, in the middle of the afternoon, that
+fishing in Norway was "a first-class fraud." We heard of a party of
+three, who fished two weeks, and caught eight salmon, though this want
+of luck is the exception, rather than the rule, in the north.
+
+As the party returned from their excursion, bearing the single trophy
+of their patience, Clyde Blacklock discovered them. He was alarmed at
+first, but when he recognized no one among them whom he had seen on
+board of the ship, he concluded they did not belong to her.
+
+"Good evening, sir," said he, addressing Sanford, who seemed to be the
+chief of the excursionists. "You have been a-fishing?"
+
+"Yes; and ten of us have one fish to show for a whole day's work,"
+laughed the coxswain.
+
+"Poor luck; but you seem to be sailors," continued the Briton.
+
+"We belong to the ship Young America."
+
+"Ah, indeed!"
+
+"That's so."
+
+In half an hour Clyde and Sanford were on excellent terms. The former,
+when he learned that his new acquaintance had not been sent after him,
+was quite communicative, and even told the story of his experience on
+board of the ship, and of his escape from bondage. Sanford laughed,
+and seemed to enjoy the narrative; but straightway the coxswain began
+to tremble when he learned that Clyde had with him a Norwegian who
+spoke English. It was necessary to get rid of so dangerous a person
+without any delay. The Briton liked Sanford so well that he was not
+willing to leave him; and, indeed, the whole party were so jolly that
+he desired to join his fortunes with theirs. Sanford wrote a brief
+letter to Mr. Lowington, stating the misfortunes of the party, and
+that they expected to arrive in Christiania on Wednesday or Thursday.
+
+"Now, Mr. ----, I don't know your name," said Sanford, when he
+found Clyde, after he had written the epistle.
+
+"Blacklock," replied the Briton--"Clyde Blacklock."
+
+"Well, Blacklock, if you want an up-and-down good time, come with us."
+
+"Where? To Christiania? into the lion's den?"
+
+"Not yet, but--don't open your mouth; don't let on for the world,"
+whispered the coxswain, glancing at his companions.
+
+"Not a word," added Clyde, satisfied he had found the right friend.
+
+"We are going to the Rjukanfos to-morrow, but only one or two of us
+know it yet. Your man will spoil all. Send him back to Christiania
+this very afternoon. Here's a blind for him; let him take this
+letter."
+
+Clyde liked plotting and mischief, and as soon as his guide had eaten
+his supper, he was started for his home in the capital, glad enough to
+go, for he had been paid for all the time agreed upon; and Sanford
+ceased to tremble lest he should expose to his companions the mistake
+in regard to horses, or another blunder which was to be made the next
+morning.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+GOTTENBURG AND FINKEL.
+
+
+On Saturday night, as Clyde had anticipated, his mother arrived at
+Christiania; and the people at the Victoria informed her of the
+disappearance of her son. The next morning she hastened on board of
+the ship, and heard the principal's story. Mrs. Blacklock wept
+bitterly, and was fearful that her darling boy was forever lost; but
+Mr. Lowington assured her that no serious harm could befall him. He
+spoke very plainly to her in regard to Clyde's character and his
+ungovernable passions, assuring her that he must certainly come to an
+evil end within a few years, if he was not restrained and controlled.
+The poor mother felt the truth of all he said, and was willing that he
+should continue the beneficent work upon which he had commenced. She
+spent the forenoon on board, and was introduced to Kendall and
+Shuffles and their ladies. The principal illustrated what he had said
+about Clyde by relating the history of the present captain and owner
+of the Feodora, and Mrs. Blacklock went away even hopeful that her boy
+might yet be saved to her.
+
+On Monday, the first secular day of the month, the new list of
+officers was announced in each vessel of the squadron. The changes on
+board of the ship were not very violent, though the third lieutenant
+became captain, while Cumberland became the commodore.
+
+"I congratulate you, Captain Lincoln," said Dr. Winstock to the new
+commander, when he appeared in the uniform of his new rank.
+
+"Thank you, sir," replied Lincoln.
+
+"I have been satisfied for some time that you would attain this
+position."
+
+"I am only sorry to be promoted over Judson and Norwood, for they have
+always been good friends of mine."
+
+"If they are good and true friends they will rejoice at your success,
+though it places you over them. You have worked very hard, and you are
+fully entitled to your rank."
+
+"Thank you, sir. I have tried to do my duty," replied Lincoln,
+modestly.
+
+"When I see a young gentleman use the library as freely as you do, I
+am always tolerably confident that he will attain a high rank. We go
+on shore this forenoon, I believe."
+
+"I heard we were to make an excursion to-day, and another to-morrow."
+
+"You will see something of the interior of Norway, after all, though
+it is not quite possible to transport two hundred boys over a country
+where the facilities for travel are so meagre," added the surgeon.
+
+"For my part, I should like to walk, even a hundred miles."
+
+"That is not practicable. How could such a crowd be lodged and fed, in
+some of the small villages where you would be compelled to pass the
+night?"
+
+"I suppose it would not be possible, and I shall be satisfied with
+whatever the principal thinks best," replied the captain.
+
+The students were called to muster, and Mr. Lowington explained that
+he proposed to spend the day, in picnic style, at Frogner Saeter, and
+that the party would walk. The boats were then prepared, and the crews
+of the several vessels went on shore. Captains Kendall and Shuffles
+procured carriages, for the ladies were not able to walk so far.
+Passing out of the more densely settled portions of the city, the
+excursionists came to a delightful region, abounding in pleasant
+residences, some of which were grand and lofty. For a time the
+landscape was covered with small cottages, painted white or yellow;
+but as they proceeded they came to a country very sparsely settled,
+and very similar to that of New England. The road lay through woods of
+pine and fir, and had been constructed by Mr. Heftye, a
+public-spirited citizen, who owned a large estate at the summit of the
+hill.
+
+"This looks just like Maine," said Captain Lincoln, who walked at the
+side of Dr. Winstock.
+
+"Exactly like it. There is a house, however, which is hardly so good
+as those you see in Maine," replied the doctor.
+
+"It isn't any better than a shanty, and the barn is as good as the
+house. I wonder what that is for;" and Lincoln pointed to a bunch of
+straw, on the top of a pole, at the entrance of the barn. "I have seen
+two or three of those here, and near Christiansand."
+
+"It was grain placed there for the birds during the winter."
+
+"That's very kind of the people, I must say."
+
+"They are very kind to all their animals."
+
+Near the summit of the hill, the party came to the summer-house of Mr.
+Heftye, a very neat structure of wood, with a piazza, from which is
+obtained a beautiful view of the surrounding country. Another half
+hour brought them to the top of the hill, where the proprietor had
+erected a wooden tower, or observatory. It was some sixty or seventy
+feet high, and was stayed with rope guys, extending to the trees on
+four sides, to prevent it from being blown over. Only twenty of the
+boys were permitted to go up at one time, for the wind was tolerably
+fresh, and the structure swayed to and fro like the mast of a ship in
+a sea. From the top, mountains fifty miles distant could be seen.
+Christiania Fjord lay like a panorama in the distance, stretching as
+far as the eye could reach. To the west the country looked wild and
+desolate, and was covered with wood-crowned mountains, though none of
+any considerable height could be seen. It was a magnificent view, and
+some of the most enthusiastic of the students declared that it was
+worth a voyage to Norway; but boys are proverbially extravagant.
+
+A couple of hours were spent on the hill, the lunch was eaten, and the
+boys declared that they were well rested. The return walk was not so
+pleasant, for the novelties of the region had been exhausted. The road
+passed through private property, where there were at least a dozen
+gates across it in different places; and as the party approached, a
+woman, a boy, or a girl appeared, to open them. Kendall or Shuffles
+rewarded each of them with a few skillings for the service. When
+their two and four skilling pieces were exhausted, they were obliged
+to use larger coins, rather than be mean; but it was observed that the
+Norwegians themselves, though able to ride in a carriage, never gave
+anything. It was amusing to see the astonishment of the boys and girls
+when they received an eight skilling piece, and the haste with which
+they ran to their parents to exhibit the prize.
+
+The party reached the vessels at five o'clock, and after supper the
+boats were again in demand for a visit to Oscarshal, the white summer
+palace, which could be seen from the ship. Mr. Bennett had provided
+the necessary tickets, and made the arrangements for the excursion. It
+is certainly a very pretty place, but there are a hundred country
+residences in the vicinity of New York, Boston, or any other large
+city of the United States, which excel it in beauty and elegance, as
+well as in the expense lavished upon them. Before returning to the
+anchorage, the boat squadron pulled about for a couple of hours among
+the beautiful islands, and when the students returned to the fleet,
+they felt that they had about exhausted Christiania and its environs.
+
+The next day they went by the railroad train to Eidsvold, and there
+embarked in the steamer Kong Oscar for a voyage of sixty-five miles up
+the Mjosen Lake to Lillehammer, where they arrived at half past five
+in the afternoon. The scenery of the lake is pleasant, but not grand,
+the slope of the hills being covered with farms. Near the upper end,
+the hills are higher, and the aspect is more picturesque. Some of the
+western boys thought it looked like the shores of the Ohio River,
+others compared it with the Delaware, and a New Hampshire youth
+considered it more like Lake Winnipiseogee.
+
+Lillehammer is a small town of seventeen hundred inhabitants. M.
+Hammer's and Madame Ormsrud's hotel were not large enough to
+accommodate the party, and they began to experience some of the
+difficulties of travelling in such large numbers; but Mr. Bennett had
+done his work well, and sleeping-rooms were provided in other houses
+for the rest. The tourists rambled all over the town and its vicinity,
+looked into the saw-mills, visited the farms, and compared the
+agriculture with that of their own country; and it must be added that
+Norway suffered very much in the comparison, for the people are slow
+to adopt innovations upon the methods of their fathers.
+
+Early in the morning--for steamers in Norway and Sweden have a
+villanous practice of starting at unseemly hours--the students
+embarked for Eidsvold, and were on board the vessels long before the
+late sunset. On the quarter, waiting for the principal, was Clyde's
+courier, who had arrived that morning, after the departure of the
+excursionists. He evidently had not hurried his journey, though he had
+been told to do so. He delivered Sanford's brief note, which was
+written in pencil, and Mr. Lowington read it. The absentees were safe
+and well, and would arrive by Thursday. He was glad to hear of their
+safety, but as the squadron was now ready to sail, he regretted the
+delay.
+
+"Where did you leave the boys?" asked the principal of the courier.
+
+"At Apalstoe," replied the guide, whose name was Poulsen.
+
+"Do you belong there?"
+
+"No, sir; I live in Christiania. I went down there with a young
+gentleman last Saturday."
+
+"Who was he?"
+
+"Mr. Blacklock, sir; a young English gentleman."
+
+"Ah! did you? And where is Mr. Blacklock now?"
+
+"I left him at Apalstoe with a party of young gentlemen who were
+dressed like the people here; and he sent me back with this letter,"
+replied Poulsen, who proceeded to explain that Clyde had engaged him
+as courier for Christiansand, but had changed his mind when he met the
+party belonging to the ship, and had concluded to return to
+Christiania with them.
+
+This was precisely what he had been told to say by the young Briton,
+and probably he believed that it was a correct statement. The
+principal saw no reason to doubt the truth of it, for Clyde must be
+satisfied that his mother was in Christiania by this time, and would
+naturally wish to join her. Anxious to console Mrs. Blacklock, Mr.
+Lowington called for a boat, and hastened on shore to see her. He
+found her, her daughter, and Paul Kendall and lady, in the
+reading-room at the Victoria--a unique apartment, with a fountain in
+the centre, a glass gallery over the court-yard, and lighted with
+many-colored lamps. The principal communicated the intelligence he had
+received of her son to Mrs. Blacklock, whose face lighted up at the
+news.
+
+"Then you have heard from the absentees, Mr. Lowington," said Paul
+Kendall.
+
+"Yes; they are on their way to Christiania, and Sanford says they will
+arrive to-morrow, at farthest; but they may be delayed," replied the
+principal.
+
+"No one need worry about them if they are safe and well," added Paul,
+glancing at Clyde's mother.
+
+"They are safe and well, but I intended to sail for Gottenburg
+to-morrow morning. I have almost concluded to do so, and leave some
+one to accompany the boys to Gottenburg in the steamer. I do not like
+to delay the whole fleet for them."
+
+"It would take a long time to beat out of the fjord against a head
+wind," added Paul.
+
+"If the wind is fair to-morrow morning, I shall sail, whether they
+arrive or not."
+
+"A steamer leaves for Gottenburg on Saturday morning, and she may
+arrive as soon as your ship," added Paul.
+
+"Very true. I think I will leave Peaks to look out for the absentees.
+Are you sure the steamer goes on Saturday?"
+
+"Yes, sir; here is the time table," replied Paul, producing a paper he
+had obtained at Mr. Bennett's. "Dampskibet Kronprindsesse Louise."
+
+"That's Norwegian, Paul. Can you read it?" laughed Mr. Lowington.
+
+"A little. 'Hver Loeverday;' that means on Saturday; 'at 6 fm.,' which
+is early in the morning. She arrives at Gottenburg about midnight."
+
+"That will answer our purpose very well. We shall get under way early
+in the morning, Paul."
+
+"Then I will go on board of the yacht to-night, sir; but you need not
+wait for me, for I think I can catch you if you should get two or
+three hours the start of me. I haven't used my balloon jib yet, and am
+rather anxious to do so."
+
+"I shall not wait for you, then, Paul."
+
+After a long conversation with Mrs. Blacklock, in which he assured her
+again that nothing but firmness on her part could save her son from
+ruin, the principal left the hotel, and returned to the ship. In the
+evening Mr. and Mrs. Kendall went on board of the Grace. On the
+following morning, the wind being a little north of west, the signal
+for sailing was displayed on board of the Young America, and at six
+o'clock the fleet were under way. The weather was beautiful, and the
+fresh breeze enabled all the vessels to log eight knots an hour, which
+brought them fairly into the Skager Rack early in the afternoon.
+
+"I suppose we are off the coast of Sweden now," said Norwood, as he
+glanced at the distant hills on the left.
+
+"The pilot said Frederikshald was in this direction," replied Captain
+Lincoln, pointing to the shore. "It is at the head of a small fjord,
+and is near the line between Norway and Sweden."
+
+"Charles XII. was killed there--wasn't he?"
+
+"That's the place. The fortress of Frederiksteen is there, on a
+perpendicular rock four hundred feet high."
+
+"I wish we went nearer to the Swedish coast," added Norwood.
+
+"We shall see enough of it before we leave the Baltic," said Lincoln.
+
+"Probably we shall not care to see it after we have been looking at it
+a week."
+
+"According to the chart, this part of the coast is fringed with
+islands, but they don't look so bare and desolate as those of Norway.
+I had an idea that everything on this side of the ocean was entirely
+different from what we see on our side," added the captain.
+
+"That was just my idea."
+
+"But it isn't so. It is almost the same thing here as the coast of
+Maine. The shore here is hilly, and through the glass it looks as
+though it was covered with pine forests."
+
+"I expect to see something different before we return."
+
+"Not in the Baltic; for I fancy most of the southern coast looks like
+that of our Middle and Southern States."
+
+"Up here, even the houses look just as they do at home."
+
+"I don't believe we shall find it so in Denmark."
+
+As there was little to be seen, the regular routine of the squadron
+was followed, and those who were in the steerage, attending to their
+recitations, did not feel that they were losing anything. Later in the
+day, the wind was light, and the vessels made very little progress,
+though the course brought them nearer to the coast, where on the port
+bow appeared a high promontory, extending far out into the sea. The
+wind died out entirely just before sunset, and the sails hung
+motionless from the spars; for there was no swell to make them thrash
+about, as at sea. It was utter silence, and it was hard to believe
+that very ugly storms often made sad havoc in this channel.
+
+When the sun rose the next morning it brought with it a light breeze
+from the west, and the fleet again skimmed merrily along over the
+water. Its course was near the town of Marstrand, a noted Swedish
+watering-place, situated on an island. Soon after, pilots were taken,
+and the vessels stood into the harbor of Gottenburg, which is formed
+by the mouth of Goeta River. Along the sides of the channel were posts
+set in the water, for the convenience of vessels hauling in or out of
+the harbor. The fleet came to anchor in a convenient part of the port,
+and those on board proceeded to take a leisurely survey of the city.
+The portion of the town nearest to them was built on low, flat land,
+and they could see the entrances of various canals. Farther back was a
+series of rugged hills, which were covered with pleasant residences
+and beautiful gardens. After dinner the students were mustered on
+deck, to listen to a few particulars in regard to the city, though it
+was understood that the general lecture on Sweden would be reserved
+until the arrival of the squadron at Stockholm.
+
+"What city is this?" asked Mr. Mapps.
+
+"Gottenburg," replied a hundred of the students.
+
+"That is plain English. What do the Swedes call it?"
+
+"G-oe-t-e-b-o-r-g," answered Captain Lincoln, spelling the word.
+
+"Perhaps I had better call on Professor Badois to pronounce it for
+you."
+
+"Y[=a]t-a-borg," said the instructor in languages, repeating the
+pronunciation several times, which, however, cannot be very accurately
+expressed with English characters. "And the river here is Ya-tah."
+
+"The French call the city _Gothembourg_. It is five miles from the
+sea, and is connected with Stockholm by the Goeta Canal, which is a
+wonderful piece of engineering. Steamboats ply regularly between
+Gottenburg and the capital through this canal, the voyage occupying
+three or four days."
+
+"I intend to make a trip up this canal as far as the Wenern Lake, with
+the students," said Mr. Lowington.
+
+A cheer greeted this announcement, and then the professor described
+the canal minutely.
+
+"The principal street of Gottenburg," he continued, "is on the canal,
+extending through the centre of the city. There are no remarkable
+buildings, however, for the city is a commercial place. It was founded
+by Gustavus Adolphus, and, like many other cities of the north, being
+built of wood, it has several times been nearly destroyed by fire. The
+buildings now are mostly of stone, or of brick covered with plaster.
+The environs of the city, as you may see from the ship, are very
+pleasant. Now a word about the money of Sweden. The government has
+adopted a decimal system, of which the unit is the _riksdaler_,
+containing one hundred _oere_. The currency in circulation is almost
+entirely paper, though no bills smaller than one riksdaler are issued.
+The silver coins in use are the half and the quarter riksdaler, and
+the ten-oere piece; the latter being a very small coin. On the coppers,
+the value in oere is marked. A riksdaler is worth about twenty-seven
+cents of our money. Sweden is a cheap country."
+
+The signal was made for embarking in the boats, and in a few moments
+the Gottenburgers, as well as the people on board of the foreign
+vessels in the harbor, were astonished by the evolutions of the
+squadron. The students landed, and dividing into parties, explored the
+city. Their first care was to examine the canal, and the various craft
+that floated upon it; but the latter, consisting mainly of schooners,
+were not different from those they saw at home. They visited the
+exchange, the cathedral, the residence of the governor of the
+province, and other principal edifices.
+
+"How do you feel, Scott?" asked Laybold, after they had walked till
+they were tired out, and it was nearly time to go to the
+landing-place.
+
+"Tired and hungry," replied the wag. "I wonder if these Swedishers
+have anything to eat."
+
+"Probably they do; here's a place which looks like a restaurant."
+
+"I feel as though I hadn't tasted food for four months. Let's go in."
+
+They entered the store, which was near the _Bourse_. A neatly-dressed
+waiter bowed to them, and Scott intimated that they wanted a lunch.
+The man who understood English, conducted them to a table, on which a
+variety of eatables was displayed, some of which had a familiar look,
+and others were utterly new and strange. The waiter filled a couple of
+wine-glasses from a decanter containing a light-colored fluid, and
+placed them before the boys.
+
+"What's that?" asked Scott, glancing suspiciously at the wine-glass.
+
+"_Finkel_," replied the man.
+
+"Exactly so; that's what I thought it was," replied Scott, who had
+never heard of the stuff before. "Is it strong?"
+
+"No," answered the waiter, shaking his head with a laugh. "Everybody
+drinks it in Sweden."
+
+"Then we must, Laybold, for we are somebody."
+
+Scott raised the glass. The fluid had the odor of anise-seed, and was
+not at all disagreeable. The taste, too, was rather pleasant at first,
+and Scott drank it off. Laybold followed his example. We must do them
+the justice to say that neither of them knew what "finkel" was.
+Something like strangulation followed the swallowing of the fluid.
+
+"That's not bad," said Scott, trying to make the best of it.
+
+"No, not bad, Scott; but what are you crying about?" replied the
+other, when he recovered the use of his tongue.
+
+"I happened to think of an old aunt of mine, who died and left me all
+her money," added Scott, wiping his eyes. "But you needn't cry; she
+didn't leave any of the money to you."
+
+"What are you going to eat?"
+
+"I generally eat victuals," replied Scott, picking up a slice of bread
+on which was laid a very thin slice of smoked salmon. "That's not
+bad."
+
+The waiter passed to Laybold a small plate of sandwiches, filled with
+a kind of fish-spawn, black and shining. The student took a huge bite
+of one of them, but a moment elapsed before he realized the taste of
+the interior of the sandwich; then, with the ugliest face a boy could
+assume, he rushed to the door, and violently ejected the contents of
+his mouth into the street.
+
+"What's the matter?" demanded the waiter, struggling to keep from
+laughing.
+
+"What abominably nasty stuff!" exclaimed Laybold. "It's just like fish
+slime."
+
+"Don't you like it, Laybold?" asked Scott, coolly.
+
+"Like it? I don't like it."
+
+"Everybody in Sweden eats it," said the waiter.
+
+"What's the matter with it? Is it like defunct cat?" asked Scott.
+
+"More like defunct fish. Try it."
+
+"I will, my lad," added Scott, taking a liberal bite of one of the
+sandwiches.
+
+"How is it?" inquired Laybold.
+
+"First rate; that's the diet for me."
+
+"Very good," said the waiter.
+
+"You don't mean to say you like that stuff, Scott."
+
+"The proof of the pudding is the eating of the bag. I do like it, even
+better than 'finkel.'"
+
+"I don't believe it. No one with a Christian stomach could eat such
+stuff."
+
+"You judge by your own experience. I say it is good. Yours isn't a
+Christian stomach, and that's the reason you don't like it."
+
+"You are a heathen, Scott."
+
+"Heathen enough to know what's good."
+
+"Some more finkel, sir?" suggested the waiter.
+
+"No more finkel for me," replied Scott, whose head was beginning to
+whirl like a top.
+
+"Better take some more," laughed Laybold, who was in the same
+condition.
+
+"I can't stop to take any more; I'm hungry," replied Scott, who
+continued to devour the various viands on the table, till his
+companion's patience was exhausted.
+
+"Come, Scott, we shall be late at the landing."
+
+"We won't go home till morning," chanted the boozy student.
+
+"I will go now;" and Laybold stood up, and tried to walk to the
+door--a feat which he accomplished with no little difficulty.
+
+"Don't be in a hurry, my boy. Come and take some finkel."
+
+"I don't want any finkel."
+
+"Then come and pay the bill. I shall clean out this concern if I stay
+any longer."
+
+"How much, waiter?" stammered Laybold.
+
+"One riksdaler."
+
+"Cheap enough. I should have been broken if they charged by the pound
+for what I ate."
+
+"That's so," added Laybold, as he gave the waiter an English
+sovereign, and received his change in paper.
+
+"Now, my boy, we'll go to sea again," said Scott, as he staggered
+towards the door. "See here, Laybold."
+
+"Well, what do you want?" snarled the latter.
+
+"I'll tell you something, if you won't say anything about it to any
+one."
+
+"I won't."
+
+"Don't tell the principal."
+
+"No."
+
+"Well, then, we're drunk," added Scott, with a tipsy grin.
+
+"You are."
+
+"I am, my boy; I don't know a bob-stay from a bowling hitch. And you
+are as drunk as I am, Laybold."
+
+"I know what I am about."
+
+"So do I know what you are about. You are making a fool of yourself.
+Hold on a minute," added Scott, as he seated himself on a bench before
+a shop.
+
+"Come along, Scott."
+
+"Not for Joseph."
+
+"We shall be left."
+
+"That's just what I want. I'm not going to present myself before the
+principal in this condition--not if I know it."
+
+Laybold, finding that it was not convenient to stand, seated himself
+by the side of his companion. Presently they discovered a party of
+officers on their way to the boats, and they staggered into a lane to
+escape observation. The two students, utterly vanquished by "finkel,"
+did not appear at the landing, and the boats left without them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+ON THE WAY TO THE RJUKANFOS.
+
+
+"What may the Rjukanfos be?" asked Clyde Blacklock, after his courier
+had started on his return to Christiania.
+
+"O, it's a big thing," replied Sanford. "You can bet high on it."
+
+"Doubtless I can; but is it a mountain, a river, or a lake?"
+
+"'Pon my word, I don't know. Here, Norway!" he shouted to Ole, who was
+with the rest of the party.
+
+"I'm here, Mr. Coxswain," replied the waif.
+
+"What's the Rjukanfos? You told me we ought to go there; but I'll be
+hanged if I know whether it's a lake or a river."
+
+"Neither a lake nor a river," replied Ole. "It's a big waterfall.
+_Fos_, on the end of a word, always makes a waterfall of it. There's
+another, the Voeringfos; but that's too far away."
+
+"How far is it?"
+
+"I don't know; but it's a long distance," added Ole. "All the other
+fellows think we are going to Christiania in the morning."
+
+"All but Stockwell and Rodman," answered Sanford, who had told Ole
+about the new recruit.
+
+"So you are going to play it upon them--are you?" laughed Clyde.
+
+"Just a little. We don't want to leave Norway without seeing something
+of the country, and the rest of the fellows won't go. So we are going
+to take them along with us."
+
+"Excellent! That will be a magnificent joke," exclaimed Clyde. "I'm
+with you. I suppose you all ran away from the ship when you found the
+tyranny was too much for you."
+
+"O, no! We didn't run away. We wouldn't do that. Somehow, by an
+accident, our boat was stove, and we were carried off by a steamer.
+Then we couldn't get back to Christiansand before the ship sailed, and
+we were obliged to come across the country to Christiania, you see."
+
+"I see," replied Clyde, knowingly. "But you don't mean to go back to
+the ship--do you?"
+
+"Certainly we do," protested Sanford.
+
+"Then you are bigger spoonies than I thought you were."
+
+"But we are afraid the ship will be gone before we can reach
+Christiania."
+
+"O, you are afraid of it."
+
+"Very much afraid of it."
+
+"You wouldn't cry if you found she had gone--would you?"
+
+"Well, perhaps we should not cry, for we think we ought to be manly,
+and not be babies; but, of course, we should feel very bad about it."
+
+"O, you would!"
+
+"Certainly we should; for if we were caught running away, staying
+away longer than is necessary, or anything of that sort, our liberty
+would be stopped, and we should not be allowed to go on shore with the
+rest of the fellows."
+
+"You are a deep one, Mr. Coxswain," added Clyde.
+
+"O, no! I'm only a simple-minded young man, that always strives to do
+his duty as well as he knows how."
+
+"I dare say you think it is your duty to visit
+the--what-ye-call-it?--the waterfall."
+
+"You see it is just as near to go that way as the other."
+
+"Is it?"
+
+"Well, if it isn't, we shall not know the fact till after we have been
+there."
+
+"I think I understand you perfectly, Mr. Coxswain; but I don't intend
+to return to the ship under any circumstances."
+
+"You can do as you please, but if we should happen to miss the ship,
+why, we shall be obliged to travel till we find her."
+
+"Exactly so," laughed Clyde.
+
+"But don't understand me that we mean to run away, or to keep away
+from the ship any longer than is absolutely necessary; for we are all
+good boys, and always mean to obey our officers."
+
+"I don't mean to do any such thing. After I hear that the ship has
+left Christiania, I shall go there, find my mother, and travel where I
+please."
+
+The next morning the party started on their journey, and by the middle
+of the afternoon arrived at a station between Lysthus and Tinoset,
+where the road to the Rjukanfos branched off from that to the
+capital. They were compelled to wait an hour here for a change of
+horses. Rogues rarely believe that they are suspected, and Sanford
+was confident that his companions, with the exception of Rodman and
+Stockwell, had no idea of his intentions. Burchmore had not failed to
+notice the repeated conferences between those who were plotting the
+mischief. He was not quite satisfied with the delay which had enabled
+the party to catch that solitary salmon at Apalstoe. He was one of the
+first to enter the station-house where the carioles stopped. On the
+table he found "The Hand-book of Norway," which contained a large map.
+He was anxious to possess this book.
+
+"_Hvor_?" said he, using a word he had learned of Ole, which meant
+"how much," at the same time holding up the book, and exhibiting his
+money.
+
+"_Tre_," replied the woman in the room; by which he understood her to
+mean three marks, for at the same time she laughingly held up three
+fingers.
+
+Burchmore paid the money, and put the book into his pocket. Retreating
+behind the stable with Churchill, who rode in the cariole with him, he
+produced the volume, and spread out the map. Without much difficulty
+he found the road by which the party had come. Everything was right so
+far, and he was satisfied that they should arrive at Kongsberg that
+night.
+
+"Can you make out what's up, Burchmore?" asked Churchill, with whom
+the former had discussed his doubts and fears.
+
+"No; everything is right. Here we are, at the branching off of these
+two roads," replied Burchmore, indicating the locality with the point
+of his knife.
+
+"But Sanford is up to something. He, and Ole, and Stockwell are
+whispering together half the time. Perhaps they mean to leave us
+somewhere on the road."
+
+"They can, if they like," added Burchmore. "I am cashier, you know.
+Each fellow has paid me seven pounds, which I have changed into
+species and marks. No other one has any Norwegian money, or, at least,
+not more than a specie or two. They won't leave me."
+
+"They wouldn't make anything by it."
+
+"And Sanford runs with that English fellow, who seems to be a little
+fast."
+
+"He's a hard one," added Churchill, shaking his head.
+
+"Let them go it; I can keep the run of them now," said Burchmore, as
+he folded up the map, and put the Hand-book in his pocket. "Don't say
+anything about this book, Churchy."
+
+"Not a word."
+
+"I know where we are now, and I think I shall know better than to wait
+a whole day for horses again. That was a sell."
+
+"Do you think so?"
+
+"I thought so at the time, but I didn't want to make a fuss. I changed
+a sovereign for Ole yesterday, and I believe Sanford has bought him
+up. Never mind; we take the right hand road here, and as long as we
+keep moving I haven't a word to say."
+
+In less than an hour the horses were ready, and the procession of
+carioles moved off. Ole and Sanford led the way, and turned to the
+left, instead of the right.
+
+"That's wrong," said Burchmore, very much excited.
+
+"But what do they mean by going this way?" added Churchill.
+
+"I don't know, and I don't care; I only know it is the wrong way.
+Hallo!" he shouted to Sanford, and stopped his pony, which compelled
+three others behind him to stop also.
+
+"What's the matter?" called Sanford.
+
+"You are going the wrong way," replied the cashier.
+
+"No, this is right; come along;" and the coxswain started his team
+again.
+
+But Burchmore refused to follow him, and continued to block the way
+against those behind him.
+
+"Out of the way!" cried Clyde, who was in the rear.
+
+"This is not the right way to Kongsberg," said Burchmore.
+
+"Out of the way, or I'll smash you!" added the imperious Briton.
+
+The cashier was a peaceable young gentleman, and turned his horse out
+of the road. The cariole of Sanford was now out of sight.
+
+"Why don't you go ahead?" demanded Tinckner. "How do you know it is
+the wrong road?"
+
+"I am certain of it. Those fellows are up to some trick."
+
+As a portion of the procession did not follow its leader, Sanford and
+his companions turned back.
+
+"What's the matter, Burchmore? Why don't you come along?" cried the
+coxswain, angrily.
+
+"This is not the right road."
+
+"Isn't it, Ole?" added the coxswain, turning to his companion in the
+cariole.
+
+"Certainly it is."
+
+"I know it isn't," protested the cashier, vehemently. "You are up to
+some trick."
+
+"What trick?" asked Sanford, mildly, as he put on his look of injured
+innocence.
+
+"I don't know what; but I know this is not the right road to
+Kongsberg."
+
+"Who said anything about Kongsberg? We intend to go by the shortest
+way. Don't we, Ole?"
+
+"To be sure we do," replied the ready waif. "We are not going way
+round by Kongsberg."
+
+"You can't bluff me."
+
+"Don't want to bluff you. Go whichever way you like; and the one who
+gets to Christiania first is the best fellow. That's all I have to
+say."
+
+Sanford turned his pony, and drove off again, followed by Clyde,
+Stockwell, and Rodman.
+
+"How do you know this isn't the right way?" inquired Tinckner.
+
+"I'll tell you," replied the cashier, jumping out of the cariole, and
+taking the Hand-book from his pocket.
+
+The others soon joined him, and exhibiting the map, he explained his
+position to his friends.
+
+"Here's another road to Kongsberg," said Summers, indicating its
+direction on the map. "They may be going that way."
+
+"It is possible," added Burchmore, puzzled by this discovery. "It is
+farther that way than by Lysthus."
+
+"Not much; there's hardly any difference. I'm in favor of following
+Sanford."
+
+So were nearly all of them, and the cashier finally yielded. The
+tourists resumed their seats, and soon overtook the coxswain, who
+had evidently expected to be followed. Burchmore was annoyed by the
+discovery he had made, but as the pony attached to the cariole slowly
+climbed the hills, he studied the map and the text of the book he had
+bought.
+
+"We can't go much farther on this tack," said he, as he folded up his
+map.
+
+"What's to prevent us from keeping on to the north pole?" asked
+Churchill.
+
+"It is almost night, in the first place, and in the second, we shall
+come to a lake in the course of an hour, where we must take boats."
+
+"I don't believe anything is wrong about the matter."
+
+"Don't you? Then what are we doing up here?"
+
+"Never mind; we shall soon come to that other road, and then we shall
+know whether Sanford means to go to Kongsberg or not."
+
+"He has stopped ahead of us. He is waiting for us to come up," added
+Burchmore.
+
+"Yes; and there is the road which turns off to the right."
+
+"Why don't he go ahead?"
+
+Sanford and those who had arrived with him left the carioles, and
+gathered at the junction of the two roads. Burchmore followed their
+example.
+
+"What's the matter? What are you stopping here for?" demanded Clyde
+Blacklock, rather imperiously.
+
+"Some of the fellows think we are going to play them a trick," said
+Sanford, with his sweet and innocent smile.
+
+"Who thinks so?" asked Clyde.
+
+"Burchmore."
+
+"Which is Burchmore?"
+
+"That's my name," replied the cashier, rather indifferently.
+
+"Are you the fellow that wants to break up the party?" blustered
+Clyde.
+
+"No, I'm not. I'm the fellow that wants to go to Christiania. We ought
+to have kept to the right at the last station."
+
+"I insist on going this way."
+
+"I don't object; you can go whichever way you please," added the
+cashier, very gently.
+
+"But we mean to keep the party together; and we might as well fight it
+out here as in any other place."
+
+Clyde threw off his overcoat, as though he intended to give a literal
+demonstration of his remark.
+
+"I don't consider you as one of the party," added Burchmore.
+
+"Don't you?"
+
+"No, I do not. You don't belong to our ship, and I don't pay your
+bills."
+
+"No matter for that. If you are not willing to go the way the rest of
+us wish to go, I'll pound you till you are willing."
+
+"No, no, Old England; we don't want anything of that sort. Burchmore
+is a first-rate fellow," interposed the politic Sanford.
+
+"You leave this fellow to me; I'll take care of him. I can whip him
+out of his boots."
+
+"I shall stick to my boots for the present," replied Burchmore, who
+did not seem to be intimidated by the sharp conduct of the Briton. "I
+am willing to listen to reason, but I shall not be bullied into
+anything."
+
+"What do you mean by bullied? Do you call me a bully?" foamed Clyde.
+
+"You can draw your own inferences."
+
+"Do you call me a bully?" demanded Clyde, doubling his fists, and
+walking up to the cashier.
+
+"Enough of this," said Sanford, stepping between the Briton and his
+intended victim. "We shall not allow anybody to lick Burchmore, for he
+is a good fellow, and always means right."
+
+"I don't allow any fellow to call me a bully," replied Clyde.
+
+"He didn't call you a bully. He only said he would not be bullied into
+anything."
+
+"It's the same thing."
+
+"No matter if it is, Old England. You volunteered to pound him if he
+wouldn't go with us; and it strikes me that this is something like
+bullying," added the coxswain, with a cheerful smile.
+
+"I shall thrash him for his impudence, at any rate."
+
+"It isn't exactly civil to tell a fellow you will pound him if he
+won't go with us; and who shall thrash you for your impudence, eh, Old
+England?"
+
+"I mean what I say."
+
+"We shall allow no fight on this question, my gentle Britisher. If you
+should happen to hit Burchmore, I have no doubt he would wallop you
+soundly for your impudence."
+
+"I should like to see him do it," cried Clyde, pulling off his coat,
+and throwing himself into the attitude of the pugilist.
+
+"No, you wouldn't, Albion; and if you would you can't have that
+pleasure. There will be no fight to-day."
+
+"Yes, there will," shouted Clyde.
+
+"Not much;" and Sanford, Rodman, and Stockwell placed themselves
+between Burchmore and Clyde.
+
+"Dry up, Great Britain!" added Wilde.
+
+"We have a point to settle here," continued Sanford, taking no further
+notice of the belligerent Briton. "The right hand road goes to
+Kongsberg; but there is no hotel in that direction where we could
+sleep to-night. I propose, therefore, that we go on to--what's the
+name of the place, Norway?"
+
+"Tinoset," replied Ole.
+
+"To Tinoset, where there is a big hotel."
+
+"How far is it?" asked Churchill.
+
+"Only two or three miles. Then to-morrow we can go on to Kongsberg,
+unless you prefer to go a better way. I'm always ready to do just what
+the rest of the fellows say," added Sanford.
+
+The matter was discussed in all its bearings, and even Burchmore
+thought it better to sleep at Tinoset.
+
+"All right," said Sanford, as he moved off towards his cariole.
+
+"Not yet," interposed Clyde, who still stood with his coat off. "I
+haven't settled my affair with this spoony."
+
+Burchmore and Churchill walked leisurely towards their vehicle, while
+Rodman and Stockwell covered the retreat.
+
+"If you thrash him, you thrash the whole of us, Great Britain," said
+Rodman.
+
+"What kind of a way is that?" demanded the disgusted Briton.
+
+"We won't have any fight over this matter," added Stockwell. "Jump in,
+and let us be off."
+
+"We'll settle it when we get to that place," replied Clyde, seeing
+that this opportunity was lost.
+
+The procession resumed its journey, and in half an hour arrived at
+Tinoset. As it was early in the season, the hotel was not crowded, as
+it sometimes is. The town is at the foot of Lake Tins, upon which the
+little steamer Rjukan made three trips a week each way. The boat was
+to depart the next morning for Ornaes, which is only a few miles from
+the Rjukanfos. Sanford declared that the most direct route to
+Christiania was by steamer through this lake, and then by cariole the
+rest of the journey. Ole, of course, backed up all he said, and most
+of the boys wished to go that way. For some reason or other, Burchmore
+kept still, though he did not assent to the coxswain's plan, and the
+question was still open when the tourists were called to supper.
+
+"Ole, I want to see you alone," said the cashier, after the meal was
+finished.
+
+"What for?" asked Ole.
+
+"I have some money for you."
+
+"For me?"
+
+"Come along."
+
+Burchmore led the way to the lake, where they found a retired place.
+
+"What money have you for me?" demanded the astonished Norwegian.
+
+"How much did Sanford give you for humbugging us?"
+
+"For what?"
+
+"For playing this trick on us?"
+
+"I don't know what you mean."
+
+"The coxswain gave you a sovereign for fooling us. I'll give you five
+species, which is more than a sovereign, if you do what I want."
+
+"I will," replied Ole, promptly.
+
+"In the first place, where are you taking us?"
+
+"To Christiania."
+
+"Nonsense!" exclaimed the cashier, producing his book. "I know all
+about it. You ought to have gone to Lysthus, instead of taking the
+left hand road. We are two Norwegian miles out of our way now. Sanford
+has paid you a sovereign to lead us to some place he wishes to visit.
+Where is it?"
+
+"I only do what's right," protested Ole.
+
+"Bah! I know better! The story that no horses could be had at Apalstoe
+was a humbug. I'll give you five species if you will do as I tell
+you."
+
+Ole looked complacent, and held out his hand for the money.
+
+"I don't pay till the work is done; but my word is as good as my
+bond."
+
+The waif had an "itching palm," and, after considerable discussion,
+the terms of payment were settled.
+
+"Now, where are we going?" asked the cashier.
+
+"To the Rjukanfos. It is a big waterfall, with high mountains--one of
+the finest places in Norway."
+
+"Exactly so; but we are not going there," added Burchmore, decidedly.
+"You will engage the carioles for to-morrow morning, and we must be in
+Kongsberg by noon, and near Christiania by night."
+
+"Sanford will kill me," replied Ole.
+
+"No, he won't; we will take care of him."
+
+"I can manage it, first rate. I will tell Sanford that we can go up
+quicker on the other side of the lake, and then cross over."
+
+"Tell him what you please, but my plan must be carried out," answered
+Burchmore, who, perhaps, believed that he should be justified in
+fighting the coxswain with his own weapons.
+
+"Here you are; I've been looking for you," said Clyde, presenting
+himself sooner than he was wanted. "You thought you would keep out of
+my way--did you?"
+
+"I have not given that subject any attention," replied Burchmore,
+coolly.
+
+"Yes, you have; you sneaked off here to keep out of my way."
+
+"As you please," replied Burchmore, who began to walk slowly towards
+the road.
+
+"You don't escape me this time," added Clyde, placing himself in front
+of the cashier.
+
+"I have no wish to escape you."
+
+"Yes, you have; you are a Yankee coward!"
+
+"Perhaps I am; but I'm not afraid of a British bully."
+
+"Do you call me a bully?"
+
+"Most distinctly I do, and I can prove my words."
+
+Clyde was rather startled by this exhibition of pluck, which he had
+not expected.
+
+"You call me a bully--do you?"
+
+"I do."
+
+"Then we'll settle it here. Off with your coat," blustered Clyde, as
+he divested himself.
+
+"I never fight if I can help it; but I always defend myself," replied
+Burchmore, resuming his walk towards the road.
+
+"Do you mean to run away?" demanded Clyde.
+
+"No; I mean to walk very leisurely back to the station-house."
+
+"No, you don't!" said the Briton, again placing himself before the
+cashier.
+
+Ole, who did not care, under the circumstances, to be seen with
+Burchmore by any one of the party, had disappeared by this time; but
+meeting Sanford near the lake, he had informed him what Clyde was
+doing. The coxswain hastened to the spot, with Stockwell and two or
+three others. But they were a little too late; for Clyde, feeling that
+he had gone too far to recede with honor, had struck Burchmore. When
+Sanford and the rest of the party reached the place, the belligerent
+Briton lay on the ground, where, after a sharp set-to and a black eye,
+he had been thrown by his cool opponent. He picked himself up, and was
+preparing for another onslaught, when the coxswain stepped between the
+combatants.
+
+"Enough of that, Albion," said he.
+
+Clyde made a rush towards Burchmore, but the others interfered, and
+held him back. In vain he struggled in his wrath, but the stout
+coxswain and his companions threw him upon the ground, and held him
+there till his anger had in a measure subsided.
+
+"Be off, Burchmore," said Sanford. "We will take care of him."
+
+"I am not afraid of him," replied the cashier.
+
+"Of course you are not; but clear out, and let us have peace."
+
+"He is afraid of me!" roared Clyde.
+
+"Nonsense, Great Britain! He would have mauled you to death if we
+hadn't interfered. He can whip his weight in wildcats."
+
+Burchmore walked away, and soon disappeared beyond the houses. Clyde
+foamed in his wrath for a while, but finally consented to be pacified,
+promising, very faithfully, to whip the cashier the next time he
+caught him alone.
+
+"Don't you do it, Albion. You never will see your mother again if you
+attempt it. Wait a few days, and then, if you insist upon it, we will
+let Burchmore thrash you all you want," replied Sanford, as they
+walked back to the station-house.
+
+Clyde had a bad-looking eye, and perhaps believed that he had had a
+narrow escape; but he still maintained his credit as a bully. At the
+hotel, the question of the route for the next day came up. Burchmore
+insisted upon going to Christiania by the way of Kongsberg, and
+Sanford, who had consulted Ole again, assented. The waif had assured
+him that they could reach the Rjukanfos quicker and better by the
+road than by the lake.
+
+The next morning the carioles were ready, and the tourists renewed
+their journey, and went back on the road by which they had come, till
+they came to that which led to Kongsberg. The "forbud" had been duly
+forwarded, and there were no delays or interruptions.
+
+"Where's the lake?" asked Sanford, when they had been riding about two
+hours.
+
+"O, the road don't go near the lake, till we get to the place where we
+cross," replied Ole, who was carrying out in good faith the
+arrangement he had made with the cashier.
+
+"How shall we cross the lake?"
+
+"In a steamer which goes at seven o'clock in the morning."
+
+"All right," replied the unsuspecting Sanford.
+
+"We shall come to a large town at noon; and we musn't stop a minute
+there, or those fellows will find where they are. We can tell them it
+is Kongsberg, you know," added the wily waif.
+
+"Just so," laughed Sanford; "we'll tell them it is Kongsberg, and they
+won't know the difference."
+
+"I don't think they will."
+
+At noon, agreeably to the promise of Ole, the travellers arrived at
+the large town, where they were obliged to change horses.
+
+"This is Kongsberg, Burchmore," said the coxswain.
+
+"Is it, really? or are you playing some trick upon us?" replied the
+cashier.
+
+"'Pon my word this is Kongsberg. Isn't it, Ole?"
+
+"Yes, certainly," answered the waif, winking slyly to Burchmore.
+
+"All right, Sanford; if you are satisfied, I am."
+
+"I know it is Kongsberg. I have been here before," added Clyde,
+wishing to give his testimony in carrying out the deception.
+
+It was quite true that he had been in Kongsberg, but Ole took care
+that he should not go to the part of the town he had visited before.
+The road looked familiar to him; but as he rode alone, he had no
+opportunity to state the fact to others. Before night the party
+arrived at Drammen, where a regular line of steamers runs to
+Christiania.
+
+"That's the lake--is it?" said Sanford, pointing to the Drammen River,
+which, below the town, is nearly two miles wide.
+
+"That's it."
+
+"What does Burchmore say? Does he know where he is?"
+
+"Not yet; I shall tell him this is Drammen, and he will believe me."
+
+"Good! and we will all stick to it that this is Drammen," added
+Sanford.
+
+"But suppose we should meet some one here who knows about the ship?
+This is a large town--bigger than that other which we called
+Kongsberg."
+
+"Whom can we meet?"
+
+"I don't know."
+
+"I should hate to have any one tell the principal that we have been to
+the Rjukanfos."
+
+"Some of the officers may come up here."
+
+"We must keep out of sight, then."
+
+Others thought this would be good policy in a large town. As they were
+fatigued, they retired early, and did not come down the next morning
+till it was nearly time to leave in the steamer. They all went on
+board, and were soon moving down the river.
+
+"Are we going across the lake, Ole?" asked Sanford.
+
+"This is a kind of arm of the lake, about a dozen miles long. We shall
+come to the lake in a couple of hours," replied the waif.
+
+"All right; but it must be a very large lake."
+
+"The biggest in Norway."
+
+In a couple of hours the steamer arrived at Holmsbo, on the
+Christiania Fjord.
+
+"Now you can see that this is a large lake," said Ole.
+
+"But where are we?" demanded Burchmore. "Is this the way to
+Christiania?"
+
+"Certainly it is," replied Sanford, who did not yet recognize the
+fjord, though the truth could not be much longer concealed. "Don't you
+know this water?"
+
+"No, I don't."
+
+"This is Christiania Fjord."
+
+"Is it, really?"
+
+"Yes, it is; you can bet your life upon it."
+
+"I am satisfied then."
+
+In another hour the steamer was fairly in the fjord; Sanford and
+Stockwell began to rub their eyes; for the scenery looked strangely
+familiar, though they could not fully identify anything.
+
+"What place is that ahead?" asked Sanford. "I am almost sure I have
+seen it before."
+
+"So am I," replied Stockwell.
+
+"That place?" added the cashier.
+
+"Yes; what is it?"
+
+"If this is Christiania Fjord, that must be Droebak. I have a map
+here," said Burchmore, producing his book, and displaying the map.
+"Here we are; there's Holmsbo, and this must be Droebak."
+
+"I don't understand it," replied the perplexed coxswain.
+
+"Don't you? Why, I think it is as clear as mud," laughed Burchmore.
+"We shall be in Christiania in a couple of hours. I thought you were
+playing some trick upon us, Sanford; but I see now that you were all
+right. There's the captain; he speaks English."
+
+"What town is that, captain?" asked the coxswain.
+
+"Droebak; we shall be in Christiania in about two hours," answered the
+master.
+
+"Where's Ole?" demanded the coxswain, much excited.
+
+"What does it mean?" said Clyde.
+
+"I don't know. Where's Ole?"
+
+The waif evidently considered discretion the better part of valor, for
+he could not be found; and the coxswain and those in his confidence
+realized that they had been "sold" in their own coin.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+THE BOATSWAIN AND THE BRITON.
+
+
+"Where's Ole? I don't understand it," repeated Sanford, after he had
+made another ineffectual search for the missing waif.
+
+"We have been sold, instead of selling those fellows," added
+Stockwell.
+
+"That's so; and I should rather like to know how it was done. Ole has
+sold us out."
+
+"Is this your Rjukanfos?" demanded Clyde Blacklock, who had been
+looking for some one upon whom to pour out his wrath.
+
+"Not exactly," answered Sanford, indifferently, for he did not
+particularly enjoy the airs of the Briton.
+
+"But what do you mean by bringing me here?" added Clyde.
+
+"I didn't bring you here. You came of your own free will and accord."
+
+"No, I didn't; you said we were going to the waterfall."
+
+"We thought so ourselves; but we have been deceived. Ole has sold out
+and made fools of us. You are no worse off than the rest of us."
+
+"To whom did he sell out?" asked Clyde, appeased when he learned that
+he was not the only sufferer.
+
+"I don't know. I don't understand it at all. We have been cheated out
+of the Rjukanfos, and brought to Christiania."
+
+"Well, what are you going to do about it?" inquired Stockwell.
+
+"We can't do anything about it. I suppose we shall be on board of the
+ship in an hour or two, telling the principal how hard we tried to be
+here before."
+
+"But I'm not going back to Christiania," protested Clyde.
+
+"I don't see how you can help yourself. This boat don't stop again
+till she arrives there."
+
+"I will not go to the ship again, at any rate," added Clyde.
+
+"Do as you like about that; it isn't our business."
+
+Clyde was much disturbed by the situation. As he always regarded
+himself as the central figure of the group, he began to suspect that
+the apparent miscarriage of the plan was a trick to lure him back to
+the ship; but Sanford seemed to be honest, and to be entirely
+discomfited by the discovery. Burchmore and Churchill were highly
+elated at the success attending their scheme, which had, indeed,
+exceeded their expectations; but they were as much mystified by the
+disappearance of Ole as the victims of the trick. Being unable to
+speak the language, they could not inquire for the absentee; but they
+made a very diligent search for him. They were more successful than
+Sanford's party had been, for, in going forward, they heard some high
+words in the quarters of the steamer's crew, in the forecastle.
+Listening for a moment, they heard the voice of Ole, who appeared to
+have concealed himself in that part of the vessel, and was properly
+regarded as an intruder by the rightful occupants thereof.
+
+"Come out here, Ole," shouted Burchmore. "We want you."
+
+Ole turned from the Norwegian sailors, who were scolding at him for
+taking possession of their quarters, to his friends and allies.
+
+"Where's Sanford?" he asked, rather timidly.
+
+"On deck."
+
+"He'll kill me."
+
+"Nonsense! We will take care of you against any odds," said the
+cashier, laughing heartily at the fears of the waif. "They have only
+just ascertained where they are. Come up, Ole."
+
+Thus assured, the young Norwegian climbed up the ladder, much to the
+satisfaction of the sailors. Burchmore was too well pleased with the
+trick he had played upon the conspirators to confine the knowledge of
+it to Churchill and himself, and had explained it to all who were not
+actually in the confidence of the coxswain. A majority of the party
+were thus arrayed on his side, though two or three of them would as
+readily have chosen the other side. The cashier was evidently the
+safer leader.
+
+"Sanford and that Englishman will pound me for the trick," repeated
+Ole, as he glanced at the quarter-deck, where his victims were
+considering the situation.
+
+"No, they won't; we are able and willing to protect you," replied
+Burchmore. "Come, we will go aft, and hear what they have to say."
+
+The cashier led the way, and the waif reluctantly followed him.
+
+"I believe you wanted to see Ole," said Burchmore, who could hardly
+look sober, he was so pleased with the result of his operations.
+
+"Yes; I did wish to see him," answered Sanford, rather coldly. "I will
+see him some other time."
+
+"O, I thought you wanted him now," laughed Burchmore. "I am satisfied
+that this is really Christiania Fjord."
+
+"So am I," added the coxswain, with a sickly smile.
+
+"And you were quite right, too, in saying that large place was
+Drammen," chuckled Burchmore.
+
+"Certainly I was."
+
+"Neither were you mistaken in regard to Kongsberg."
+
+"I find that I was not."
+
+"I suppose you remember the Irishman's turtle, that swallowed his own
+head, Sanford?"
+
+"Of course."
+
+"I don't mean to say that you swallowed your own head; but you found
+it just where you didn't expect to find it. Isn't that so?"
+
+"We are going to talk the matter over with Ole by and by."
+
+"Do it now. I know all about it. You and Ole arranged the first part
+of our journey, including the day's fishing we had at Apalstoe; and Ole
+and I arranged the last part of it. It is an even thing now, and if
+you won't complain of the last part, I won't say a word about the
+first."
+
+"I don't understand it."
+
+"Don't you! Well, you gave Ole a sovereign to arrange things for you
+in the beginning, and I gave him five species to arrange them for me
+afterwards. You can't complain of a fellow, who sells himself at all,
+for making as much money as he can. Ole only did that."
+
+"He sold us out," growled Sanford.
+
+"Of course he did; if you buy a man, you mustn't grumble when he does
+a second time what you encouraged him to do in the first instance. But
+you were going to take us off to the Rjukanfos, fifty or sixty miles
+out of our way, without our knowledge or consent. I smelt a mice, and
+turned the tables," laughed the cashier.
+
+"Yes, and you cheated me," interposed Clyde.
+
+"I had nothing whatever to do with you," answered Burchmore, mildly.
+
+"You led me here when I wanted to go another way."
+
+"You went where you pleased, so far as I was concerned. I never
+invited you to come with me, or even consented to your doing so."
+
+"Did you say the place we came to yesterday was Kongsberg?"
+
+"I did, and so it was. But I think it was Sanford who first proclaimed
+the fact, and I cheerfully assented to its correctness," chuckled
+Burchmore.
+
+"But you deceived me, and I'll have it out with you," continued Clyde.
+
+"Just as you please about that; but you had better let that black eye
+bleach out before you begin again."
+
+"I can whip you!" blustered Clyde. "I'll meet you anywhere."
+
+"No, I thank you. If we meet for any such purpose as you suggest, it
+will be by accident."
+
+"See here, Great Britain; you needn't make another row," said Sanford.
+
+"I'm going to whip this fellow for what he has done, and for calling
+me a bully."
+
+"You are a bully," added Sanford.
+
+"That's so," exclaimed Stockwell.
+
+"Now you can lick the whole of us, if you insist upon it," continued
+the coxswain.
+
+"Perhaps I will," retorted Clyde, shaking his head fiercely. "You have
+got me into a pretty scrape."
+
+"You are in the same boat as the rest of us."
+
+"The squadron isn't here," shouted Wilde; for the steamer had by this
+time arrived within sight of the harbor.
+
+"Can the ship have sailed?" asked Sanford, after the party had
+satisfied themselves that not one of the vessels of the little fleet
+was there.
+
+"I suppose she has," replied Burchmore. "To-day is Friday, and she
+didn't intend to lie here all summer."
+
+"Good!" exclaimed Clyde. "That makes everything all right for me. I'm
+satisfied now."
+
+Indeed, he was so delighted with the discovery that the ship had
+sailed, as to be even willing to forego the pleasure of thrashing his
+companions. The steamer went up to the wharf, and the party landed.
+Sanford and his friends appeared to be willing to take a reasonable
+view of the situation, and to accept it without grumbling, satisfied
+that they had been beaten with their own weapons. They were not sorry
+that the squadron had departed, for this circumstance gave them a new
+respite from the discipline of the ship, and enabled them to prolong
+"the trip without running away."
+
+"What are you going to do now?" asked Clyde, as they landed.
+
+"We shall follow the ship, and try to join her," replied Sanford.
+"That's what we've been trying to do ever since we left
+Christiansand--isn't it, Burchmore?"
+
+"Certainly it is," replied the cashier; "though we were detained one
+day at Apalstoe, and narrowly escaped being carried by accident to the
+Rjukanfos."
+
+"Are you going to blow upon us, Burch?" demanded Stockwell, warmly.
+
+"Am I? Did you ever know me to do such a thing?" added Burchmore,
+earnestly.
+
+"No! no!" replied the whole party.
+
+"I don't think it was just the thing to cheat some of us as you did;
+but I believe we are about even on that now."
+
+"Of course we all want to get back to the ship as soon as possible,"
+added Sanford, rubbing his chin, significantly.
+
+"Certainly. She has gone to Gottenburg, and all we have to do is to
+follow her," said Churchill.
+
+"But if you want to go there by the way of the Cape of Good Hope,
+Sanford, it will be better to have the matter understood so in the
+beginning," added Burchmore. "I, for one, don't like to be
+bamboozled."
+
+"I won't try it on again," said Sanford.
+
+"All right, then; if you do, you may fetch up at Cape Horn."
+
+"Where shall we go now?" asked Sanford.
+
+"To the Victoria Hotel. It is the best in the place," replied Clyde.
+
+"That's the very reason why we don't want to go there. We are not made
+of money, and we may run out before we are able, with our utmost
+exertions, to reach the ship," added the cashier.
+
+"But my mother is there," continued Clyde.
+
+"Go to your mother, Great Britain, if you like. We shall stay at some
+cheap hotel," added Sanford.
+
+Clyde protested in vain against this arrangement, and the Americans,
+with the aid of Ole, found a small hotel, suited to their views of
+economy. The Briton went with them; but when they were installed in
+their new quarters, he left them to find his mother, at the Victoria.
+After dinner, the coxswain and his party wandered all over the city.
+At the Castle of Agerhaus, they saw an English steamer receiving
+freight. They ascertained that she was bound to Gottenburg, and would
+sail at seven o'clock that evening. They immediately decided, as
+they had seen enough of Christiania, to take passage in her. The
+arrangement was speedily made, and they went on board, without
+troubling themselves to inform Clyde of what they intended to do. When
+the sun went down that evening the party were far down the fjord.
+
+Sanford had ascertained that the ship sailed early on Thursday
+morning, and the steamer on which they had taken passage could not
+arrive at Gottenburg till nearly noon on Saturday. It was understood
+that the squadron would remain but a short time at this port, and it
+was possible that it would have departed for Copenhagen before the
+steamer arrived. He hoped this would prove to be the case; but he
+studied a plan by which the excursion of the party could be prolonged,
+if the hope should not be realized. He did not wish to return to the
+ship, because he thought it was pleasanter to travel without the
+restraints of discipline. Perhaps most of his party sympathized with
+him, and thought they could have a better time by themselves. Sanford
+desired to inform Clyde of the intention of the party to leave in the
+English steamer, and to take him along with them; but his companions
+overruled him unanimously, for they were too glad to get rid of an
+impudent, overbearing, and conceited puppy, as he had proved himself
+to be. The coxswain had no better opinion of him than his friends; but
+as Clyde was a runaway, according to his own confession, it might
+smooth their own way, in returning to their duty, if they could
+deliver him up to the principal. He was even willing to resort to
+strategy to accomplish this end; but Clyde was so disagreeable that he
+was saved from this trap.
+
+The ship had gone, and every vessel of the squadron had departed with
+her. Clyde felt that all his trials were ended, and he had nothing
+more to fear from the big boatswain. He walked confidently to the
+Victoria Hotel, where he was sure to find his mother. He had even
+arranged in his mind the reproaches with which he intended to greet
+her for delivering him over to the savage discipline of the Young
+America, as he regarded it, and as, doubtless, it was for evil-doers.
+He passed into the passage-way which led to the court-yard. As he
+entered the office on the right to inquire for Mrs. Blacklock, he
+encountered Peaks, who no sooner saw him than he laid violent hands
+upon him.
+
+"Let me alone!" shouted Clyde, struggling to escape from the grasp of
+his powerful antagonist.
+
+"Not yet, my beauty," replied the boatswain, as he dragged his victim
+into his own room, which was near the office. "I've been looking for
+you."
+
+"I want to see my mother," growled Clyde, when he had exhausted his
+strength in the fruitless struggle to escape.
+
+"I dare say you do; babies always want to see their mothers."
+
+"I'm not a baby."
+
+"Then behave like a man."
+
+Peaks deposited him on a chair, and permitted him to recover his
+breath.
+
+"Where is my mother?" demanded Clyde.
+
+"She is safe and well, and you needn't bother your head to know
+anything more about her," answered Peaks. "She has turned over a new
+leaf, so far as you are concerned, youngster, and is going to have us
+make a man of you."
+
+"Where is she?"
+
+"No matter where she is."
+
+"Can't I see her?"
+
+"No, sir."
+
+"I must see her."
+
+"Perhaps you must, my hearty; but I don't think she wants to see you
+till you are a decent young gentleman. She told me to be sure and put
+you on board of the ship, and I'm going to do it."
+
+"Where is the ship?"
+
+"She sailed for Gottenburg yesterday morning; but we shall find her in
+good time," replied Peaks, taking a bundle from the bureau, which
+contained the young Briton's uniform. "Now, my bantam, you don't look
+like a gentleman in that rig you've got on. Here's your gear; put it
+on, and look like a man again, whether you are one or not. Those long
+togs don't become you."
+
+The boatswain unfolded the uniform of Clyde, which he had left in his
+chamber when he leaped out of the window.
+
+"I'm not going to put on those clothes," protested the unhappy youth.
+
+"No?"
+
+"I'm not!"
+
+"Then I'm going to put them on for you."
+
+"I'll cry murder."
+
+"If you cry anything, I shall put a dirty handkerchief in your mouth.
+Look here, my chicken; don't you know that you are making a fool of
+yourself? You mean to strain your own timbers for nothing. You'll put
+this rig on anyhow, and it depends on yourself whether you will do it
+with or without a broken head."
+
+Clyde looked at the clothes and then at the brawny boatswain. It was
+foolish to resist, and he yielded to the force of circumstances. He
+put on the ship's uniform, and threw himself into a chair to await the
+further pleasure of his tyrant.
+
+"Now you look like a respectable young gentleman, my lad," said Peaks.
+
+"What are you going to do with me?" demanded Clyde, in a surly tone.
+
+"I'm going to keep my eye on you every moment of the time till you are
+on board of the ship again."
+
+"I want to see my mother before I go."
+
+"It can't be done."
+
+Clyde relapsed into silence. He had never before been subjected to
+such unheard-of tyranny. It was useless to resist, and the future
+looked as dark as the present. Probably his mother was in the hotel,
+but he was not permitted even to see her. Though the boatswain seemed
+to have it all his own way, he was not at all satisfied with the
+situation. Mrs. Blacklock and her daughter had gone to ride, but in
+the course of an hour or two they would return. The waiters would
+inform her that Clyde had arrived, and she would insist on seeing him.
+Though she had fully given up the control of him to the ship, the
+weakness of the mother might induce her to change her mind. Peaks only
+desired to discharge the duty with which he had been intrusted. The
+crew of the second cutter had not yet arrived, and he could not depart
+with his prisoner before they came. He was perplexed; but being a man
+of expedients, he decided upon his course in a short time. It was
+absolutely necessary to seek another hotel, where the dangerous
+proximity of Mrs. Blacklock might be avoided. The boatswain rang his
+bell, and sent for the _commissionnaire_ whom he had employed while
+prosecuting his search for the runaway. When this man came, he ordered
+a carriage, and paid his bill.
+
+"Now, youngster, we are going to take a ride," said Peaks to his
+victim.
+
+"Where are you going?"
+
+"That's my affair. If you make a row in the street, I shall just hand
+you over to the police, who will lock you up in that stone castle over
+there. You must understand that you are a deserter from your ship, and
+will be treated so, if you don't behave like a man. Now come with me."
+
+As a deserter from his ship! The boatswain certainly had the
+weather-gage of him, and the idea of being thrown into prison was
+absolutely startling to Clyde. He had no doubt the savage boatswain
+would do all he threatened, and, almost for the first time in his
+life, he felt no inclination to bully. He stepped quietly into the
+carriage with Peaks and the _commissionnaire_. The driver was directed
+to convey the party to the landing-place. The steamer would sail the
+next morning; but unless the absent crew of the cutter arrived before
+that time, he could not go in her. Remaining in Christiania, he feared
+to encounter Mrs. Blacklock, for the honest tar dreaded a lady's power
+more than the whole battery of a ship of the line. He was fully
+resolved, if he passed through fire and water in doing it, to
+discharge the duty intrusted to him by the principal. The lady was in
+the city, and the problem was to keep his charge out of sight of her
+during the rest of his stay. He might meet her; some one at the hotel
+might, and probably would, inform her of the arrival of Clyde.
+
+After deliberating for some time, he directed his _commissionnaire_ to
+procure a boat, in which he embarked with his prisoner and
+interpreter. By his order the two oarsmen pulled over to the hotel
+which was located so picturesquely on the island. Taking a room, he
+ordered dinner for his little party, and contrived to pass away the
+afternoon till sunset, when he returned to the city. His man, at his
+request, conducted him to an obscure hotel, which happened to be the
+one which Sanford and his friends had just left, to depart by the
+English steamer. The landlord recognized the uniform which Clyde wore.
+
+"We had more of the young gentleman here," said he, in broken English.
+
+"More of them!" exclaimed Peaks, interested in the intelligence.
+
+"Yes; more as ten of them," added the landlord.
+
+"Arn't they here now?" asked Clyde, who had felt a ray of hope when
+Peaks brought him to the hotel where he had left his late companions.
+
+"All gone; no more here."
+
+"Where have they gone?" asked the boatswain.
+
+"To Gottenburg. They eat some dinner in my hotel, and at seven o'clock
+they go in the steamer."
+
+"I saw that steamer go out, but I didn't think the cutter's crew were
+in her. I'm sorry I didn't know it before," said Peaks, chagrined by
+this tardy discovery. "How many were there of them?"
+
+"Ten."
+
+"That couldn't be; there were only nine of the crew."
+
+"There was more as ten, but one of them went away."
+
+"I went away," said Clyde.
+
+"You! Were you with them?" demanded Peaks.
+
+"I was."
+
+"Why didn't you say so before?"
+
+"You didn't ask me; and as you were not remarkably civil to me, I
+didn't feel obliged to tell you the news."
+
+"But there were not ten of them."
+
+"Yes, ten," said Clyde.
+
+"There were only nine when they left the ship."
+
+"I know there were ten with me. One of them was a Norwegian, and a
+rascal; but he wore the same uniform as the rest of them."
+
+"What was his name?"
+
+"Ole."
+
+"Ole! Why, he's the fellow we picked up out at sea," exclaimed the
+astonished boatswain. "Where have they been all this time?"
+
+But Clyde suddenly bethought himself that he was altogether too
+communicative, considering the relations that subsisted between
+himself and his great enemy and persecutor, and he decided to answer
+no more questions.
+
+"All right, my hearty," laughed the boatswain, when the Briton
+declined to answer. "They are on their way to the ship, and you will
+be very soon."
+
+Peaks was cunning enough to detain his interpreter so that he should
+not return to the Victoria and inform Mrs. Blacklock where her son
+was. The way was clear now, for he had no further responsibility in
+regard to the cutter's crew, and his spirits rose accordingly. He sent
+his man to engage a "huette," or state-room, in the steamer, and then,
+at a late hour in the evening, paid and discharged him. He compelled
+Clyde to sleep in the same chamber with him, for it contained three
+beds, and it is probable that the boatswain kept one eye open during
+the night, for every time the prisoner moved, his tyrant was on his
+feet. The Kronprindsesse Louise sailed at six o'clock in the morning,
+and Peaks and his victim were betimes on board. The boatswain was a
+happy man when the boat was clear of the wharf, and on her way to
+Gottenburg. He flattered himself that he had managed the affair very
+well indeed, for he was not above the vanities of the flesh.
+
+It was midnight when the Kronprindsesse arrived at her destination.
+Peaks had kept one eye on Clyde all the time, and brought him in
+safety to his journey's end. Late as was the hour, the first person he
+saw at the landing was Mr. Blaine, the chief steward of the ship.
+
+"I'm glad to see you, Blaine," shouted the boatswain when he
+identified his shipmate, and grasped his hand. "Shiver my timbers if
+I'm not rejoiced to see a man that speaks plain English! Where's the
+ship?"
+
+"She sailed for Copenhagen this evening."
+
+"No; you don't say so!"
+
+"It's a fact. The students went up the canal as far as the falls, and
+returned about dark. The squadron got under way at once. I suppose you
+have the cutter's crew with you, Peaks?"
+
+"No; arn't they on board yet?"
+
+"I haven't seen them."
+
+"But they came down on an English steamer that left Christiania last
+night."
+
+"An English steamer came in this forenoon, but we haven't seen the
+cutter's crew."
+
+"That's strange. I shouldn't wonder if those fellows were cutting up a
+little."
+
+"But we lost two students yesterday, Scott and Laybold. I suppose they
+ran away."
+
+"There's a screw loose somewhere. These boys have too much money,"
+added Peaks. "But what are you going to do, and what am I to do?"
+
+"I was left here to look out for Scott and Laybold, and meet you when
+you came. Now, it seems that about a dozen of the rascals are
+missing."
+
+"I have the Briton here."
+
+"If I were you, Peaks, I should go right on to Copenhagen in this
+steamer, and you can report the facts to the principal."
+
+The boatswain decided to do this, while the head steward remained to
+search for the absentees; and in due time Peaks delivered his prisoner
+on board of the ship in the harbor of Copenhagen.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+THE MEETING OF THE ABSENTEES.
+
+
+Scott and Laybold, after imbibing a single glass of "finkel" each,
+which proved to be more than they could carry, retreated into a narrow
+lane, to escape the observation of a party of officers who were on
+their way to the landing. Neither of them had any inclination for
+intoxicating drinks, and had taken the stuff without knowing what it
+was. But they were conscious that everything was not right with them.
+They found it quite impossible to walk in a straight line, and even
+the problem of standing up was not demonstrated to the entire
+satisfaction of either of them. Talking was not without its
+difficulties, for their tongues seemed to be double their ordinary
+thickness, and their lips and other organs of speech were not as
+manageable as usual. For a time the effects of the potent liquor
+increased upon them, and as they had taken it in a hungry condition,
+they realized its full power.
+
+They staggered up the lane, conscious that they were making a
+ridiculous figure, though the solemn Swedes hardly smiled as they
+observed the effects of the national beverage. They dreaded an
+encounter with any of the officers, or others connected with the
+squadron; but in this unfrequented lane they were not likely to meet
+any of their shipmates. As there is more power in four legs than in
+two, however weak in detail they may be, the tipsy students locked
+arms, and leaned on each other, one attempting to counteract the
+obliquities of the other. They wandered along without knowing whither
+they were going, till they came to a small public house, which had a
+bench in front of it for the accommodation of the topers who
+frequented the bar-room. By mutual consent, and without argument, the
+unfortunate couple aimed for this seat as soon as they saw it, for it
+promised a grateful respite from the perils of locomotion. The
+"finkel" was now doing its utmost upon them. Their heads were dizzy,
+and everything was wofully uncertain; still they knew what they were
+about, and had sense enough left to dread the consequences of their
+indiscretion. After they had seated themselves, they glanced at each
+other, as if to ascertain the condition one of the other.
+
+"Lay--bold," said Scott.
+
+"Well, old fellow," replied the other, with a desperate attempt to
+stiffen his muscles.
+
+"We're zrunk," added Scott, trying to laugh.
+
+"I know that."
+
+"We're very zrunk."
+
+"I'm not zbad zyou."
+
+"I don't zknow."
+
+The conversation extended no further then, for speech required an
+effort they were incapable of making. Scott gaped violently, and
+seemed to be sick; but his contortions ended in his falling asleep,
+with his head tipped back against the wall. Laybold, more nice in the
+disposition of his helpless body, stretched himself on the bench, and
+was soon lost to all consciousness of the outer world. The publican
+who kept the house came out and looked at the juvenile tipplers.
+Doubtless he had seen too many drunken sailors to misapprehend their
+condition. He understood the matter perfectly, and being a thrifty
+Swede, he was disposed to turn their condition to his own emolument.
+He had sundry vacant chambers in his hotel, whose revenues swelled the
+sum total of his annual profits, and it hurt his feelings to have them
+remain unoccupied. Besides, the air was chilly, and the young
+strangers might take cold, and contract a severe illness by such
+exposure. But whether he was a publican or a Samaritan in his
+intentions, he decided to remove the strangers to the rooms beneath
+his hospitable roof. Summoning the porter to his aid, they jointly
+bore Laybold to his apartment, and laid him on the bed, which, in
+spite of the low character of the house, was a model of Swedish
+neatness. When Scott's turn came, he offered some resistance to the
+good intentions of the publican; but his head was too thoroughly
+muddled for successful opposition. Between the effects of sleep and
+"finkel" he could not obtain a very clear idea of what was going on.
+He was placed on another bed in the room with his shipmate. They were
+both comfortably disposed on their clean couches, the pillows nicely
+adjusted beneath their heads, and their bodies covered with blankets.
+
+The two students were very tired as well as very tipsy, and their
+slumbers were deep and heavy. It was after nine o'clock, though it was
+still light in the chamber, and the young tars usually retired, when
+not on watch, before this seemly hour. "Finkel" and fatigue did the
+rest, and they slept, without rocking, till long after the early sun
+broke into the windows of their apartment. We have seen the effect of
+"finkel" upon one unaccustomed to the use of liquor, and upon boys of
+fifteen or sixteen it could not but be entirely overpowering. It is a
+dangerous fluid, and is taken by the Swedes at all times, being the
+first thing at meals, and especially at the inevitable "snack" that
+precedes a regular dinner. There is, doubtless, good ground for the
+fear which has been expressed that the people of Sweden are in danger
+of becoming "a nation of drunkards."
+
+Scott was the first to open his eyes and come to his senses. He raised
+himself in the bed, shook off the blanket, and then jumped out upon
+the floor. He did not comprehend the situation, and was unable, in his
+own words, to "figure up how he happened to be in that room."
+
+"Laybold, ahoy!" shouted he, after he had examined the apartment, and
+mentally confessed his inability to solve the problem. "Laybold! All
+hands on deck!"
+
+"What is the matter?" cried Laybold, springing up, only half awake.
+
+"I'll be muzzled if I know what the matter is, but I believe that the
+Norway god--what's his name?--Odin, came aboard the ship last night,
+and turned her into a country tavern," replied Scott, going to the
+window, and looking down into the lane below.
+
+"How came we here?" asked Laybold, rubbing his eyes.
+
+"That's more than I know; but I think we have been transplanted by the
+spirits."
+
+"The spirits?" gaped Laybold.
+
+"Yes; I believe they call them 'finkel.' We were tight last night, my
+boy."
+
+"I remember all about it now. I dreamed that somebody lugged me in
+here."
+
+"You didn't exactly dream it, for here we are. We are in a pretty
+scrape."
+
+"That's so," added Laybold, shaking his head. "We didn't mean to run
+away, but that's just what we have done."
+
+"We didn't run a great way; for, if I remember rightly, running wasn't
+our _forte_ last evening. Who runs may reel, if he can't read, and I
+reckon we did more reeling than running. But what's to be done?"
+
+"I don't know."
+
+"In the first place, where are we? It's no use to lay out a course
+till we know the ship's position."
+
+They were utterly unable to determine this question. Each of them had
+a tolerably vivid recollection of their unfortunate condition on the
+preceding evening, and even that he had been carried by a couple of
+men; but they had no idea of time or locality. They washed themselves
+at the sink in the room, combed their hair with their pocket-combs,
+and looked then as though nothing had happened. Their heads were a
+little light, but they did not absolutely ache, and they realized but
+a small portion of the after effects of a regular "spree." Having made
+their simple toilet, they decided to explore the premises, and make
+their way back to the ship. Leaving the chamber, they descended a
+flight of steps, and, in the hall below, encountered the Samaritan
+landlord.
+
+"_God morgon_," said the latter, with a jolly smile on his face; and
+it was probable that he had taken his morning dose of "finkel." "_Hur
+star det till?_" (How are you?)
+
+"Nix," replied Scott, shrugging his shoulders.
+
+"You are English," added the landlord, a large portion of whose
+customers were foreign sailors.
+
+"No; Americans."
+
+"I'm glad to see you."
+
+"I'm glad to see you, too, if you can tell us how we happen to be
+here."
+
+"Too much 'finkel,'" laughed the publican, as he proceeded to explain
+the situation, and to enlarge upon the fatherly interest which had
+induced him to take them in for the night.
+
+"All right, my hearty. I see you can keep a hotel," added Scott. "How
+much have we to pay?"
+
+"Two rigsdalers; but you want some breakfast."
+
+"I do, for one," replied Scott.
+
+"So do I," said Laybold. "We only had a little lunch last night, and
+that 'finkel' spoiled my appetite--or the fish spawn. I don't know
+which."
+
+About five o'clock they sat down to breakfast, which consisted of a
+great variety of little things, such as the small fishes, herrings,
+smoked salmon, sausages. The coffee was magnificent, as it generally
+is in Sweden, even on board of steamers, where, in our own country, it
+is least expected to be good.
+
+"What is this?" said Scott, taking up half a great brown biscuit.
+
+"That's Swedish bread. We bake it once in six months," replied the
+landlord.
+
+"Not bad," added Scott, as he tasted the article.
+
+"This is Graham bread, I suppose," said Laybold, as he took a slice of
+the coarse brown bread. "Bah! it's sour."
+
+It always is; and both the students rejected it, though they ate a
+hearty meal of white bread, herring, salmon, and sausage.
+
+"Now, how much?" asked Scott, when they were ready to go.
+
+"One rigsdaler and fifty oere each--three rigsdalers in all."
+
+"Cheap enough," said Scott. "Two lodgings and two breakfasts for
+eighty-one cents."
+
+The students walked through the lane in which they had made their
+devious way the night before, to the main street on the canal. At the
+landing-place there were no boats belonging to the squadron, and
+everything looked exceedingly quiet on board of the ship. Seating
+themselves on the pier, with their legs hanging over the water, they
+decided to wait till a boat came to the shore.
+
+"We shall catch it for this," said Laybold.
+
+"No more liberty for a month at least," said Scott, shrugging his
+shoulders after his fashion.
+
+"I don't think it's fair. We didn't mean to get drunk, and didn't know
+what 'finkel' was," added Laybold. "I don't half like to go on board
+again."
+
+"Nor I; but I suppose we must face the music," answered Scott,
+dubiously. "I'm glad we didn't go on board while we were boozy. The
+fellows would have laughed at us for a year, if we had."
+
+"That's so; and Lowington would have put us in the brig."
+
+"I don't exactly like to explain the reason why we didn't go on board
+last night; I always was a bashful fellow."
+
+"You didn't go with the others," said a man, coming up to them at this
+moment, and speaking in broken English.
+
+"What others? Where?" replied Scott.
+
+"The other students. They took the steamer up the canal at two o'clock
+this morning."
+
+"Whew!" whistled Scott. "We have lost Goeta Canal and the falls."
+
+"They will return to-night by the railroad from Wenersberg," added the
+man, who was an agent of the canal steamers.
+
+"That's too bad!" exclaimed Laybold, as the man walked away.
+
+"I don't know that it is too bad. Our leave would have been stopped if
+we had gone on board," laughed Scott, who generally took the most
+cheerful view of any disagreeable subject. "Why can't we go on our own
+hook?"
+
+"I like that idea," added Laybold.
+
+But inquiring of the agent, they learned that the canal steamers left
+only at two o'clock in the morning.
+
+"There's a railroad, or the fellows couldn't come back that way,"
+suggested Laybold.
+
+"That's so; you have more wisdom than a Duxbury clam."
+
+They ascertained that a train left Gottenburg at noon, by which they
+could reach Wenersberg the same day. They knew nothing of the plan of
+the principal, which included a special train from the canal to the
+main line of railway; but they desired to see more of the interior of
+Sweden, and they were confident they should see the excursionists
+either at Wenersberg or on the way. It suited them better to make a
+trip even for a few hours, than to wander about a city which they had
+already exhausted. But they were obliged to wait some time for the
+train, and, after a couple of hours of "heavy loafing" about the
+streets, they returned to the pier. An English steamer had just
+arrived, and a boat was landing her passengers.
+
+"Who are those fellows?" said Laybold, pointing to the steamer's boat.
+"They wear the ship's uniform."
+
+"Right; they do, and they came from that steamer," replied Scott.
+
+"There's Sanford! I should know him a mile off. They are the second
+cutters, or I am a Dutchman."
+
+"Right again," added Scott, as the passengers landed.
+
+The steamer was the one in which Sanford and his companions had taken
+passage at Christiania the evening before. The absentees, "on a cruise
+without running away," were sorry to see the ship at anchor in the
+harbor, for some of them had hoped to be too late for her. When they
+landed, the first persons they encountered were Scott and Laybold, who
+gave them a very cordial greeting. Each party had a story to tell of
+its own adventures, and Scott knew Sanford and his associates too well
+to think it necessary to conceal from them the fact that he and
+Laybold had been the sad victims of "finkel."
+
+"But why don't you go on board?" asked Burchmore.
+
+"What's the use? All the fellows have gone up to Wobblewopkins, or
+some other place, to see the falls, and take an inside view of
+Sweden," replied Scott. "We intend to go and do likewise."
+
+"Won't you go with us?" added Laybold.
+
+The intentions of the two were explained to the others, and they
+all decided to join the party. Sanford was not without a hope that
+something would occur to prolong the "independent trip without running
+away."
+
+"How are you off for stamps?" asked Burchmore of the two who were by
+this arrangement added to his party, for which he had thus far done
+the financiering.
+
+"We have a little Swedish money, and some sovereigns," replied Scott.
+
+"But how many sovereigns? We may be prevented from joining the ship
+for a few days, and we want to know where we are in money matters,"
+interposed Sanford.
+
+"We have enough to buy out one or two of these one-horse kingdoms,
+like Denmark and Sweden. I have twenty sovereigns, and Laybold has
+about a thousand," answered Scott.
+
+"No I haven't," protested Laybold, laughing at the extravagance of his
+friend. "I have only twenty-five sovereigns."
+
+"And a letter of credit for a thousand more; so it's the same thing."
+
+"No, no; knock off one cipher, Scott."
+
+"Well, seeing it's you, I'll knock off just one; but not another to
+please any fellow, even if he were my grandmother's first cousin,"
+added Scott.
+
+"There's some difference between a hundred and a thousand pounds,"
+suggested Sanford.
+
+"A slight difference," said Laybold.
+
+"I don't expect any of us will live long enough to spend a hundred
+pounds in this country, which is about eighteen hundred of these
+tricks-bunker dollars, to say nothing of a thousand. Why, we paid only
+three bunkers for two lodgings and two breakfasts. How's a fellow ever
+to spend eighteen hundred bunkers? For my part, I think I'm lucky in
+having less than four hundred of the things to get rid of."
+
+"But you needn't feel under the necessity of spending all your money
+in this country," laughed the cashier.
+
+"My father promised to send me some more; but I hope he won't do it
+till I get out of Sweden. If he does I shall be ruined. Here's poor
+Laybold, with a letter of credit for a hundred pounds, besides
+twenty-five in cash. I pity the poor fellow. It wouldn't be so bad in
+London, where it costs a fellow from ten to twenty shillings a day to
+breathe."
+
+"I think I shall be able to survive," added Laybold.
+
+"I hope so; but you ought to hear him talk about his bankers. Topsails
+and topping-lifts! His bankers! Messrs. Pitchers Brothers & Co."
+
+"No! Bowles Brothers & Co," interposed Laybold.
+
+"It's all the same thing; there isn't much difference between bowls
+and pitchers. One breaks as easy as the other."
+
+"But my bankers don't break."
+
+"His bankers! Do you hear that? Well, I don't believe they'll break,
+for all my folks, when they travel in Europe, carry the same letter of
+credit in their trousers pocket. I had to write to my paternal parent
+all last year, care of Bowles Brothers & Co., 449 Strand, Charing
+Cross, W. C. London, England. You see I've learned my lesson."
+
+"My letters from home come through the same house," said Laybold, "and
+so do those of fifty other fellows."
+
+"About the money matters," interposed Burchmore. "Shall I act for the
+crowd, as I did in Norway?"
+
+"For me, yes; and I hope you'll help Laybold out on the big financial
+job he has on his hands," said Scott.
+
+"All right," added Laybold.
+
+"I have settled up for the fellows on the Norway trip. Now, each of
+you give me a couple of sovereigns, which I will change into Swedish
+money."
+
+This arrangement was made to the satisfaction of all, and the cashier
+went to an exchange office, where he procured Swedish paper for the
+gold.
+
+"Scott, I shouldn't wonder if the principal saved you the trouble of
+spending your twenty pounds before we go much farther," said Sanford.
+
+"I shall thank him with tears in my eyes if he does," replied Scott,
+with a solemn look.
+
+"I don't believe you will. When the ship came over before, every
+fellow had to give up his money, and the purser doled it out to the
+fellows in shillings or sixpences when they went ashore."
+
+"I'm sure it was very kind of him to take so much trouble."
+
+"You don't think so."
+
+"Of course I do. Only think of poor Laybold, with a letter of credit
+for a hundred pounds on his hands! I'm thankful I haven't the
+responsibility of spending so much money on my conscience. I should
+apply for admission to the first lunatic asylum, if I had to spend so
+much."
+
+"Nonsense! I made up my mind not to give up my money," said the
+coxswain. "That rule made plenty of rows on the other cruise, and I
+expect the fellows on this cruise will be called upon to give up their
+stamps very soon."
+
+"I was going to say we could get even with the principal by spending
+it all before we go on board again; but we are in Sweden, and it is
+quite impossible. They won't let you pay more than seventy-five cents
+or a dollar for a day's board in this country."
+
+"You went to a sailor's boarding-house, Scott. When you are at a
+first-class hotel, you will find that they bleed you enough."
+
+"I hope they do better than the landlord where we staid last night; if
+they don't I shall make money in Sweden. Why, they wouldn't even pick
+our pockets when we were boozy on 'finkel.' I'm sure they are a great
+deal more accommodating at sailors' boarding-houses in Boston and New
+York."
+
+"Come, be serious, Scott. Shall you give up your money when you return
+to the ship?"
+
+"Cheerfully, for there is no chance to get rid of it in this country."
+
+"But you will want some in Russia, where everything is dear."
+
+"I'm afraid my letter of credit will arrive by that time, and I shall
+be burdened with new trials."
+
+"Poor fellow!"
+
+The old rule of the ship had not been enforced on the present cruise,
+and the principal did not intend to renew it until it was absolutely
+necessary. It had caused much complaint among the wealthy parents of
+the former students, while it had wonderfully improved the discipline;
+but Mr. Lowington consented to make the experiment of permitting every
+boy to manage his own finances.
+
+At noon the party took their places in a second-class compartment of
+the carriage on the railway, and started for Wenersberg. Ole spoke
+Swedish as well as Norwegian, and acted as interpreter. Sanford had
+made peace with the waif, who was now as popular as ever with all the
+party. Each of them, in turn, had tried to induce Ole to tell how he
+happened to be in that boat at sea; but he still refused to explain.
+
+The train moved off, and the tourists observed the country through
+which it passed; but Scott could not help grumbling because the fare
+was only about a dollar and a quarter for fifty miles, declaring that
+he should never be able to get rid of his twenty sovereigns at this
+rate, and that he was threatened with a letter of credit for a hundred
+more at St. Petersburg. At Herrljunga, the junction of the branch to
+Wenersberg and the main line, the guard insisted that the tourists
+should leave the carriage.
+
+"How's this, Ole?" asked Sanford.
+
+"Change for Wenersberg; but the train don't start till five o'clock.
+We must wait two hours."
+
+"But what time does it get to Wenersberg?"
+
+"About half past eight."
+
+"That's a pretty go!" exclaimed the coxswain. "You made a beautiful
+arrangement for this trip, Scott."
+
+"What's the matter now?"
+
+"We cannot get to Wenersberg till half past eight; and of course that
+will be too late to join the ship's company there."
+
+"It isn't necessary to join them there. We shall meet them on the way,
+and go back with them. They will be at this place some time this
+afternoon."
+
+"What did we come up here for?" asked Sanford.
+
+"In the first place, to get rid of four or five rix-bunkers; and in
+the second, to see something of this part of Sweden. We have done
+both, and ought to be satisfied."
+
+"O, I'm satisfied!"
+
+"You ought to be; you have four and a half bunkers less to spend. We
+will loaf about this place till the principal comes with the crowd,
+and when he sees what good boys we have been to look him up, and see
+that he didn't get lost, he'll forgive Laybold and me for drinking
+'finkel.'"
+
+"All right. What time does the train leave for Gottenburg, Ole?" added
+the coxswain, turning to the interpreter.
+
+"Half past five," replied the waif.
+
+No one took the trouble to examine the time-table in the
+station-house, which, though in Swedish, was perfectly intelligible so
+far as it related to hours and towns.
+
+The tourists decided to improve the time they were obliged to wait
+by taking a walk about the country, examining Swedish houses and
+investigating Swedish agriculture. Doubtless this was a very
+interesting amusement; but at quarter past five, the party returned to
+the station. A long train was just departing in the direction of
+Gottenburg.
+
+"What train's that?" demanded Sanford.
+
+"I don't know," replied Ole, with a look of alarm.
+
+"Inquire, then," added the excited coxswain.
+
+The party hastened into the little station. It was the regular train
+for Gottenburg.
+
+"But how's that?" cried Sanford. "You said it left at half past five."
+
+"Yes; I looked at the time-table in Gottenburg, and it said half past
+five," replied Ole. "Here is one, and I will look again."
+
+"Better wait till morning before you look again," said Scott.
+
+"Here it is; five--"
+
+"That's all, Norway."
+
+"I'm sure it was half past five in Gottenburg," pleaded Ole, whom the
+coxswain had privately requested to make this blunder.
+
+"What sort of chowder do you call this, son of Odin?" demanded Scott.
+
+"He has made a blunder; that's all," laughed Burchmore, who, though
+not in the confidence of the coxswain, at once suspected the trick,
+and, to tell the truth, was not sorry for the mistake.
+
+The mishap was discussed for an hour, and poor Ole was severely
+blamed, especially by Sanford, for his carelessness; but he bore the
+censure with becoming meekness.
+
+"What's to be done?" inquired Scott, at last.
+
+"Here's another train at 8.56," replied Ole, pointing to the
+time-table. "We can return to Gottenburg in that."
+
+"Right, Norway," added Scott.
+
+They found a small hotel in the place, where they obtained a supper,
+and at the time indicated returned to Gottenburg, where they arrived
+at about one in the morning. It was too late to go on board of the
+ship, and they went directly to the little hotel in the lane, where
+Scott and Laybold had passed the preceding night. It was closed, but
+they easily roused the landlord.
+
+"So you have again come," said the good-natured host.
+
+"Yes; we have again come. It is too late to go on board of the ship,"
+replied Scott.
+
+"Your ship have sail to-night to Copenhagen."
+
+"No! Impossible!"
+
+"I have seen her sail," persisted the landlord. "I have make no
+mistake."
+
+"We are dished!" exclaimed Sanford.
+
+"The young gentleman come down at seven o'clock, and the ship have
+sail at nine o'clock. I know it so well as I know how to speak the
+English."
+
+"It must be so, then," laughed Scott; "for you have spoke the English
+more better as nice."
+
+"What shall we do?" continued Sanford, who seemed to be positively
+distressed at the unfortunate circumstance.
+
+"Do? Go to bed, and go to sleep. What else can we do? You are too big
+a boy to cry over your misfortunes," replied Scott.
+
+"I don't intend to cry; but I feel very bad about it."
+
+"Dry your tears," said Burchmore. "We may as well take a biscuit, turn
+in, and call it half a day."
+
+"But when will there be a steamer to Copenhagen?" asked Sanford.
+
+"The Najaden must go Monday afternoon," answered the landlord, who,
+for some reason best known to himself, did not deem it prudent to
+mention the fact that the Kronprindsesse Louise would sail within half
+an hour.
+
+"This will never do," interposed Rodman. "We have been chasing the
+ship now for a week, and by the time we get to Copenhagen she will be
+gone. I move we go to Stockholm. We shall be sure to catch her there."
+
+"Good!" exclaimed Wilde.
+
+The proposition was fully discussed, and when a majority favored the
+movement, the others, among whom was Sanford, yielded an apparently
+reluctant assent. The Wadstena would start at two o'clock, and there
+was not a moment to lose. The landlord was astonished at the decision,
+and his hotel was not filled that night, as he intended it should be.
+Just as the canal steamer was starting, the young tourists hurried on
+board, and were soon on their way to Stockholm.
+
+Not a quarter of a mile distant at this moment were Peaks and his
+prisoner, and Blaine, the head steward, who was on the lookout for
+them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+THROUGH THE SOUND TO COPENHAGEN.
+
+
+Mr. Lowington was almost forced to the conclusion that the experiment
+of permitting the students to manage their own finances was a failure.
+If it could be a success anywhere, it must be in the northern
+countries, where none of the boys spoke the language, and where
+the lighter intoxicants were not so common as in the more southern
+portions of Europe. Though he was not aware that any pupils had made
+an improper use of their money, the non-arrival of the crew of the
+second cutter, and the disappearance of Scott and Laybold in
+Gottenburg, seemed to have some relation to the condition of
+their funds. But he was willing to carry the experiment as far as
+practicable, and to restore the obnoxious rule only when it was
+absolutely necessary to do so. Two thirds of the students could be
+safely trusted to manage their money matters, and it was not pleasant
+to restrain the whole for the benefit of the minority.
+
+After the boys had walked all over Gottenburg, they were weary enough
+to retire at eight bells in the evening, especially as they were to
+turn out at two o'clock the next morning, for the trip up the Goeta
+Canal. At the appointed time, the steamer came alongside the ship,
+where she took the excursionists on board, the boats of the other
+vessels conveying their crews to the Young America. As it was still
+dark, not a few of the boys finished their nap in the little steamer.
+About eight o'clock, she reached the long series of locks by which the
+canal passes the Falls of Trollhaetten, and the excursionists walked
+for a couple of hours through the beautiful scenery, and embarking
+again in the steamer, arrived at Wenersberg, where they obtained a
+view of the Wenern Lake, and proceeded by special train to Herrljunga,
+and thence, by regular train, to Gottenburg, where they arrived before
+eight in the evening. The wind was fair, and the squadron immediately
+sailed to the southward.
+
+The principal was annoyed by the absence of not less than a dozen of
+the students; but he had every confidence in the zeal and discretion
+of Peaks, who was to take charge of the cutter's crew, and he left the
+head steward at Gottenburg to find Scott and Laybold. He feared that
+the success of these wanderers would encourage others to follow their
+example, and increased vigilance seemed to be necessary on the part of
+the instructors. The next day was Sunday, and it was doubly a season
+of rest. The breeze was fair, but very light, so that the squadron
+made only about four knots an hour; but on Monday morning she was
+fairly in the Sound, which is about three miles in width. On the left
+was the town of Helsingborg, in Sweden, and on the right Kronberg
+Castle, with Elsinore, on a kind of land-locked basin, behind it. The
+vessels continued on their course, keeping within a short distance of
+the shore, so that those on board could distinctly see the towns and
+villages. The houses were neat, with red roofs, each one having its
+little garden. There were plenty of groves and forests, and the trees
+were oaks and beeches, instead of pines and firs which the voyagers
+had seen in Norway and Sweden. The country was flat, with nothing like
+a hill to be seen.
+
+The breeze freshening, the squadron hastened its pace, and in the
+middle of the forenoon the spires of Copenhagen were in plain sight.
+Off in the water were several detached forts, built on small islands.
+The Young America led the way, and soon dropped her anchor off the
+citadel of Frederikshavn, and near the landing-place, where a crowd of
+small steamers were lying at the wharf.
+
+"Have you been here before, Dr. Winstock?" asked Captain Lincoln, as
+he saw the surgeon examining the aspect of the city.
+
+"Yes; several years ago. I have been in every country in Europe."
+
+"Copenhagen don't look just as I expected it would," added the
+commander. "I thought it must be a very old, black, and musty-looking
+place."
+
+"You see that it is not,--at least not from the water; but you will
+find plenty of dismal and gloomy-looking buildings in it. The fact is,
+Denmark is too small a kingdom to support all the show and expense of
+royalty: its palaces are too large and costly to be retained as such,
+and many of them have been permitted to fall into partial decay. But I
+will not anticipate Mr. Mapps' lecture, for I see the signal is
+flying."
+
+"She makes a tremendous display of forts and guns," added Lincoln,
+glancing from the batteries of Trekroner and Lynetten to the
+bristling guns of Frederikshavn.
+
+"Doubtless it is a strong place, but the English have twice captured
+the city. Here are the boats from the other vessels. I suppose we
+shall go ashore after dinner."
+
+The steerage was soon crowded with students, and Mr. Mapps took his
+usual position at the foremast, on which appeared the map of Denmark.
+
+"In English this country is called Denmark," said the professor; "but
+it has this name in no other language. The Danes call it _Danmark_,
+the adjective of which is _Danske_; and the country is also called the
+_Danske Stat_, or Danish States. In German it is _Daenemark_; in
+French, _Danemark_; in Italian, _Danimarca_. It is bounded on the
+north by the Skager Rack, or Sleeve; on the east by the Cattegat, the
+Sound, and the Baltic Sea; on the south by the Duchy of Schleswig and
+the Baltic; and on the west by the North Sea. When this ship was in
+Europe before, Schleswig-Holstein and Lauenburg belonged to Denmark;
+but now they belong to Prussia, and Jutland is all that remains of
+continental Denmark. This peninsula has an area of nine thousand six
+hundred square miles, or about the size of the State of New Hampshire.
+With the several islands, the entire area of Denmark is fourteen
+thousand five hundred square miles. Greenland, Iceland, the Faroe
+Islands, and several small islands in the West Indies, belong to her.
+The population is nearly one million eight hundred thousand--about
+equal to that of Massachusetts and New Hampshire united.
+
+"The country is flat, or gently undulating, and the highest hill is
+only five hundred and fifty feet high. The soil is sandy on the
+peninsula, and not very fertile, but very rich on some of the islands.
+It is indented to a remarkable degree with bays and inlets, and the
+whole interior is dotted with small lakes, usually connected by a
+river, like a number of eggs on a string. The Lim Fjord, which you see
+in the north, formerly only extended to within a short distance of the
+North Sea; but in 1825 a tempest broke through the narrow neck of
+land, and opened a passage for small vessels. These inland lakes are
+full of fish, and salmon was once so plenty that householders were
+forbidden by law to feed their servants with this food more than once
+a week.
+
+"The two largest islands are Fuenen and Seeland, which are separated by
+the Great Belt, and the former from the main land by the Little Belt.
+In winter these are frozen over, as is the Sound in the severer
+seasons, and have been crossed by armies engaged in military
+operations. The country is well wooded, and you will find plenty
+of large oaks and beeches. This morning you passed Elsinore, where
+Shakespeare locates Hamlet; but you cannot find where 'the morn walks
+o'er the dew of yon high eastern hill,' for there are no hills there;
+nor 'the dreadful summit of the cliff, that beetles o'er his base into
+the sea.' It is a flat region, with only a low cliff to border the
+sea; certainly with no such tremendous steeps as the poet describes.
+Besides, Hamlet lived and died in Jutland. But Shakespeare used the
+poet's license.
+
+"Nearly all of Denmark lies between latitude fifty-five and
+fifty-eight; but, though the thermometer sometimes falls to twenty-two
+degrees below zero in winter, the average temperature is mild. The
+climate does not materially differ from the eastern coast of
+Massachusetts. The air is so humid that the grass and trees have a
+livelier green than the countries farther south, and droughts are
+almost unknown. When France and Germany are parched and dry, Denmark
+is fresh and green. The people are engaged principally in agriculture
+and commerce. The chief exports are grain, cattle, and horses.
+
+"The government is a constitutional monarchy. The king is assisted in
+the executive department by a 'Royal Privy Council' of seven
+ministers. The legislature is called the Rigsdag, and consists of the
+Landsthing, or upper house, and the Folkething, or lower house. Of the
+former, twelve are nominated for life, by the king, from the present
+or past members of the lower house, and the remaining fifty-four are
+elected, in four classes, by the largest tax-payers in country
+districts, in towns, in cities, and by deputies representing the
+ordinary voters. The members of the lower house are chosen directly by
+the people. All male citizens of twenty-five, except paupers, and
+servants who are not householders, are voters.
+
+"The established religion of the state is Lutheran, and the king must
+be of this church. He nominates the bishops, who have no political
+power, as in England. They have the general supervision and management
+of all the affairs of the church in the kingdom. Although there are
+only about thirteen thousand non-Lutherans in Denmark, entire
+religious toleration prevails, and no man can be deprived of his
+civil and political rights on account of his creed.
+
+"Free education is provided by the government for all children whose
+parents cannot afford to pay for tuition, and attendance at school,
+between the ages of seven and fourteen, is compulsory. All the people,
+therefore, are instructed in the elementary branches; and, besides
+the University of Copenhagen, there is a system of high and middle
+schools, available for the children of merchants, mechanics, and the
+more prosperous of the laboring classes.
+
+"Every able-bodied man in Denmark, who has attained the age of
+twenty-one, is liable to serve as a soldier for eight years in
+the regular army, and eight more in the army of the reserve. In
+preparation for this duty, every man is enrolled, and required to
+drill for a period of from four to six months, according to the arm
+of the service in which he is placed; and those who do not become
+proficient in this time are required to drill for another and longer
+period. The kingdom is divided into military districts, and all the
+soldiers are required to drill from thirty to forty-five days every
+year. The navy of Denmark consists of thirty-one steamers of all
+classes, six of which are iron-clads, carrying three hundred and
+twelve guns, and manned by nine hundred men.
+
+"Little is known of the history of this country before the eighth
+century, but the Cimbri occupied it before the time of Christ. The
+Danes conquered portions of England, and in the eleventh century,
+Canute, who introduced Christianity into his realm, completed the
+conquest. Norway was also included in his kingdom, and under him and
+his successors, during the next two hundred years, Denmark attained
+the summit of her power and glory. Holstein, Lauenburg, and several
+other of the northern provinces of Germany, and even a portion of
+Prussia, were subjected to her sway. Waldemar II., a successor of
+Canute, with his eldest son, was daringly captured, while resting from
+the fatigues of the chase, one evening, by Count Schwerin, whom the
+king had provoked to wrath by some flagrant injustice. This bold act
+of retaliation was carried to a successful issue, and the king and his
+son were transported by water to Castle Schwerin, in Mecklenburg,
+where they were kept as prisoners for three years--a most remarkable
+instance of retribution, if we consider that Waldemar was the most
+powerful sovereign of the north. By threats and bribes his release was
+procured; but during his confinement the conquered provinces had
+revolted, and the king was unable to recover his lost possessions.
+Denmark was thus reduced from her lofty position by the injustice of
+her king.
+
+"Towards the close of the fourteenth century, Margaret--the Semiramis
+of the North--succeeded to the thrones of Norway and Denmark, and
+added Sweden to her dominions by conquest, in the compact of Calmar.
+The Swedes, under Gustavus Vasa, established their independence after
+the union had existed for one hundred and twenty-five years. At the
+death of the last of Margaret's line, in 1439, the states of Denmark
+elected the count of Oldenburg their king, who reigned as Christian I.
+He was made duke of Schleswig and count of Holstein, and thus the
+sovereign of Denmark became the ruler of these duchies, about which
+there has been so much trouble within the last ten years, and which
+caused the war of 1866 between Prussia and Austria. He was followed by
+his son Hans, or John, whose heir was Christian II., deposed in 1523.
+This prince was a tyrant, and was kept a prisoner for twenty-seven
+years. His crown was given to Frederick, Duke of Schleswig and
+Holstein, in whose reign Sweden established her independence. His son
+Christian III. succeeded him. In the great wars which followed the
+Reformation, the kings of Denmark took the Protestant side. In
+repeated conflicts with the Swedes, Denmark lost much of her
+territory. After Christian III. came Frederick II., and then Christian
+IV., who was followed by Frederick III., in whose reign the crown,
+which had been nominally elective, was made hereditary in the
+Oldenburg line. Under Christian V. the country was at peace; but
+Frederick IV., who came after him, brought on a war with Sweden by
+invading the territory of the Duke of Holstein, an ally of the King of
+Sweden, which continued till 1718. Under Christian VI. and Frederick
+V. the country was at peace. Christian VII. married the sister of
+George III. of England, and was followed, in 1808, by Frederick VI.,
+their son.
+
+"In 1780, Russia, Sweden, and Denmark, under the influence of France,
+established a new code of maritime laws, which operated against the
+interests of England. This action in convention was called 'Armed
+Neutrality,' and in 1800, during the reign of Christian VII., its
+principles were revived, and a new agreement was signed by Russia,
+Prussia, Denmark, and Sweden. It declared that arms and ammunition
+alone were contraband of war, that merchandise of belligerents, except
+contraband of war, was to be protected by a neutral flag, and that
+'paper blockades' should be regarded as ineffectual. England
+immediately laid an embargo on the vessels of the powers signing it.
+In 1801, a British fleet under Sir Hyde Parker, with Nelson as second
+in command, bombarded Copenhagen. Again, in 1807, England, fearing
+that Denmark would be compelled by Napoleon to take part against her,
+bombarded Copenhagen, and compelled the government to give up its
+entire fleet, which was sent to England. This ended the armed
+neutrality. At the final treaty of peace, in 1814, Norway was ceded to
+Sweden, which, in return, gave to Denmark Pomerania, and the Island of
+Ruegen; but the next year Pomerania was passed over to Prussia, in
+exchange for the Duchy of Lauenburg.
+
+"Frederick VI. reigned till 1839, when he was followed by Christian
+VIII. The two Duchies of Schleswig and Holstein were still subjects of
+dispute. The king claimed them, but the people of Holstein were German
+in sentiment, and objected to the incorporation of their country in
+the Kingdom of Denmark, to which the continued efforts of the latter
+were directed. The Danish language was required to be used to the
+exclusion of the German. In 1848, Frederick VII. came to the throne,
+and was more energetic in pushing his claims to the duchies than some
+of his predecessors had been. The people of Holstein, which was a
+member of the German Confederation, were in a state of insurrection,
+when the King of Denmark virtually annexed both duchies to his
+kingdom. War ensued, and continued for three years. The interference
+of some of the great powers restored peace, but left the question in
+dispute unsettled."
+
+"What was the question in dispute?" asked Captain Lincoln.
+
+"I will explain it, though there are so many complications to it, that
+only a general view of the subject can be given. For four hundred
+years the line of Oldenburg has occupied the throne of Denmark.
+Schleswig and Holstein were governed by the same rulers, though each
+country was separately organized. But the law of succession was
+different. In Denmark a female could rule, while in the duchies the
+line was limited to males. Frederick VII. had no children, and it was
+seen that the direct line of the house of Oldenburg would be extinct
+at his death. A treaty made by the several powers interested gave the
+succession to Prince Christian, whose wife was entitled to the throne
+by right of her descent from Christian III., who died in 1559; but she
+yielded her right to her husband, who ascended the throne in 1863, as
+Christian IX., and is the present king. At the death of Frederick
+VII., the Duke of Augustenburg claimed the duchies. Germany desired to
+separate Schleswig-Holstein from Denmark. The German troops entered
+Holstein, which was a member of the Confederation, and entitled to its
+protection. Denmark refused to yield her title to the duchies, and war
+ensued. The Danes were overwhelmed, and repeatedly defeated. England
+declined to assist Denmark, as had been expected by the latter, and
+Denmark was compelled to renounce all her claims to Schleswig-Holstein
+and Lauenburg, in favor of Prussia and Austria. The main question in
+regard to the final disposition of the duchies was left open for
+future adjustment, and Prussia took temporary possession of Schleswig,
+and Austria of Holstein. The Duke of Augustenburg was permitted to
+remain in the latter, but forbidden to get up any demonstration in aid
+of his own claims.
+
+"Austria favored the claim of the duke, while Prussia denied it, and
+accused her then powerful rival of encouraging revolutionary movements
+in Holstein dangerous to the thrones of Europe. Then followed the
+great war of 1866, which resulted in the utter humiliation of Austria,
+and the annexation of all the disputed territories to Prussia.
+Denmark, thus shorn of her territories and her power, has become an
+insignificant kingdom. With less than two million inhabitants, she
+supports all the costly trappings of royalty, and keeps an army and
+navy. The king has a civil list of nearly three hundred thousand
+dollars, and the heir apparent has an allowance exceeding the salary
+of the President of the United States, while the entire revenue of the
+nation is only about thirteen million dollars. Prince Frederick, the
+king's oldest son, who succeeds to the throne, married the daughter of
+the King of Sweden and Norway. The princess Alexandra, the oldest
+daughter, is the wife of the Prince of Wales. Prince Wilhelm, the
+second son, was elected King of Greece, under the title of Georgios I.
+in 1863. The Princess Dagmar is the wife of the Grand Duke Alexander,
+of Russia, heir of the throne. By their connections two of the sons
+are, or will be, kings, one daughter Queen of England, and another
+Empress of Russia.
+
+"In 1348, the King of Denmark levied duties on all vessels passing
+through the Sound, at the Fortress of Kronberg, which were applied to
+the expenses of the light-houses, and the protection of shipping from
+pirates. The United States first objected to the payment of this tax,
+and called the attention of the commercial nations of Europe to the
+annoyance. All vessels were obliged to anchor, and submit to vexatious
+delays; but none doubted the right to levy the dues, which had been
+formally regulated by treaties. Denmark consented to abandon her
+claims on the payment of about fifteen millions of dollars by the
+nations of Europe, and about four hundred thousand on the part of the
+United States."
+
+The professor completed his lecture, and the students separated. Most
+of them climbed into the rigging, or seated themselves on the rail,
+where they could see the city and the various objects of interest in
+the harbor. The view shoreward from the ship was very unsatisfactory,
+for the city, built on a dead level, presented but little to challenge
+the attention of the voyager. While they were observing the
+surroundings, a shore boat approached the vessel, in which were two
+persons wearing the uniform of the squadron. One of them was a stout
+man, in whom the students soon recognized Peaks.
+
+"But who is that with him?" asked Norwood.
+
+"It's one of the second cutter's crew, I suppose," replied De Forrest.
+"I didn't think, when I went ashore with them, that I shouldn't see
+any of them again for so long a time. I wonder where the rest of them
+are."
+
+"That's not one of the second cutters," added Judson. "It is the
+English fellow."
+
+"So it is."
+
+Peaks came alongside, and directed Clyde Blacklock to mount the
+accommodation ladder, which he did without making any objection. They
+had arrived the day before. The prisoner seemed to have lost some
+portion of his stubborn spirit. The boatswain followed him to the
+deck, and touching his cap to the captain and other officers on the
+quarter-deck, went aft, where the principal was talking with the
+surgeon.
+
+"We have come on board, sir," said the boatswain, as he took off his
+cap and pointed to Clyde.
+
+"I see you have," replied Mr. Lowington. "I'm glad to see you again,
+Clyde."
+
+The young Briton nodded his head with a jerk, but made no reply.
+
+"Have you seen Mr. Blaine, Peaks?" asked the principal.
+
+"Yes, sir; I met him on the wharf night before last at Gottenburg."
+
+"But where are the crew of the second cutter? I expected you to bring
+them."
+
+"They came back to Christiania on Friday, and took the steamer for
+Gottenburg the same evening; but Mr. Blaine had not seen them. Their
+steamer arrived in the forenoon, and the ship did not sail till
+night."
+
+"I am afraid there is something wrong about it."
+
+"I left Mr. Blaine in Gottenburg. I suppose he will find them."
+
+Peaks reported in detail the result of his mission on shore. So far as
+Clyde was concerned it was entirely satisfactory; but the continued
+absence of the second cutter's crew was very annoying to the
+principal.
+
+"How do you feel, Clyde?" asked Mr. Lowington, turning to the new
+student.
+
+"I feel well enough," replied the runaway, roughly.
+
+"I am glad you do. I hope you feel better than when you left the
+ship."
+
+"I don't."
+
+"While you were on board before, I neglected to explain to you the
+consequences of leaving the ship without permission."
+
+"It wouldn't have made any difference. I should have gone just the
+same," answered Clyde, doggedly.
+
+"The less trouble you make, the better it will be for you."
+
+"Perhaps it will; but I don't intend to stay in this ship a great
+while."
+
+"I intend that you shall stay here; and since you avow your purpose to
+run away again, I must see that you are put in a safe place. Peaks,
+the brig."
+
+"The brig? What's that?" demanded Clyde, who was very suspicious of
+the calm, unmoved tones of the principal.
+
+"Come with me, my lad, and I will show you," replied the boatswain.
+
+The Briton knew by sad experience how useless it was to contend
+against this tyrant, who, however, always used him well when he
+behaved in a reasonable manner. He followed the boatswain into the
+steerage, and the door of the brig, which was a small prison formed
+of plank slats, set upright under the steps, about three inches apart,
+was opened.
+
+"That's the brig, my boy," said Peaks. "It's a regular institution on
+board a man-of-war; but this one has not been opened for months."
+
+"Well, what's it for?" asked Clyde, who even yet did not seem to
+comprehend its use.
+
+"Walk in, and I will make it all plain to you in a moment."
+
+"I don't know what you mean."
+
+"Sail in!" shouted a student, who, with others, was observing the
+treatment.
+
+"On deck, sir!" said the boatswain, sternly, to the speaker. "Report
+yourself."
+
+It was a principle in the discipline of the ship that no person should
+say or do anything to irritate a student undergoing punishment, and no
+one was permitted, on such occasions, to take part on either side,
+unless called upon by the officer or instructor to do so. In ordinary
+cases no boy was required, or permitted, to be a "tell-tale," and all
+were expected to remain neutral. The student who had spoken left the
+steerage, and went on deck, before Clyde had time to "open upon him,"
+as he intended to do.
+
+"Step in, my lad," added Peaks.
+
+"What for?" asked the Briton, as he obeyed the order, but not without
+a suspicion that he was to step upon a red-hot gridiron, or be
+precipitated through some opening in the deck into the dark depths
+beneath.
+
+No such calamity happened to him, and he was rather astonished to find
+that no harsher punishment was used for the flagrant offence he had
+committed. He had pushed the boatswain overboard, and then run away.
+Peaks had never manifested any resentment towards him on account of
+his cowardly trick; but he anticipated some severe discipline on board
+of the ship. The boatswain closed and locked the door of the brig, and
+then looked in at the prisoner through the slats.
+
+"Do you understand what the brig is for now?" asked Peaks.
+
+"You have locked me in--that's all."
+
+"That's all, my lad."
+
+"How long am I to stay here?"
+
+"Till you make up your mind not to run away."
+
+"This isn't a bad place, and I shall stay here till I grow gray before
+I promise not to be off when I get a chance."
+
+"All right, my hearty. Think of it a few weeks."
+
+To one who had expected some horrible punishment for his misdemeanors,
+the brig seemed like very mild discipline. Clyde seated himself on the
+stool in his prison, and leisurely surveyed the surroundings. He was
+an enterprising youth, and the bars of his cage looked small and weak.
+At dinner time, the meal was handed in to him, and he ate with an
+excellent appetite. Soon after, he heard the call for all hands, and
+then the waiter in the steerage told him they had gone on shore to see
+the city. Everything was quiet and still, and he devoted himself to a
+more particular examination of the bars of the brig. They were two
+inches thick, but the case looked hopeful. Pursuing his investigations
+still farther, he found, under the steps, a saw, a hammer, a chisel,
+and some other tools, which Bitts, the carpenter, had placed there a
+few days before, and forgotten to remove. Clyde took up the saw; but
+just then, Peaks, with a book in his hand, seated himself at a table
+near the brig, and began to read.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+COPENHAGEN AND TIVOLI.
+
+
+All the boats of the squadron came into line, each with the flag in
+the bow and stern. They pulled along the water front of the city,
+around a couple of Danish men-of-war, and of course created a
+sensation. One by one the boats rowed up to the landing, and the
+students went on shore, each crew securing its cutter at the wharf,
+near the steps. The custom-house officers were on the alert; but as no
+one had parcels of any kind, the students were not detained. Mr. and
+Mrs. Kendall landed, and as they intended to spend a few days in the
+city, they had a couple of valises, which the porters, who are always
+in waiting at all the ports in Europe, conveyed into the custom-house.
+The Toldbod, as this edifice is called by the Danes, is surrounded by
+a high wall, which also encloses the entire landing-place, so that
+none can visit the city from the sea without passing through its
+gates.
+
+One of the officers spoke English very well, and evidently took pride
+in doing so, for he asked a great many questions so pleasantly, that
+it was impossible to explain his object in any other way. He wished to
+know whether the travellers had any clothing they had not worn, and
+whether Mrs. Kendall had any tobacco or liquor. She protested that
+she did not use tobacco or liquor; and the actual examination of the
+baggage was a mere form. The man was so polite, that Paul at once
+concluded he was only practising his English. A carriage was procured,
+and Dr. Winstock and Captain Lincoln were invited to join the party.
+The inquiring students deemed it a great privilege to be permitted to
+go with the surgeon, for he was a walking encyclopaedia of every city
+and country in Europe. As Paul Kendall had been before, Captain
+Lincoln was now, the favorite of the doctor, and the little party were
+to see the city together.
+
+The carriage went out at the gate, and passed into Amaliegade. The
+houses were plain and substantial, without much ornament. They were of
+brick, but most of them were covered with stucco.
+
+"What's this?" asked Paul, as the carriage entered an open space, with
+an equestrian statue in the centre.
+
+"Frederiksplads," replied the doctor; "and that is the statue of
+Frederik V., who came to the throne in 1746, and in whose reign this
+palace was erected."
+
+The place was an octagon, surrounded on all sides by public buildings.
+
+"This is the residence of the king on the left. On the other side is
+the palace of the crown prince. There is the foreign office, and on
+the other side lives the queen dowager."
+
+"They are not very elegant buildings," said Captain Lincoln.
+
+"No; there are no very fine buildings in Copenhagen, though the
+Exchange is a very curious structure, and some are very large and
+unwieldy. There's the Casino," added the doctor.
+
+"What's a casino?" inquired the captain.
+
+"Here it is a building for dancing, concerts, theatrical performances,
+and similar amusements in the winter season. Everything is cheap here,
+and the price of admission to the Casino, where one joins the dance or
+sees a play, is two or three marks."
+
+"How much is that? I haven't looked up the money yet," said Paul.
+
+"A rigsbank dollar is the unit, worth about fifty-four cents of our
+money. It is divided into six marks, of nine cents each, and a mark
+into sixteen skillings, of about half a cent each. When the Italian
+opera is at the Casino, the prices are only three or four marks. This
+is Gothersgade," added Dr. Winstock, as the carriage turned into
+another street. "In plain English, Gothic street."
+
+"There's another equestrian statue," added Captain Lincoln, pointing
+to a large, irregular space, surrounded by public buildings.
+
+"The statue of Christian V. This is Kongens, or King's Square. There
+are the Academy of Arts, the Royal Theatre, the Guard House, the New
+Market--none of them very fine, as you can see for yourselves."
+
+The carriage crossed this square, and came out at a canal, on the
+other side of which was the vast palace of Christiansborg. A short
+distance farther brought the party to the Royal Hotel. The carriage
+stopped at the door in the arch, and the two landlords, the porter,
+the waiters, and the clerk, half a score strong, turned out to
+receive its occupants. All of them bowed low, and all of them led the
+way up stairs. Paul took a parlor and chamber for himself and lady.
+
+"Now, where's Joseph?" asked Dr. Winstock.
+
+"Who's Joseph?" inquired the captain.
+
+"He is the guide at this hotel, if he is still living."
+
+Joseph was sent for, and soon made his appearance. He was an elderly
+man, with gray hair and whiskers, neatly dressed in black. His manners
+were very agreeable, and he exhibited a lively zeal to serve the
+tourists. Mr. Lowington had been courteously waited upon by an officer
+of the government, who had volunteered to have the various palaces,
+museums, and other places of interest, opened during the afternoon and
+the next day. Joseph had procured a two-horse carriage, and the party
+at the hotel seated themselves in it, with the guide on the box with
+the driver.
+
+"That's the Slot," said Joseph, pointing across the canal.
+
+"The what?" exclaimed Captain Lincoln.
+
+"The Slot, or Palace of Christiansborg."
+
+"Slot! What a name!"
+
+"But not any worse than the German word _Schloss_," added Joseph,
+laughing. "Do you speak German, sir?"
+
+"Not much."
+
+The guide uttered a few sentences in German, evidently for the purpose
+of demonstrating that he spoke the language.
+
+"The palace is on an island called Slotsholm, and is as big as it is
+ugly. Shall we go there now?"
+
+"No; we want a general view of the city first," replied Dr. Winstock.
+"I think we had better ascend to the top of the Round Tower."
+
+Joseph gave the order, and the carriage proceeded to the tower. The
+canal in front of the hotel was filled with small craft, which had
+brought pottery and various wares from other parts of Denmark, to
+sell. The goods were arranged on the decks and on the shore of the
+canal. Near were groups of women, who were selling fish, vegetables,
+and other articles, around whom was a crowd of purchasers.
+
+"I suppose you have heard of Andersen?" said Joseph to the captain.
+
+"Heard of him! I have read all his books which have been translated
+into English," replied Captain Lincoln.
+
+"He has rooms in that building some of the time. Do you see that
+sign--Melchoir?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"This Melchoir is a very dear friend of Andersen, who lives with him a
+portion of the time."
+
+"Is it possible to see Hans Christian Andersen?" asked Mrs. Kendall.
+
+"Quite possible, madam. I will see about it to-day. He is a very
+agreeable man, and willing to meet all who wish to see him," answered
+Joseph. "There's the Town Hall," he added, as the carriage passed a
+large building, with an extensive colonnade in front.
+
+"'_Med Lov skal man Land bygge_,'" said Lincoln, reading an
+inscription on the front. "Those are my sentiments exactly."
+
+"'With law must the land be built' is the English of that," laughed
+Joseph. "All the Jutland laws begin with this phrase, which was
+spoken by Waldemar II. We Danes believe in law, and everything that is
+good. Copenhagen is a very fine city, and everything is remarkably
+cheap here."
+
+"What do you call your city in your own lingo, Joseph?"
+
+"Kjoebenhavn; pronounce it Chep-en-ahn."
+
+"Chepenahn," repeated Lincoln.
+
+"Speak it a little quicker, and you will have it right. It was first
+called simply the Haven; then in Danish, when many merchants carried
+on business here, _Kaupmannahoefn_, or merchants' haven, from which it
+was shortened into _chepenahn_. Here is the Round Tower," added
+Joseph, as the carriage stopped.
+
+The party alighted and entered the structure, which was the tower of
+the Church of the Trinity.
+
+"This used to be the watch tower, where men were kept to give the
+alarm in case of fire; but the observatory has been moved to the tower
+of St. Nicholas, and now we have a telegraphic fire alarm. Won't you
+walk up to the top of this tower, where you can have a fine view of
+the whole city? The ascent is very easy," continued Joseph.
+
+There were no stairs, but an inclined plane, gradual in its rise,
+permitted the tourists to ascend to the summit with very little labor.
+
+"We might have driven up in the carriage," said Captain Lincoln.
+
+"There would be no difficulty at all in doing so. In fact, Peter the
+Great, when he was in Copenhagen, in 1716, drove to the top with the
+Empress Catharine, in a coach and four."
+
+"Is that so?" asked the captain.
+
+"I can't remember so far back myself," chuckled Joseph, "for I'm not
+much over a hundred years old; but everybody says it is true, and I
+see no reason to doubt the story. Peter the Great liked to do strange
+things, and you can see for yourself that a carriage would run very
+well here."
+
+"If he went up with a coach and four, of course he must have come
+down, unless the carriage and horses are up there now. How did he turn
+his team?"
+
+"It is easier to ask some questions than to answer them," replied
+Joseph. "History does not say that he drove down, only that he drove
+up."
+
+"Perhaps he backed down, which kings and emperors are sometimes
+obliged to do, as well as common people," suggested Paul Kendall.
+
+"Very likely he did; I don't see any other way for the team to
+descend," added Joseph. "This tower was begun in 1639."
+
+At the top of the structure the travellers took a general survey of
+the city, and then proceeded to examine it in detail.
+
+"Do you remember the latitude of Copenhagen, Captain Lincoln?" asked
+Dr. Winstock.
+
+"About fifty-five and a half."
+
+"The same as the middle of Labrador. Quebec is about forty-seven, and
+this is a long way farther north. What is the population of this city,
+Joseph?" asked the doctor.
+
+"One hundred and eighty-one thousand," replied the guide, giving the
+census of 1870. "Formerly the city was a walled town, with ramparts
+and moats. It was built partly on Seeland, and partly on the small
+island of Amager. The channel between them is the harbor. You can see
+where the old line of fortifications was. The old town lies nearest to
+the sea, but the city is now spreading rapidly out into the country."
+
+"What is that broad sheet of water, with two bridges over it?" asked
+Lincoln, pointing to the land side.
+
+"That is the reservoir. Formerly the water in the city was bad, but
+now it has an excellent system of water-works. The water comes in from
+the country, and is pumped up by steam before it is distributed.
+Beyond that, for miles, the country is covered with beautiful villas
+and country residences. You must ride out there, for the environs of
+Copenhagen are as fine as anything in Europe."
+
+"You are right, Joseph," added the doctor. "Some parts of the city are
+not unlike Holland, you see. The Slotsholm canal gives that part of
+the town a decidedly Dutch look."
+
+"The part on Amager, called Christianshavn, is all cut up by canals,"
+added the guide.
+
+"Now, we will take a ride around the city," said Paul Kendall.
+
+The party descended, and having driven through some of the principal
+streets, and obtained a very good idea of the city, returned to the
+hotel.
+
+"Now you can dismiss the carriage, and we will go to some of the
+museums and churches," suggested Joseph.
+
+"We don't care to walk far; we will retain the carriage," replied
+Paul.
+
+"It will be much cheaper to walk, as you have to pay four marks an
+hour for the carriage," pleaded the economical guide. "Thorwaldsen's
+Museum and the Northern Antiquities are only a few steps from here."
+
+"Very well; we will walk, then, if you insist upon it," laughed Paul.
+
+"I thought these guides made you spend as much money as possible,"
+said Captain Lincoln to the surgeon.
+
+"I never found it so. I think they are a very useful class of men.
+They charge here about two rigsdalers a day, and I remember that
+Joseph would not let me throw away a single mark. They know the prices
+for carriages and everything else, and it is for their interest not to
+let any one cheat their employers. Perhaps it is not well to make
+purchases with them, for they compel the merchant to pay them a
+commission, which increases the price charged for the articles. But I
+think, in many places, I have done better with a _commissionnaire_
+than without one, in making purchases."
+
+Joseph led the way across the bridge to Slotsholm, which was nearly
+covered by the immense palace of Christiansborg and its dependencies.
+The first building was Thorwaldsen's Museum, the outer walls of which
+were covered with an Etruscan fresco of the arrival and debarkation of
+the great sculptor and his goods, mostly works of art. The figures are
+about life size, and the situation in which the pictures are placed is
+novel and quaint. The work was done by inlaying cement of different
+colors in the wall. Joseph described the various scenes. Thorwaldsen
+is still held in the highest regard and veneration by all Denmark,
+and especially by all Copenhagen; indeed, he seems to be the great
+genius of the country. He was born in 1770, near the city. His father
+was an Icelander, and a carver in wood--a calling in which the son
+assisted him when he was only a dozen years old. At seventeen he
+received the prize of a silver medal from the Academy of Arts, and at
+twenty-three the grand prize, which carried with it a royal pension,
+that enabled him to go abroad for the study of his art. He went to
+Rome in 1796, where he had but little success, and was reduced almost
+to despair, when his model of Jason and the Golden Fleece attracted
+the attention of an English gentleman, who commissioned him to
+complete the work in marble. This event was the dawn of success, and
+orders continued to pour in upon him from the rich and the powerful,
+including kings and emperors, until his fortune was made. His works
+adorn many of the great cities of Europe, and Canova was his only
+actual rival. His fame extended to every nation, and a visit to his
+native land in 1819 was a triumphal progress through Italy and
+Germany. In 1838 he returned to Copenhagen, to pass the remainder
+of his days, in a frigate sent to Italy for his use by the Danish
+government. On one side of his museum are depicted his arrival in this
+ship, and his reception by the citizens; and on the other side, the
+conveyance of his works from the ship to their final destination.
+Thorwaldsen went to Rome again on a visit for his health, and died in
+Copenhagen in 1844. He was a modest, generous, and amiable man. The
+museum was erected by subscription, though the sculptor gave a
+fourth part of the sum necessary for its erection, and in his will
+bequeathed to it the works of art from his cunning brain, of which its
+contents are almost entirely composed. His biography has been written
+by Hans Christian Andersen.
+
+After examining the frescoes on the outer wall, the party entered the
+building. It is an oblong structure, with a court-yard in the middle.
+It is two stories in height, with connected rooms extending entirely
+around it. The works of art, and memorials of the sculptor, are
+classified in these apartments, forty-two in number.
+
+"That is the grave of Thorwaldsen," said Joseph, leading the way into
+the court-yard. "His body lies there, surrounded by his works, as he
+requested."
+
+The grave is an oblong enclosure of polished granite, raised a few
+inches above the ground, and covered over with ivy. At the foot of it
+is a black cross, with the date of his death inscribed upon it.
+
+The tourists walked through the various rooms, and examined the works
+of the immortal genius, most of which were in plaster, being the
+models of all his great achievements set up in marble in various parts
+of Europe. His pictures, his library, his collections of coins, vases,
+and antiquities, are placed in the museum. One room is fitted up with
+his furniture, precisely as he used it, and various interesting
+mementos of the man are to be seen there. Among the pictures are
+some mere daubs, which are preserved only because they belonged to
+Thorwaldsen; but they have an interest as an illustration of the
+benevolent character of the great sculptor, who ordered many of them
+merely to save the artists from starvation.
+
+"Did you ever see Thorwaldsen?" asked Lincoln, as Joseph conducted
+his charge from the building.
+
+"Often," replied the guide. "He was a venerable-looking old man, with
+long, white hair. He made a statue of himself, which is very like him.
+He died suddenly in the theatre, and the king and royal family
+followed his remains to the church."
+
+The Museum of Northern Antiquities was in the old palace of a prince,
+on the other side of the canal. On the front of the building were some
+quaint carvings, which gave it a picturesque appearance. Joseph seemed
+to be in his element at this museum. He spoke glibly and learnedly of
+"the stone age," "the bronze age," and "the iron age," each designated
+by the material of which the implements used for domestic purposes, in
+war and agriculture, were composed. Numberless utensils of all kinds
+are contained in the cabinets, classified with rare skill, and
+arranged with excellent taste. All these objects were found below
+ground, in various parts of Scandinavia. In Denmark the law requires
+that all antiquities of metal shall belong to the government, which,
+however, pays the full value of the articles to the finder. In 1847 a
+pair of solid gold bracelets, very heavy, and elegantly wrought, were
+dug up from the earth, and added to this collection. There is a great
+variety of ornaments, in gold and silver, consisting of necklaces,
+rings, bracelets, and similar trinkets. One necklace contains three
+pounds of pure gold.
+
+There are plenty of knives, arrow-heads, hatchets, hammers, chisels,
+and other implements, skilfully made of stone. Runic writings, the
+most valuable in the world, are collected here. Joseph said that
+certain long pieces of wood, with signs carved upon them, were
+Icelandic Calendars. The remains of a warrior, who had fought and died
+in the ancient time, with the iron mail of his day, were examined with
+interest, as were also a number of altars, coffers containing relics,
+and some gold crosses, one of which is said to contain a splinter from
+the true cross, which were exhibited as specimens of the Catholic form
+of worship in remote times.
+
+Recrossing the bridge over the canal, the party entered the great,
+barn-like palace of Christiansborg. It consists of several connected
+buildings, containing a theatre, riding-school, stables, coach-houses,
+bake-house, and the usual royal apartments. In 1168 a castle was
+erected on this spot, as a protection against pirates, which was
+repeatedly demolished, rebuilt, altered, and enlarged, till it was
+levelled to the ground in 1732, and a new palace erected, but was
+destroyed by fire in 1784. It was rebuilt, in its present cumbrous
+proportions, in 1828. The visitors entered the large court-yard,
+passed through the picture gallery, the "Hall of the Knights," the
+throne-room, looked into the riding-school,--which is a large, oblong
+room, with an earth floor, where the royal family may practise
+equestrianism,--the arsenal, the legislative chambers, and other
+rooms, none of which were very striking to those who had visited the
+palaces of Paris, London, Berlin, and St. Petersburg.
+
+In front of the palace is a beautiful green, beyond which is the
+Exchange, or Boersen, built by Christian IV. It is the most picturesque
+edifice in the city, though the interior is entirely commonplace. It
+is long and very narrow, and ornamented with a vast number of figures
+cut in the stone, with elegantly-wrought portals at the entrances. But
+the spire is the most remarkable portion of the building, and consists
+of four dragons, the heads at the apex looking towards the four points
+of the compass.
+
+From the Exchange the party walked to the Fruekirke, or Church of our
+Lady, which is interesting only on account of the works of Thorwaldsen
+which it contains. Behind the altar is the majestic and beautiful
+statue of Christ, which stretches out its wounded hands, as if he were
+saying, "Come unto me, ye that labor and are heavy-laden, and I will
+give you rest." On each side of the church are the figures of the
+twelve apostles, placed against the walls at equal distances, so as to
+include the whole extent. In the middle of the choir, in front of the
+altar, is the figure of an angel, holding a baptismal font, in the
+shape of a shell, which some call Thorwaldsen's masterpiece. In the
+sacristy of the church are several other works of the great sculptor,
+who was first interred in this place, before the museum was ready to
+receive his remains.
+
+Mrs. Kendall declared she had seen enough for one day, for
+sight-seeing is the hardest work one can do when it is overdone. After
+supper, when the lady was rested, she consented to visit Tivoli, where
+the students were to spend the evening. This celebrated resort of the
+Copenhageners is situated just outside of the old walls of the city,
+near the arm of the sea which divides Amager from Seeland. One of the
+two horse-railways, which the people in Europe generally persist in
+calling "tramways," extends through the city, passing the gates of
+this garden. Several of the officers and seamen of the ship came by
+the cars, which hardly differ from those in use in the principal
+cities of the United States; but all of them have accommodations for
+passengers on the top.
+
+Captain Lincoln--who had been on board of the ship since he left the
+party with whom he had spent the afternoon--and Norwood were
+passengers in a car; but though they could not speak a word of Norsk,
+they were not disturbed by the situation. Presently the conductor
+presented himself, which caused a general sounding of pockets among
+the occupants of the car. He had a tin box, suspended by a strap,
+which passed around his neck, to contain the money he received. In his
+hand he held a compact little roll of yellow paper, an inch and a half
+in width, across which was printed a succession of little tickets,
+each with a number. The fare was four skillings, or two and one fourth
+cents, and, as each person paid, the conductor handed him one of these
+papers, torn from the roll. Captain Lincoln gave him a piece of money,
+and held up two fingers, pointing to his companion at the same time,
+to indicate that he paid for both. The man gave him his change, and
+two of the yellow tickets.
+
+ [Illustration: Kjobenhavns
+                Sporvei.
+                4 Skilling.
+                904]
+
+"What are these for?" asked Lincoln, glancing at the little papers.
+
+"They are tickets, of course," replied Norwood.
+
+"I don't think so," added the captain. "All the people seem to throw
+them away, and the floor of the car is covered with them."
+
+"O, I know now what they are!" exclaimed Norwood. "I have heard of
+such things."
+
+"I never did."
+
+"I suppose you know what 'knocking down' means--don't you?" laughed
+the second lieutenant.
+
+"It means stealing."
+
+"Precisely so. It is said that conductors and omnibus drivers at home
+'knock down' a good deal, which is the technical name for taking a
+portion of the fares. They use 'spotters' in our country to keep the
+conductors and drivers honest."
+
+"Spotters?"
+
+"Yes, that's the name of them. They are men and women, whom the
+conductors cannot distinguish from other passengers, employed by the
+railway companies to ride in the cars, and report the number of
+passengers on certain trips, so that the agents can tell whether the
+fares are all paid over. These tickets are used for the same purpose."
+
+"I don't see what good they do. They certainly can't keep the men
+honest, for almost everybody throws away his ticket."
+
+"They are called control-marks," said a gentleman next to the captain,
+who had been listening with interest to the conversation, and who
+spoke good English. "The man has to tear one of them off every time a
+passenger pays him."
+
+"They are all numbered, I see; mine is nine hundred and four," added
+Lincoln.
+
+"When the man gives up this roll at night, the next number will show
+how many he has torn off. If he began at No. 200 this morning, he has
+taken seven hundred and four fares."
+
+"But he might neglect to tear off fifty or a hundred in the course of
+a day," suggested Lincoln, "and put the money for them in his pocket."
+
+"If he does so, everybody is watching him, and anybody may report him
+to the agent. I am a share-owner of the company, and for aught the
+conductor knows, there may be one in every car. If the man neglects
+his duty, my interest would prompt me to look after him."
+
+"I see; thank you, sir."
+
+"Here is Tivoli," added the gentleman. "I suppose you are going
+there."
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"It is a fine garden, and very cheap."
+
+The young officers left the car, and bought tickets at the gate, for
+which they paid one mark, or nine cents, each. Near the entrance they
+found a man selling programmes of the evening's entertainment, at two
+skillings each. Captain Lincoln bought one, for he carefully preserved
+every handbill, ticket, or programme for future reference. He could
+read a little of it. The performances were varied, and covered the
+time from six o'clock till midnight. But the young officers preferred
+to take a general view of the premises. It was an extensive garden,
+prettily and tastefully laid out, with accommodations for concerts,
+circus, and theatrical performances. In the centre was a "beer
+garden," with table and seats, for little parties, who drank their
+beer and chatted, while a band played in a kiosk. Near it was a
+bazaar, where all kinds of fancy articles were arranged for sale, with
+the attendant raffles and lotteries. Farther removed from the centre
+was a theatre, consisting, however, of only the stage, the audience
+seating themselves in the open air. The performance, from six to
+seven, as the captain read in his programme, was
+
+    R1. 6. Entree gymnastique af Brodrene Hermann.
+
+Or, in plain English, a gymnastic exhibition by the brothers Hermann.
+
+In the circus there was a performance at half past seven, such as one
+sees in the United States, and "Hr. Wallet" was clown. At half past
+nine o'clock, another exhibition was given in an enclosed building, to
+which an extra admission fee was charged. At the theatre, dancing by
+some "celebrated sisters" was in progress at nine o'clock. A Russian
+mountain was in operation during the whole evening. It was a railroad
+down one inclined plane, and up another, and back over the same track,
+a ride costing a few skillings. The concert was continued at intervals
+during the entire evening. The "_cafe chantant_" was in full blast
+after nine o'clock, in two places, one of which was a small hall, with
+a bar, and the other the interior of a Swiss cottage, with a gallery
+surrounding it. In each of these were tables, where the audience
+seated themselves, and drank brandy, wine, beer, and milder beverages.
+The singers, who are all females, stood upon a stage, and were
+accompanied by a piano. After one or two songs had been sung, one of
+the singers passed around among the audience with a plate to receive
+their contributions, each person generally giving a small copper coin.
+This order was continually repeated, and the money thus received is
+the only salary of the performers, whose singing is villanously vile,
+and whose character is worse than their singing. A canal, extending
+from the sea, comes up to Tivoli, and passes around an island. Boats
+are to let here; and, indeed, there is no end to the variety of
+amusements, and "all for nine cents," as Joseph had said half a dozen
+times during the afternoon to his party, and a dozen times more during
+the evening. At half past ten the students returned to the squadron,
+for by that time they had seen all they desired.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+AN EXCURSION TO KLAMPENBORG AND ELSINORE.
+
+
+Peaks sat near the brig and read his book, which he had procured from
+the librarian in anticipation of a dull and heavy afternoon. Clyde sat
+in his cage, watching the boatswain. The book was evidently a very
+interesting one, for the reader hardly raised his eyes from it for a
+full hour, and then only to bestow a single glance upon the occupant
+of the ship's prison. The volume was Peter Simple, and the boatswain
+relished the adventures of the hero. Once in a while his stalwart
+frame was shaken by an earthquake of laughter, for he had a certain
+sense of dignity which did not permit him to laugh outright all alone
+by himself, and so the shock was diffused through all his members, and
+his body quaked like that of a man in the incipient throes of a fever
+and ague fit. The magnanimous conduct of O'Brien, who flogged Peter
+for seasickness, simply because he loved him, proved to be almost too
+much for the settled plan of the boatswain, and it was with the utmost
+difficulty that he restrained an outbreak of laughter.
+
+For a full quarter of an hour Clyde convinced himself that he was
+entirely satisfied with the situation. The brig was not a bad place,
+or, at least, it would not be, if the boatswain would only leave the
+steerage and allow the prisoner to be by himself. He wished very much
+to try the carpenter's saw upon the slats of his prison. At the end of
+the second quarter of an hour, the Briton was slightly nervous; the
+close of the third found him rather impatient, and at the expiration
+of an hour, he was decidedly provoked with Peaks for staying where he
+was so long. When the stout sentinel glanced at him, he flattered
+himself with a transitory hope; but the boatswain only changed his
+position slightly, and still appeared to be as deeply absorbed as ever
+in the book.
+
+Clyde was disgusted, and emphatically angry at the end of another half
+hour. The brig was a vile place, and putting a free-born Briton into
+such a den was the greatest indignity which had yet been offered to
+him. It was even worse than ordering him to be silent, or to go
+forward. It was an insult which required both redress and vengeance.
+He rose from his seat, and walked to the door of his prison, but with
+his gaze still fixed upon his jailer. He had come to the conclusion
+that, if he moved, Peaks would, at least, look at him; but that worthy
+did not raise his eyes from his book. Clyde took hold of the barred
+door and began to shake it, making considerable noise by the act.
+Peaks took no notice whatever of him, and it seemed just as though the
+boatswain intended to insult him by thus disregarding him. He shook
+the door again with more violence, but did not succeed in attracting
+the attention of his custodian. Then he began to kick the door. Making
+a run of the length of the brig, he threw himself against it with all
+the force he could, hoping to break it down; but he might as well
+have butted against the side of the ship. It yielded a little, and
+rattled a great deal; but it was too strong to be knocked down in any
+such manner.
+
+The prisoner was boiling over with wrath, as much because Peaks did
+not notice him, as on account of the indignity of his confinement.
+He kicked, wrenched, and twisted at the door, till he had nearly
+exhausted his own strength, apparently without affecting that of
+the door. The boatswain still read, and still shook with suppressed
+laughter at the funny blunders and situations of Peter Simple. He had
+seen just such fellows as Clyde in the brig; had seen them behave just
+as the present prisoner did; and he had learned that it was better to
+let them have their own way till they were satisfied, for boys are
+always better satisfied when they solve such problems for themselves.
+
+"I'm not going to stay in this place!" howled Clyde, when he had
+wasted all his powers upon the obstinate door.
+
+"No?"
+
+The boatswain happened to be at the end of a chapter in his book, and
+he closed the volume, uttering only the single negative participle,
+with the interrogative inflection, as he glanced at his charge in the
+brig.
+
+"No, I'm not!" roared Clyde, rousing from his seat, upon which he had
+dropped in sheer exhaustion, and throwing himself desperately against
+the unyielding door. "I won't stay in here any longer!"
+
+"Well, now, I thought you would," added Peaks, with the most provoking
+calmness.
+
+"I won't!"
+
+"But it seems to me that you do stay there."
+
+"I won't any longer."
+
+"Well?"
+
+"I'll send for the British minister."
+
+"Do."
+
+"I won't stand it any longer."
+
+"Sit down, then."
+
+Clyde dashed himself against the door again with all the remaining
+force he had; but the boatswain, apparently unmoved, opened his book
+again. It was terribly lacerating to the feelings of the Briton to be
+so coolly disregarded and ignored. Clyde had the saw, but he had sense
+enough left to know that any attempt to use it would attract the
+attention of his jailer, and end in the loss of the implement, with
+which he could remove a couple of the slats when left alone, or when
+all hands were asleep at night. Finding that violence accomplished
+nothing, he seated himself on his stool,--which, however, was far from
+being the stool of repentance,--and considered the situation more
+calmly. He was in a profuse perspiration from the energy of his
+useless exertions. Perhaps he was conscious that he had made a fool of
+himself, and that his violence was as impolitic as it was useless. In
+a few moments he was as quiet as a lamb, and remained so for half an
+hour, though his bondage was no less galling than before.
+
+"Mr. Peaks," said he, in the gentlest of tones.
+
+"Well, my lad, what shall I do for you?" replied the boatswain,
+closing his book, and going to the door of the brig.
+
+"I'm very thirsty, and want a glass of water. Will you give me one?"
+
+"Certainly, my boy."
+
+The boatswain passed a mug of water through the bars, and Clyde drank
+as though he was really thirsty.
+
+"You have worked hard, and it makes you dry," said Peaks. "You can
+keep a mug of water in the brig if you like."
+
+"I will," replied Clyde, as he placed the mug on the deck, after the
+boatswain had filled it. "Can't you let me out, Mr. Peaks?"
+
+"Certainly I can."
+
+"You will--won't you?"
+
+"With all my heart."
+
+"Do, if you please."
+
+"On certain conditions, you know."
+
+"What conditions?"
+
+"That you won't attempt to run away. But, my lad, it is only a few
+hours since you said the brig was a very nice place, and you would
+grow gray in it before you would promise not to leave when you got a
+good chance."
+
+"I hadn't tried it, then. But I think it is an insult to a fellow to
+put him in here. I would rather be flogged outright."
+
+"We don't flog the boys."
+
+"I would rather take a flogging, and have it done with."
+
+"That's one of the reasons why we don't do it. We don't want to have
+it done with till the boy means to do about right. You are a smart
+boy, my lad; but you have got a heap of bad blood in your veins,
+which ought to be worked off. If you would only do your duty like a
+man, you would be comfortable and happy."
+
+"I never can stay in this ship."
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"I don't understand the duty."
+
+"You will soon learn all the ropes in the ship, and they will all come
+as handy to you as the key of your own watch."
+
+Clyde pulled out his watch, and glanced at the boatswain.
+
+"That's a nice time-keeper you have, my lad; gold, I suppose."
+
+"Yes; it cost thirty pounds. Wouldn't you like it?"
+
+"I?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Well, I have a pretty good silver one, which answers my purpose very
+well," replied Peaks, smiling.
+
+"I'll give it to you, if you will let me out, and permit me to go on
+shore," added Clyde, in an insinuating tone.
+
+"Thank you, my lad, I don't want it bad enough to do that."
+
+"You can sell it, you know. Or I will give you thirty pounds in cash,
+if you prefer."
+
+"I can't afford to do it for that," laughed the boatswain.
+
+"I'll give you fifty pounds then," persisted Clyde.
+
+"Can't afford to do it for that, either."
+
+"Say sixty, then."
+
+"Say a hundred, if you like, my lad; and then say a thousand. I can't
+afford to do it for all the money your mother is worth. You are on
+the wrong tack, my lad. I can't be bought at any price."
+
+"I won't ask you to let me out. If you will only go on deck, and keep
+out of the way, I will manage it all myself."
+
+"No, no; sheer off, my hearty. When I have a duty to do, I always mean
+to do it; and if it isn't done, it isn't my fault. You can't leave the
+ship with my consent."
+
+"I can't stay here, I say. I should die in a month."
+
+"Very well, die like a man, then," said Peaks, good-naturedly; for,
+though he could not be bought at any price, he did not indulge in any
+righteous indignation against his victim. "Learn your duty, and then
+do it. There is plenty of fun going on in the ship, and you will enjoy
+yourself as soon as you get on the right tack. That's the up and down
+of the whole matter."
+
+"I can't take off my cap to these young squirts of officers, and be
+ordered around by them. It isn't in an Englishman to do anything of
+the sort."
+
+"Upon my word, I think it is in them. They make first-rate sailors,
+and always obey their officers."
+
+"Common sailors do; but I'm a gentleman."
+
+"So am I; but I always obey orders," replied the democratic Peaks,
+warmly. "The officers of this ship are required to behave like
+gentlemen, and give their orders in a gentlemanly manner. If they
+don't do it, they are liable to be reduced. Do your duty, and you may
+be an officer yourself."
+
+Peaks continued for some time to give the prisoner good advice,
+assuring him that he was no better than the rest of the crew, and
+that it would not hurt him any more than others to obey the orders of
+the officers. But it was sowing seed in stony ground, and Clyde,
+finding he could make nothing out of the honest boatswain, decided to
+await his time with what patience he could command, which, however,
+was not much. Peaks was permitted to follow Peter Simple in his
+stirring career during the rest of the afternoon. The crew returned
+from Tivoli at eleven in the evening, and soon the ship was quiet,
+with only an anchor watch, consisting of an officer on the
+quarter-deck, and two seamen on the forecastle.
+
+Clyde's supper was given to him in his prison, and a bed made up for
+his use. He kept awake till all the students came on board, and while
+he was waiting for the crew to slumber, he dropped asleep himself, and
+did not wake till all hands were called in the morning. He was vexed
+with himself for his neglect, and afraid that the carpenter would miss
+the saw, and remember where he had left it. He was determined to keep
+awake the next night, and make his escape, even if he was obliged to
+swim to the land.
+
+After breakfast, all the students went on shore for an excursion to
+Klampenborg and Elsinore. In the custom-house enclosure, a procession
+of four in a rank was formed, to march to the railroad station, which
+was near the Tivoli Garden. The students were generally rather fond of
+processions, not at home, but in the streets of foreign cities. The
+parade was quite imposing, when every officer and seaman wore his best
+uniform. They had been carefully taught to march, and Professor Badois
+had organized a band of eight pieces, which performed a few tunes
+very well. Unfortunately, on the present occasion, the band was not
+available, for Stockwell, the cornet player, and Boyden, the bass
+drummer, belonged to the absent crew of the second cutter, and the
+procession moved to the sterling notes of the drum and fife.
+
+On parades of this kind, the first and second pursers acted as the
+fleet staff of the commodore, who would otherwise have been "alone in
+his glory," and these two useful officers seemed like "odds and ends"
+in any other position. As this procession was frequently formed, and
+marched through the streets of various cities, the order is given to
+satisfy the reasonable curiosity of the reader.
+
+                      Music.
+                 The Commodore,
+             And Staff of the Fleet.
+        The Captain of the Young America.
+                The Four Masters.
+              The Four Midshipmen.
+             The First Lieutenant.
+     The First Part of the Starboard Watch,
+         Consisting of Eighteen Seamen.
+             The Second Lieutenant.
+    The Second Part of the Starboard Watch.
+             The Third Lieutenant.
+       The First Part of the Port Watch.
+             The Fourth Lieutenant.
+       The Second Part of the Port Watch.
+         The Captain of the Josephine.
+                The Four Masters.
+              The First Lieutenant.
+     The First Part of the Starboard Watch,
+           Consisting of Eight Seamen.
+             The Second Lieutenant.
+     The Second Part of the Starboard Watch.
+             The Third Lieutenant.
+        The First Part of the Port Watch.
+             The Fourth Lieutenant.
+       The Second Part of the Port Watch.
+          The Captain of the Tritonia.
+               The Four Masters.
+             The First Lieutenant.
+    The First Part of the Starboard Watch,
+          Consisting of Eight Seamen.
+            The Second Lieutenant.
+    The Second Part of the Starboard Watch.
+            The Third Lieutenant.
+       The First Part of the Port Watch.
+            The Fourth Lieutenant.
+       The Second Part of the Port Watch.
+
+Sometimes the order was varied by placing all the officers at the head
+of the procession, except the lieutenants in command of sections,
+as,--
+
+           The Commodore and Staff.
+             The three Captains.
+           Three ranks of Masters.
+           One rank of Midshipmen.
+
+But keeping all the officers and seamen of each vessel together, as in
+the first order, was generally preferred. Of course the ranks were not
+always full, as on the present occasion; but even when the full band
+was at the head of the column, there were enough for four full ranks
+in each half-watch of the ship, and two ranks in those of the other
+vessels. The students had practised so much that they marched
+exceedingly well, and being aligned according to their height, the
+effect was very fine. The Copenhageners left their occupations, and
+hastened to the doors and windows of their houses and shops to see the
+procession; and even the king and royal family were spectators at the
+palace windows, as the column moved through Frederiksplads. As it
+passed the Royal Hotel, Mr. and Mrs. Kendall, with Dr. Winstock and
+Joseph, were entering a carriage, in which they intended to ride to
+Klampenborg, in order to see more of the country. At the railroad
+station, the officers and seamen took seats in the third-class
+carriages, which were two stories high, the upper as well as the lower
+one having a roof. The distance to Klampenborg is eight and a half
+English miles, and the fare is sixteen skillings, or nine cents, third
+class; twenty-four skillings, or thirteen and a half cents, second
+class; and thirty-two skillings, or eighteen cents, first class. The
+third-class compartments are clean and neat, but there are no cushions
+on the seats. An aisle extends through the middle of them, but the
+seats are placed in pairs, on each side, so that half the passengers
+are compelled to ride backwards. In about half an hour the train
+arrived at Klampenborg.
+
+Paul Kendall's party drove first to the summer residence of Mr.
+Melchoir, which was in the suburbs of the city, near the sea-shore.
+The house was a very pretty one, with a neat garden, not unlike the
+little country places one sees in the vicinity of the large cities of
+the United States. Joseph rang the bell, and stated the errand of the
+party to the servant. They were shown up one flight of stairs, where
+the girl knocked at the door, which was immediately opened by
+Hans Christian Andersen, and the tourists were ushered into a
+plainly-furnished room, with a few engravings on the walls. On a table
+were the writing-materials of the great author, and Paul looked with
+interest at the little pile of letter sheets, closely written over,
+and the unfinished one, on which the ink was not yet dry.
+
+Mr. Andersen's face was covered with a smile as he greeted the party.
+Dr. Winstock had met him before, and stated the fact.
+
+"O, I'm very glad to see you again," said the author, grasping the
+doctor's hand with both of his own.
+
+"My young friend here, and his lady, have both read all your books,
+and desired to see you even more than to look upon the beautiful works
+of your great sculptor."
+
+"Ah, you are very kind," added Mr. Andersen, again grasping the
+doctor's hand with both of his own.
+
+Then, darting nervously to Paul, he seized his hand in the same
+manner.
+
+"This is Captain Paul Kendall, commander of the yacht Grace," added
+Dr. Winstock.
+
+"I am so pleased to see you!" said Mr. Andersen.
+
+"I have read all your books with the most intense pleasure."
+
+"O, you are too kind, Captain Kendall," replied the genial author,
+smiling all over his face, and once more grasping his hand as before.
+
+"Mrs. Kendall," added Paul, presenting Grace.
+
+"I am so pleased to see you! You are very kind to take so much trouble
+to visit me."
+
+"Indeed, sir, you are very kind to permit us to trouble you, when you
+are so busy," continued Paul.
+
+"O, I have plenty of time to see my good friends."
+
+"In America we love your books, and they are in all our libraries and
+most of our houses."
+
+"You are so kind to speak so pleasantly of my works!" replied Mr.
+Andersen, grasping Paul's hand again.
+
+"We value them very highly."
+
+The conversation continued for a few moments, in which Paul and the
+doctor expressed the high appreciation of the reading public of the
+great writer's works. At least a dozen times more he grasped the hand
+of the speaker with both his. Mr. Andersen is a tall gentleman, with
+a thin face,--the features of which are far from handsome,--and
+iron-gray hair. His countenance is always covered with smiles when he
+speaks, and his whole manner is child-like and simple. He is full of
+the love of God and of man, which seems to shine out in his face, and
+to be the interpretation of his ever-present smile. His dress was
+scrupulously neat and nice in every detail.
+
+The doctor told him about the Academy squadron, of which he had read a
+brief notice in the newspapers, and invited him to visit the ship,
+which he promised to do, on the following day. The party took their
+leave of him, and continued on the way to Klampenborg. The road was
+on the margin of the sea, and was lined with small country houses,
+with pleasant gardens. It was a lovely region, with an occasional
+large villa, and even a summer palace or two. All along this road,
+called the Strandway, are small and large houses of entertainment, on
+the sea-side, each one of which has a bathing establishment on a very
+small and simple scale.
+
+"Here is Charlottelund Castle, in this park," said Joseph, as they
+passed what seemed to be merely a grove, with a rather dilapidated
+fence.
+
+"It was formerly the country-seat of the Landgrave of Hesse, I
+believe," added Dr. Winstock.
+
+"Yes, sir; but it is now the summer residence of the crown prince. He
+comes out here in June."
+
+"These carriages are called 'privateers,'" continued the guide,
+pointing to several vehicles like a small omnibus with no top. "They
+formerly went by the name of 'coffee-mills,' because they made a noise
+like those machines."
+
+Constantia Tea-Garden, where the Copenhageners go to spend the evening
+in hot weather, and several fishing villages, were passed, and then
+the carriage reached the Deer Park, where the students had already
+arrived, which is a very extensive enclosure, with a few roads
+extending through it. A portion of it is covered with groves, and
+it contains about a thousand deer, which are quite tame, and may
+be seen grazing in herds on the gentle slopes. There is nothing very
+attractive in the park, though it is much frequented by the people
+from the city. Neither the roads nor the grounds are well kept, and
+the government "turns an honest penny" by the letting of it out for
+the pasturage of horses. On some rising ground, which Denmarkers
+call a hill, is a large, square, barn-like building, known as the
+"Hermitage," which was built by Christian VI. for a hunting lodge.
+This park and that at Charlottelund contain thousands of acres of
+excellent land, which is almost useless, and which the government
+cannot afford to keep in condition as pleasure-grounds. They would
+make thousands of farms, and thus increase the productive industry and
+the revenues of the nation, if they could be cut up and sold. Royalty
+is an expensive luxury, which a small kingdom like Denmark cannot
+afford to support.
+
+Near the entrance to the park is the garden proper of Klampenborg,
+where music is provided on summer evenings, and refreshments sold.
+What is called a Norwegian house is erected in the middle of the
+grounds, which contains a bar and private rooms, and is surrounded
+by tables and chairs, where the pleasure-seekers may sit and enjoy
+their beer and the music. A small fee for admission is paid at the
+gate, where the ticket-seller is kept honest by the aid of the
+"control-mark." Near this garden is a hotel built for a water-cure
+establishment, though it is now mainly used as a summer
+boarding-house. Close by it is a village of small cottages, devoted to
+the same use, with concert-rooms and bathing-houses in abundance. This
+place is a favorite resort of the Copenhageners in summer,--in fact,
+their Newport or Long Branch. For a couple of hours the students
+wandered through the park and gardens. The railroad station is very
+near the entrance, where, indeed, the whole beauty of the place is
+concentrated.
+
+The railway to Klampenborg is a branch of the one which extends from
+Copenhagen to Elsinore, and in another hour the entire party were
+transported to the latter place. This town has nine or ten thousand
+inhabitants, and is located on a basin of the Sound, nearly
+land-locked by natural and artificial dikes. The Danish name of the
+place is Helsingoer, and is the scene of Shakespeare's tragedy of
+Hamlet. The excursionists visited the cathedral, which is the
+principal object of interest in Elsinore, and contains several very
+old tombs. Near the town, and on the shore of the Sound, is the Castle
+of Kronberg, erected in 1580. It is a large, oblong, Gothic structure,
+built of a whitish stone. It contains a chapel and other apartments.
+Those occupied by the commandant were the prison of Caroline Matilda,
+who was confined here for a high crime, of which she is now
+universally believed to be innocent.
+
+Under the castle are casemates for a thousand men, one of which is
+said to be the abode of _Holger Danske_, who was the Cid Campeador of
+Denmark, and the hero of a thousand legends. When the state is in
+peril, he is supposed to march at the head of the armies, but never
+shows himself at any other time. A farmer, says the story, happened
+into his gloomy retreat by accident, and found him seated at a stone
+table, to which his long white beard had grown. The mystic hero
+demanded the hand of his visitor, who was afraid to trust flesh and
+blood in the grasp of one so mighty, and offered the iron bar used to
+fasten the door. Holger Danske seized it, and squeezed it so hard that
+he left the print of his fingers on the iron.
+
+"Ha, I see there are still _men_ in Denmark!" said he, with a grim
+smile of satisfaction.
+
+Near the castle are a couple of natural ponds, small and round, which
+are called "Holger Danske's Spectacles."
+
+"This is where Hamlet lived, I suppose," said Captain Lincoln.
+
+"Where Shakespeare says he lived," replied Dr. Winstock.
+
+"But I was told his grave was here."
+
+"Perhaps Hamlet divided himself up, and occupied a dozen graves, for I
+think you may find a dozen of them here," laughed the doctor. "A
+resident of this vicinity had what was called the grave of Hamlet in
+his grounds, which proved to be a nuisance to him, on account of the
+great number of visitors who came to see it. In order to relieve
+himself of this injury to his garden, he got up another 'grave of
+Hamlet,' in another place, which he proved to be the authentic one."
+
+"It is too bad to trifle with history in that manner," protested the
+captain.
+
+"There is no history about it, Lincoln. His residence in this part of
+Denmark is all a fiction. Shakespeare makes terrible blunders in his
+allusions to this place; for there is no 'eastern hill,' no 'dreadful
+summit of the cliff,' or anything of the sort. Hamlet lived in
+Jutland, not in Seeland, about four centuries before Christ, and was
+the son of a pirate chief, instead of a king, who, with his brother,
+was governor of the province. He married the daughter of the king,
+who was Hamlet's mother. The chief was murdered by his brother, who
+married the widow, and was then the sole governor. Hamlet, in order to
+avenge his father's death, feigned madness; but his uncle, suspecting
+the trick, sent him to England, with a message carved in wood,
+requesting the king to destroy him. During the voyage, he obtained the
+wooden letter, and altered it so as to make it ask for the killing of
+the two men, creatures of his uncle, who had charge of him, which was
+done on their arrival. According to the style of romances, he married
+the king's daughter, and afterwards returned to Jutland, where, still
+pretending insanity, he contrived to surprise and slay his uncle. He
+succeeded his victim as governor, and married a second time, to a
+queen of Scotland, and was finally killed in battle. The main features
+of the tragedy correspond with the incidents of the story, but the
+locality is not correct."
+
+The party walked to Marienlyst, a pleasant watering-place, which
+contains a small royal chateau. The view from this place, as from the
+tower of Kronberg, is very beautiful. At four o'clock the party took
+the steamer, and arrived at Copenhagen before dark.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+TO STOCKHOLM BY GOETA CANAL.
+
+
+The Wadstena, in which the absentees had taken passage at Gottenburg,
+was a small steamer, but very well fitted up for one of her size.
+Forward was the saloon, in which meals were taken, and saloon
+passengers slept. Aft was the cabin, on each side of which were
+state-rooms, called "huette." They were not made with regular berths,
+but had a sofa on each side of the door, on which the beds were made
+up at night, with a wash-stand between them. Between this cabin and
+the forward saloon the main deck was raised about three feet, so as to
+cover the engine and boilers. On each side of this higher deck were
+more "huette," which were the best rooms on board. The hurricane-deck,
+over the after cabin, was the favorite resort of the passengers.
+
+It was two o'clock in the morning, and the independent excursionists
+were tired and sleepy. They had taken first-class tickets, and two of
+them had been assigned to each "huette." As soon as they went on board,
+therefore, they retired, and most of them slept, in spite of the fleas
+and other vermin that revelled in their banquet of blood. None but
+very tired boys could have slumbered under such unfavorable
+circumstances, and it is a great pity that a steamer otherwise so
+neat and comfortable should be given up to the dominion of these
+sleep-destroying insects.
+
+At seven the party turned out, anxious to see the scenery on the banks
+of the canal. The steamer was still in the river, a stream not more
+than a hundred and fifty feet wide, with occasional rapids, which are
+passed by canals, with locks in them. The scenery was pleasant, with
+rocky hills on each side. Schooners and other craft were continually
+met, loaded with lumber and other articles from the lakes. The scene
+was novel and interesting, and though the boys gaped fearfully, they
+enjoyed the view.
+
+Presently one of the women, who do all the work of stewards and
+waiters, appeared with coffee on deck, passing the cups to the
+passengers first, and then filling them. The coffee was delicious,
+served with the whitest of sugar and the richest of cream, with some
+little biscuits. It waked the boys up, and seemed to make new beings
+of them.
+
+"How's this, Sanford?" said Scott.
+
+"First rate! That's the best coffee I ever drank in my life," replied
+the coxswain.
+
+"Is it a free blow?"
+
+"I don't know. How is it, Ole?"
+
+"No; you pay at the end of the trip for all you have had," replied the
+waif.
+
+"But who keeps the account?" asked Scott.
+
+"Nobody," laughed Ole. "On the boats from Christiania every passenger
+tells what he has had, and pays for it."
+
+"Do they think everybody is honest?"
+
+"Certainly; everybody is honest."
+
+"Not much," added Sanford, shaking his head. "Of course you don't
+pretend to be honest, Norway."
+
+"But I do."
+
+"You didn't take a sovereign from me, and another from Burchmore--did
+you?"
+
+"I take what you give me."
+
+"It may be honest, but I don't see it in that light, Norway."
+
+"Never mind that now, Sanford," interposed Burchmore. "He sold out the
+last time for the public good."
+
+"Do you expect to find the ship in Stockholm when we get there?" asked
+Scott.
+
+"Of course I do," replied Sanford. "We shall not get there till
+Tuesday."
+
+"Then our cruise is almost ended."
+
+"I suppose so. I have been trying hard to join the ship ever since we
+left her at Christiansand," continued the coxswain, solemnly.
+
+"Over the left," chuckled Scott.
+
+"Honor bright! I don't believe in running away."
+
+"Nor I; but Laybold and I have put our foot into it. I suppose we
+shall have to spend a week in the brig, and make love to Peaks while
+the rest of the fellows are seeing Russia."
+
+"You will find some way to get out of the scrape."
+
+"I don't know. We have lost Copenhagen and Denmark already, and I
+suppose we shall not see much of Russia."
+
+"We will help you out."
+
+"I don't think you can do it," added Scott, who had evidently come to
+the conclusion that running away "did not pay."
+
+The steamer stopped, and the captain informed the party that
+passengers usually walked three miles around the series of locks, by
+which they were enabled to see the Falls of Trollhaetten. The carrying
+of the canal around these falls was the most difficult problem in
+engineering in the construction of the work. It is cut through the
+solid rock, and contains sixteen locks. The passage of the steamer
+occupies an hour and a half, which affords ample time for the voyagers
+to see the falls. The party immediately landed, and were promptly
+beset by a dozen ragged boys, who desired to act as guides, where no
+such persons are needed. Not one of them spoke a word of English; but
+they led the way to the path, each one selecting his own victims, and
+trusting to the magnanimity of the passengers for their pay. A walk,
+covered with saw-dust, has been made by some public-spirited persons,
+and the excursion is a very pleasant one.
+
+The entire fall of the river is one hundred and twelve feet; but it is
+made in four principal cataracts, and three smaller ones. The scenery
+in the vicinity is rather picturesque, and at one point the path goes
+through a grove, on the banks of a rivulet, where the water dashes
+over large cobble-stones, with an occasional pretty cascade. The walk
+leads to various eligible spots for examining the falls and the
+rapids. On the way, the tourist passes _Kungsgrottan_, or King's
+Grotto. It is a hole in the solid rock, in the shape of half a
+globe, on the sides of which are inscribed the names of the various
+sovereigns of Sweden, and other distinguished persons who have visited
+the spot. Near the village of Trollhaetten, which contains several
+founderies and saw-mills, the finest part of the falls is seen by
+crossing an iron foot-bridge, at the gate of which stands a woman, who
+collects a toll of fifty oere for the passage to the little island.
+
+"I don't think much of these falls," said Scott, as he returned from
+the island.
+
+"I think they are rather fine," replied Laybold.
+
+"You could cut up the rapids of Niagara into about two hundred just
+such falls, to say nothing of the big cataract itself," added Scott.
+"It is pleasant, this walk along the river, but you can't call the
+Falls of Trollhaetten a big thing."
+
+"Of course they don't compare with Niagara."
+
+"Certainly not."
+
+The party walked through the yards of the manufactories, and came to a
+small hotel on the bank of the canal. The place looked very much like
+many American villages. The canal steamer did not appear for half an
+hour, and some of the boys strolled about the place. The regiment of
+ragged boys who had followed the tourists, or led the way, pointing
+out the various falls and other points of interest in an unknown
+tongue, begged lustily for the payment for their services. One of
+them, who had taken Scott and Laybold under his protection, was
+particularly urgent in his demands.
+
+"Not a red, my hearty," replied Scott. "I didn't engage you, and I
+shall not pay you."
+
+The boy still held out his hand, and said something which no one of
+the party could understand.
+
+"Exactly so," replied Scott. "You told me the names of all the places,
+but I did not understand a word you said. I say, my lad, when did you
+escape from the rag-bag?"
+
+The boy uttered a few words in Swedish.
+
+"Is that so?"
+
+The boy spoke again.
+
+"Stick to it, my hearty; but I don't believe a word of it."
+
+"What does he say, Scott?"
+
+"He says the moon is made of green cheese. Didn't you, my lad?"
+
+The boy nodded, and spoke again.
+
+"It is a hard case, Young Sweden; but I can't do anything for you."
+
+"What's a hard case, Scott?" asked Laybold.
+
+"Why, he says he has six fathers and five mothers, and he has to
+support them all by guiding tourists round the falls."
+
+"Get out!"
+
+"I am afraid they don't have roast beef for dinner every day."
+
+"Here's the steamer," added Laybold.
+
+The boy became more importunate as the time came to go on board, but
+Scott was obstinate.
+
+"Now, out of my way, my lad. Give my regards to your six fathers and
+five mothers, and I'll remember you in my will; but I won't give you a
+solitary red now, because I don't like the principle of the thing. I
+didn't employ you, and I didn't want you. I told you so, and shook my
+head at you, and told you to get behind me, Satan, and all that sort
+of thing; and now I'm not going to pay you for making a nuisance of
+yourself. On the naked question of charity, I could do something for
+you, on account of your numerous fathers and mothers. As it is, good
+by, Sweden;" and Scott went on board of the steamer.
+
+The boat started again, and soon the bell rang for breakfast. The boys
+hastened to the forward saloon, where they found two tables spread. At
+a sideboard was the Swedish lunch, or snack, of herring, sliced
+salmon, various little fishes, sausage, and similar delicacies, with
+the universal decanter of "finkel," flanked with a circle of wine
+glasses. The tourists partook of the eatables, but most of them were
+wise enough to avoid the drinkable. The Swedish bread, which is a
+great brown cracker, about seven inches in diameter, was considered
+very palatable. Ordinary white bread is served on steamers and at
+hotels, and also a dark-colored bread, which looks like rye, and is
+generally too sour for the taste of a foreigner. The breakfast at the
+tables consisted of fried veal, and fish, with vegetables, and all the
+elements of the snack. When the boys had finished, one of the women
+handed Scott a long narrow blank book.
+
+"Thank you, marm; I am much obliged to you," said he. "Will you have
+the kindness to inform me what this is for?"
+
+The woman laughed, and answered him in her native tongue.
+
+"Precisely so," added Scott.
+
+"What does she say?" asked Sanford.
+
+"She wants me to write a love letter in this book to her; but as she
+is rather ancient, I shall decline in your favor, Sanford."
+
+"Don't do it, old fellow! Face the music."
+
+"Not for Joseph!"
+
+"What did she say, Ole?" inquired Sanford.
+
+"She said you were to keep your account in that book," replied the
+interpreter.
+
+"Are we to keep our own reckoning?"
+
+"Yes; every one puts down in this book what he has had."
+
+"That means you, Burchmore. You are the cashier for the party."
+
+"How many fellows had coffee this morning?" asked the cashier, as he
+took the book.
+
+"All of them, of course."
+
+Burchmore made the entries for the coffee and the breakfasts of the
+whole party.
+
+"Well, that's one way to do the thing," said Scott. "Every man his own
+book-keeper. I'll bet everybody doesn't charge what he has had."
+
+Ole was requested to ask the woman about the matter. She said the
+Swedes were honest, but the waiters were required to see that
+everybody paid for what he had had before leaving the steamer. The
+having of this book is certainly a better plan than that of the
+Norwegian steamers, by which the passenger, if he means to be honest,
+is compelled to recollect all he has had in a passage of thirty hours.
+
+The Wadstena continued on her course through a rather flat country,
+just coming into the greenness and beauty of the spring time, till she
+came to Wenersberg, a town of five thousand inhabitants, which is
+largely engaged in the lumber and iron trade. The boat stopped there
+a short time, and the party had an opportunity to examine the lake
+craft at the wharves; but, after seeing them, it was difficult to
+believe they were not in some New England coast town. The steamers,
+however, were very different, all of them being very short, to enable
+them to pass through the locks in the canal, and most of them having
+the hurricane deck forward and aft, to afford sufficient space for the
+cabins. All of them were propellers.
+
+The Wadstena started again, the bridges opening to permit her passage.
+The great Wenern Lake lay before them, which is the third in size in
+Europe, Onega and Ladoga alone exceeding it in extent. It is about a
+hundred miles long by fifty in breadth, very irregular in shape, and
+portions of it are densely crowded with islands. Its greatest depth
+is three hundred and sixty feet near the Island of Luroe, but a
+considerable part of it is very shallow, and difficult of navigation.
+It is one hundred and forty-five feet above the level of the Baltic.
+Thirty rivers flow into it, and sometimes cause it to rise ten feet
+above its ordinary level. But the Goeta River is its only outlet, and
+is always supplied with an abundant volume of water. The wind was
+fresh when the Wadstena steamed out upon the broad expanse, and the
+lake had a decidedly stormy aspect.
+
+"Will you be seasick?" asked the captain, as the little steamer began
+to bob up and down with a very uncomfortable jerk.
+
+"Seasick!" laughed Scott. "We are all sailors, sir, and we don't
+intend to cave in on a fresh-water pond."
+
+"But the lake is very rough to-day."
+
+"If your little tub can stand it, captain, we can."
+
+"I am very glad, for some people are very sick on this part of the
+passage. It is sometimes very bad, the worst we have in the whole
+trip."
+
+"How long are we on the lake?" asked Scott.
+
+"About seven hours; but not all of it is so bad as this. We go among
+the islands by and by."
+
+Doubtless the Wenern Lake fully maintained its reputation on the
+present occasion, though none of the young salts were sick. The boat
+stood to the northward, and the short steamer and the short chop sea
+would have made the passage very trying to landsmen. Nothing but the
+distant shores were to be seen, and the monotony of the passage was
+the only disagreeable circumstance to our tourists. For the want of
+something better to do, they went below, and, lying down on the sofas
+in their state-rooms, went to sleep without much difficulty, for
+the red-backs and fleas kept shady in the daytime. The boys were
+accustomed to being "rocked in the cradle of the deep;" but at the
+expiration of three hours, the heavy motion ceased, and the change
+waked them. Going on the hurricane deck again, they found the steamer
+was among the islands, which were generally low, rocky, and covered
+with firs and pines. A crooked channel was carefully buoyed off, and
+the boat was threading its tortuous way with no little difficulty.
+
+Presently the Wadstena made a landing at a rude pier on an island
+where only a rough shanty was in sight. Several row-boats at the wharf
+indicated that passengers came to this station from other islands.
+Again the steamer went out upon the open lake, and soon after entered
+another group of islands, among which she made a landing at a small
+town. Passing over another open space, the entrance to the canal was
+discovered, marked by two low light-houses, in the form of the frustum
+of a pyramid. As the Wadstena entered a lock, the captain told the
+party they might take a walk if they pleased, as there were several
+locks to pass in the next three miles. This was a grateful relief to
+the voyagers, and they gladly availed themselves of the opportunity.
+The country was a dead level, with an occasional small farm-house, and
+with many groves and forests. But the walk was interesting, and the
+boys would gladly have continued it longer; but at the last lock of
+the series, the gate-man told them, through Ole, that they must wait
+here in order to go on board, for the steamer could not make a landing
+again for several miles. The party remained on the hurricane deck till
+the cold and the darkness drove them below. Turning in at an early
+hour, they slept as well as the vermin would allow, until six o'clock
+the next morning, when the steamer was approaching the Wettern Lake,
+the second in size in Sweden. The boat was on a broad arm of the lake,
+called the Viken, for the canal is built only across the narrowest
+section of country, between two natural bodies of water.
+
+The Wettern Lake is ninety miles long and fifteen miles wide,
+surrounded by hills, from which sudden gusts of wind come, producing
+violent squalls on the water. This lake is noted for big trout. After
+crossing the Wettern, the steamer approached Wadstena, which contains
+an ancient church and convent, and a castle built by Gustavus Vasa,
+and often occupied by his family. Ten miles farther brought the
+steamer to Motala, which contains several iron founderies and
+manufactories. Many iron steamers and steam engines are built at this
+place. The scenery on this portion of the canal is very beautiful,
+though not grand. Going through another portion of the artificial
+canal, the boat enters the Roxen Lake, perhaps the most beautiful in
+Sweden, and makes a landing at Linkoeping. There are half a dozen towns
+with this termination in the country, as Norrkoeping, Soederkoeping,
+Joenkoeping, the last two syllables being pronounced like _chepping_;
+as, Lin-chep-ping.
+
+Leaving the Roxen Lake, the steamer passes through more canals into an
+arm of the Baltic, and then into the sea itself, voyaging among a
+thousand small islands, stopping at Soederkoeping and Nykoeping,
+important commercial and manufacturing towns. Night came, and our
+tourists did not stay up to see the lights on the way. The steamer
+leaves the Baltic, and passing another piece of canal, enters the
+waters of the Maeler Lake, seventy-five miles long, and containing
+fourteen hundred islands. The boys were up in season to see the
+beauties of this lake. Many of the islands rise to a considerable
+height above the water, and are so thick that one hardly believes he
+is sailing on a large lake. For quiet beauty and "eternal stillness,"
+the Maeler can hardly be surpassed. In the middle of the forenoon,
+the spires of Stockholm were to be seen, and the tourists were all
+attention. From the lake the city presents a fine appearance. Indeed,
+Stockholm, seen from either of its water approaches, is hardly
+excelled in beauty by any city in Europe.
+
+The Wadstena made her landing at the Island of Riddarholm. As the
+party were not burdened with any baggage, they decided to walk to the
+hotel. Ole inquired the way to the Hotel Rydberg, where they had
+agreed to go; and crossing a bridge to the largest of the three
+islands of the city, called Stadeholm, they arrived at the palace,
+beyond which is the quay. Between this island and the main land, on
+which the greater portion of the town is built, is the passage from
+the Baltic to the Maeler Lake, and in the middle of it is the Island of
+Helgeandsholm, or Holy Ghost's Island, with two bridges connecting it
+with either side. On it are the king's stables, and a semicircular
+garden, improved as a _cafe_, with a handsome face wall on the water
+side.
+
+"This isn't bad," said Scott, as the party paused to look down into
+the garden.
+
+"Not at all," replied Sanford. "I suppose they have music here in the
+evening, and it would be a capital place to loaf."
+
+"See the steamers!" exclaimed Laybold, as a couple of the miniature
+craft, which abound in the waters of Stockholm, whisked up to the
+quay.
+
+"A fellow could put half a dozen of them into his trousers pocket,"
+laughed Scott. "We must go on a cruise in some of them, as soon as we
+get settled."
+
+"Well, where's the hotel?" asked Sanford.
+
+It was in plain sight from the bridge, which they crossed to the
+Square of Gustavus Adolphus, on which the hotel faced.
+
+"Good morning, young gentlemen. I am happy to see you," said Mr.
+Blaine, the head steward of the ship, who was the first person to
+greet them as they entered the hotel.
+
+"Ah, Mr. Blaine!" exclaimed Sanford, his face glowing with apparent
+satisfaction. "I am delighted to see you; for I was afraid we should
+never find the ship."
+
+"Were you, indeed? Well, I had the same fear myself. I have been
+looking for you ever since the ship sailed."
+
+"We have done our best to find the ship, Mr. Blaine," added Sanford.
+
+"O, of course you have; but of course, as you didn't find her, you
+were not so babyish as to sit down and cry about it."
+
+"Certainly not; still we were very anxious to find her."
+
+"Mr. Peaks says you came down from Christiania before he did."
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"And you were so anxious to find the ship, that you took a train to
+the interior of the country, expecting, no doubt, to come across her
+on some hill, or possibly on some of these inland lakes," continued
+Mr. Blaine.
+
+"We were looking for the ship's company. We met Scott and Laybold, who
+were going into the interior, and we concluded to join them, as they
+wanted to find their shipmates," replied Sanford, who was now not
+entirely confident that "the independent excursion without running
+away" was a success.
+
+"Ah! so you have picked up those two young gentlemen, who ran away,"
+added the head steward, glancing at Scott and Laybold.
+
+"Not exactly, sir; they picked us up," answered the coxswain.
+
+"I think it was a mutual picking up, and we picked each other up,"
+laughed Scott. "We knew that Sanford and his crew were extremely
+anxious to find the ship's company, and if we joined them we should be
+sure to come out right."
+
+"Exactly so," laughed Mr. Blaine. "Let me see; after our first day's
+run on shore, by some mistake you neglected to come on board at night,
+with the others."
+
+"That was the case exactly. The fact is, we were too drunk to go on
+board with the others."
+
+"Drunk!" exclaimed Mr. Blaine.
+
+"Such was our melancholy condition, sir," added Scott, shaking his
+head. "We were invited, in a restaurant, to drink 'finkel,' and not
+knowing what finkel was, we did drink; and it boozed us exceedingly."
+
+"You are very honest about it, Scott."
+
+"We are about everything, sir. We slept at a hotel, and when we went
+down to the wharf to go on board, we learned that the ship's company
+had gone to Trolldoldiddledy Falls. As we felt pretty well, we thought
+we would take a train, see a little of the inside of Sweden, and meet
+the ship's company at Squozzlebogchepping."
+
+"Where's that?" asked Mr. Blaine.
+
+"I can't give you the latitude and longitude of the jaw-breaker, but
+it was at the junction of the two railways, where the party came down
+from the canal. We were sure we should find our fellows there, but
+the Swedish figures bothered us, and we made a mistake in the hour the
+train was due."
+
+"But the Swedish figures are the same as ours," suggested the head
+steward.
+
+"Are they? Well, I don't know what the matter was, except that we were
+five minutes too late for the train. That's what's the matter."
+
+"How very unfortunate it was you lost that train!"
+
+"It was, indeed; I couldn't have felt any worse if I had lost my
+great-grandmother, who died fifty years before I was born. These
+honest fellows felt bad, too."
+
+"Of course they did."
+
+"We took the next train to Gottenburg; but when we arrived, the ship
+had sailed for Copenhagen, which I was more anxious to see than any
+other place in Northern Europe."
+
+"And for that reason you came on to Stockholm."
+
+"No, sir; you are too fast, Mr. Blaine. Your consequent does not agree
+with the antecedent. There was no steamer for Copenhagen for a couple
+of days."
+
+"There was a steamer within an hour after you reached Gottenburg in
+that train, and an hour before the sailing of the canal steamer; and
+Mr. Peaks went down in her," said Mr. Blaine.
+
+"We didn't know it."
+
+"Certainly you did not."
+
+"We knew of no steamer till Monday, and we were afraid, if we went in
+her, that we should be too late to join the ship in Copenhagen; and
+with heroic self-denial, we abandoned our fondly-cherished hope of
+seeing the capital of Denmark, and hastened on to Stockholm, so as
+to be sure and not miss the ship again. These honest fellows," said
+Scott, pointing to Sanford and his companions, "agreed with us that
+this was the only safe course to take."
+
+"I see that you struggled very violently to join your ship, and I only
+wonder that such superhuman efforts should have failed."
+
+"They have not failed, sir," protested Scott. "The ship will come
+here, and we will join her then, or perish in the attempt."
+
+"Are you not afraid some untoward event will defeat your honest
+intentions?"
+
+"If they are defeated it will not be our fault."
+
+"No, I suppose not; but whom have you there?" inquired the head
+steward, for the first time observing Ole, who had pressed forward to
+hear Scott's remarks. "Ole?"
+
+"Yes, sir; that's the valiant Ole, of Norway," replied the joker.
+
+His presence was satisfactorily explained by the coxswain.
+
+"Why did you desire to leave the ship, Ole? Didn't we use you well?"
+asked Mr. Blaine.
+
+"Very well indeed, sir; but I was bashful, and did not wish to see
+some people in Christiansand," replied the waif.
+
+"What people?"
+
+Ole evaded all inquiries, as he had a dozen times before, and declined
+to explain anything relating to his past history. Mr. Blaine said he
+had heard the party had taken the canal steamer, and he immediately
+proceeded to Stockholm by railroad. He at once telegraphed to Mr.
+Lowington at Copenhagen, that he had found all the absentees, and
+asked for instructions.
+
+"Here's a go, and the game is up," said Sanford, in a whisper, when he
+met Stockwell alone.
+
+"That's so; what will he do with us?"
+
+"I don't know; I rather like this mode of travelling. But we are
+caught now."
+
+"Perhaps not; we may find some way out of it. According to Blaine's
+cue we are to be regarded as runaways. If that is the case, I don't
+join the ship this summer," said Stockwell, very decidedly.
+
+"Nor I either," added Sanford.
+
+Before dark, Mr. Blaine received a despatch from the principal,
+directing him to take the next train to Malmoe, which is the town in
+Sweden opposite Copenhagen. The head steward did not communicate its
+contents to his charge that night, but he called all of them at four
+o'clock the next morning, and by good management on his part, they
+were on the train which left Stockholm at six o'clock. At
+Katherineholm, where the party ate an excellent breakfast, Mr. Blaine
+unhappily missed three of his company.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+UP THE BALTIC.
+
+
+The excursionists of the squadron slept soundly after their trip to
+Elsinore, and Clyde Blacklock, true to the promise he had made to
+himself, kept awake to watch his chances to escape. Not a sound was to
+be heard in the ship, and the intense silence was even more trying to
+the prisoner in the brig than the noise and bustle of the whole crew
+when awake. Ryder, the fourth lieutenant, and two seamen had the
+anchor watch on deck. Each officer served two hours, and was required
+at the stroke of the bell, every half hour, to walk through the
+steerage, where no light was permitted after nine o'clock.
+
+Clyde took the saw from its hiding-place under the stairs, and
+commenced work on one of the slats. The instrument was very sharp, but
+the noise it made promised to betray him, and he was obliged to use it
+with extreme caution. Bracing the slat with one shoulder, he worked
+the saw very slowly, so that the wood should not vibrate. The process
+was very slow, and twice he was obliged to conceal his saw and lie
+down on the bed at the approach of the officer of the watch. After
+working more than an hour, he succeeded in cutting off one of the
+slats, just far enough above the deck to avoid the nails with which
+it was secured. But it was fastened at the top as well as at the
+bottom, and when he pulled it in to wrench it from its position, it
+creaked horribly, and he was obliged to labor with it another half
+hour, before he could pull it in far enough to permit his exit. In the
+middle of the operation he was obliged to restore it partly to its
+position, and lie down again, to escape the observation of the officer
+of the anchor watch.
+
+His care and patience were finally successful, though, if the sleepers
+around him had not been very tired, some of them must have been
+disturbed even by the little noise he made. The removal of the single
+slat gave him an opening of about nine inches, which was narrow even
+for him; but he contrived to work himself through it. Putting the slat
+back into its original position, and wedging it down with a copper, so
+that the means of his escape might not readily be seen, he crept
+carefully forward to the ladder under the forecastle, where he paused
+to consider the means by which he should escape from the vessel. He
+began to realize that this was a more difficult matter than getting
+out of the brig. He knew that the anchor watch consisted of an officer
+and two seamen.
+
+While he was thinking of the matter, eight bells struck; and he was
+aware that the watch was changed at this hour. Retiring to the kitchen
+to wait for a more favorable moment, he heard the two seamen come down
+the ladder to call the relief. As they entered one of the mess-rooms,
+he ran up the ladder, and concealed himself under the top-gallant
+forecastle. In a few moments he heard the relief on deck, and from
+his hiding-place saw the officer on the quarter-deck with a lantern in
+his hand. The two seamen took their places on the top-gallant
+forecastle, where they could see the entire deck, and any boat or
+vessel that approached the ship.
+
+Clyde did not regard the situation as very hopeful. The night was
+chilly, and he did not feel at all inclined to swim ashore, which he
+had intended to do, as a last resort. The boats were all hoisted up
+at the davits, as if to provide for just such cases as his own. He
+listened with interest to the conversation of the watch above him;
+but he could not identify their voices, and was unable to determine
+whether it was safe for him to address them. In fact he was unable to
+determine upon anything, and bell after bell struck without finding
+him any better prepared to make a move. At four bells, or two o'clock
+in the morning, the watch was relieved again, and Clyde remained in
+the same unsettled state of mind. But when the two seamen went below
+to call the relief, he changed his position, crawling into the waist,
+where he disposed himself under the lee of the rail. Over his head was
+the fourth cutter, one of the smallest of the boats.
+
+Clyde could see the dark form of the officer walking to and fro on the
+quarter-deck, and his presence was not favorable to any movement. He
+found the cleats where the falls of the boat were made fast, and he
+was considering the practicability of casting them off, letting the
+cutter drop into the water, and then sliding down on a rope. The
+officer of the anchor watch seemed to be the only obstacle in his way.
+He began to experiment with the falls. Casting off one of them, he
+carefully let the rope slip over the cleat till he had lowered the bow
+of the cutter about two feet. He repeated the operation upon the stern
+fall. He let off the rope so gradually that the noise did not attract
+the attention of any of the watch.
+
+Five bells struck, and the officer descended to the steerage. While he
+was absent, Clyde dropped each end of the boat about four feet more,
+and then coiled himself away until the officer had returned to his
+station. But it was nearly daylight, and he was compelled to hurry on
+with his work. Little by little he let out the falls, till the fourth
+cutter floated in the water. When the officer went below, at six
+bells, he climbed upon the rail, and slid down on the bow fall into
+the boat. Casting off the falls, he pushed the cutter astern of the
+ship, and for the first time began to feel as though he were free. He
+was afraid to use an oar, lest the noise should attract the attention
+of the watch on deck. He felt that he had managed his escape with
+exceeding cleverness, and was unwilling to risk anything now in the
+moment of success. The wind carried the boat clear of the ship, and
+he lay down in the stern sheets, so that if the officer on the
+quarter-deck discovered the cutter, he might suppose no one was in
+her.
+
+He had occupied this position but a moment before he heard a rushing
+noise near him, and, raising his head, discovered a small schooner,
+under full sail, headed directly upon him. He had hardly time to stand
+up before the bow of the vessel was within his reach.
+
+"Hallo!" shouted he, in terror, for the thought of being carried under
+the keel of the schooner was appalling.
+
+But the cutter was crowded aside by the vessel, and Clyde sprang upon
+her deck, while his boat went astern of her.
+
+Too late, the schooner luffed up, and Clyde seated himself on the rail
+to catch his breath. Two men came to him, and spoke in Norwegian.
+
+"I speak English," replied Clyde.
+
+"You are English?" said the captain.
+
+"Yes; I don't speak anything else."
+
+"I speak English," replied the skipper, as he went back to the helm,
+and Clyde followed him.
+
+"Where are you bound?" asked the runaway.
+
+"To Stockholm."
+
+"You are Danish, I suppose."
+
+"No, Norwegian."
+
+"All the same."
+
+"What shall I do with you?"
+
+"I will go to Stockholm with you, and pay my passage, if you like,"
+added Clyde, who wished to get as far as possible from the ship.
+
+"You shall, if you like; or you shall work, if you please. I lose a
+young sailor, and I want another, to work in his place."
+
+"No; I will go as a passenger, or not at all," replied Clyde, very
+decidedly.
+
+"What you do in a boat so late in the night?" asked the skipper.
+
+"I was going on shore to find a steamer for Stockholm. I will pay you
+twenty species for my passage," added the runaway.
+
+"You are very kind to pay so much. You shall have my berth; but it
+will be long time to Stockholm in my vessel."
+
+"No matter; I am satisfied."
+
+"I shall pick up the boat you lose?"
+
+"No; never mind the boat," answered Clyde, impatiently, as he glanced
+at the ship.
+
+The captain questioned him about the boat more particularly; but the
+fugitive gave such answers as he pleased. Though the skipper was very
+rough and savage to the two men who formed his crew, he treated his
+passenger at first with much consideration. The little cabin of the
+schooner was a nasty hole, and if Clyde had not been very sleepy, he
+could hardly have closed his eyes there; but before the vessel was out
+of sight of Copenhagen, his slumber was deep and heavy.
+
+The shout of the fugitive when he was in danger of being run down had
+been heard by the officer on the quarter-deck of the Young America. He
+saw the collision, and discovered the cutter when it went astern of
+the vessel; but he did not suspect that it belonged to the ship. The
+schooner filled away on her course again, after she had luffed up, and
+the boat was adrift. He deemed it his duty to secure it before it was
+stove by some early steamer from Malmoe, or elsewhere, and calling the
+two seamen, he directed them to lower the fourth cutter. But the
+fourth cutter was already lowered, and the officer began to think that
+the boat adrift was the missing one. The third cutter, therefore, was
+used, and when the two seamen had pulled off in her, the officer went
+below and called Peaks.
+
+The boatswain took his lantern, and went to the brig, as soon as he
+was told that the fourth cutter was adrift. The bird had flown. The
+door was secure, and all the slats were apparently in their place;
+but the appearance of a small quantity of saw-dust indicated where the
+breach had been made. A little pressure forced in the sawn slat, and
+Peaks understood why the prisoner had only desired to be left alone.
+
+"Were you all asleep on deck?" asked Peaks of the officer.
+
+"No, sir; I have not been asleep on duty," replied Beckwith, the
+officer.
+
+"Didn't you see him lower the boat?"
+
+"Of course I did not."
+
+"I don't see how it was done, then," added Peaks. "But where is the
+prisoner?"
+
+"I don't know. I suppose he went on board that small schooner that run
+down the cutter."
+
+"Where is she?"
+
+Beckwith pointed to a sail headed to the south-east, which was just
+visible in the faint light of the early morning.
+
+"He is out of our reach for the present," said Peaks, in utter
+disgust, as he descended the steps to the main cabin.
+
+Mr. Lowington was informed of the escape of Clyde, but no steamer
+could be obtained at that early hour to chase the schooner, and the
+matter was permitted to rest as it was. When all hands turned out in
+the morning, a strict investigation was made; but no one who had
+served on the anchor watch was able to give any information. No one
+had seen the boat lowered, and no one had heard the saw. Peaks went on
+shore, and ascertained that the Norwegian schooner Rensdyr had sailed
+at an early hour. She had cleared for Stockholm, and was doubtless on
+her way there. The principal was so much interested in the fate of
+Clyde, or rather in his reformation, that he determined to follow up
+the fugitive. The English steamer Newsky, from London to Stockholm,
+was then in port, and when she sailed that day, Peaks was sent in her
+to intercept the runaway on his arrival at Stockholm.
+
+After breakfast, Mr. Andersen came on board, inspected the ship, and
+witnessed some of the evolutions in seamanship, which included the
+manning of the yards in honor of his visit. At the invitation of Paul
+Kendall he went on board of the Grace, and took a sail up the Sound,
+dining on board, and returning in the afternoon. The students again
+went on shore, and visited the Rosenberg Palace, an irregular
+structure of red brick, with a high peaked roof and four towers.
+Connected with it is an extensive and beautiful garden, adorned with
+statues. The palace was built for Christian IV., in 1604, but is no
+longer a royal residence, being filled with various national
+collections of arms, medals, and antiquities, including many
+historical mementos of kings and other great men of Denmark. Among
+them are the saddle, bridle, and caparisons, the sword and pistols,
+presented by King Christian IV. to his eldest son at his marriage.
+They are adorned with diamonds, pearls, and gold, and cost a million
+francs in Paris.
+
+In the afternoon the students marched to the Palace of Frederiksberg,
+whose park is a favorite resort of the people of the city. The
+building contains nothing worth seeing; indeed, portions of it have
+been rented for the use of private families; but the garden is
+beautifully laid out with kiosks, bridges over the winding canal,
+on which float a great number of white swans, with little islands,
+studded with groves and pleasant grassy slopes. The palace stands on
+the only eminence near Copenhagen. On pleasant days, especially on
+Sundays, this park is filled with family picnics, little parties
+bringing their own lunch, and spending the day in these delightful
+groves.
+
+During the remainder of the day the students wandered over the city,
+each seeking what pleased him most. When they went on board the
+vessels, they were entirely satisfied with what they had seen of
+Copenhagen, and were ready to visit some other city. Very early the
+next morning, Mr. Blaine, with all but three of the absentees, came on
+board. The head steward told his story, and Scott and Laybold told
+their story; the former, as usual, being the spokesman. The wag told
+the whole truth, exactly as it was; that they were ashamed to come on
+board while so tipsy, and had missed the train at the junction.
+
+"Have you drank any finkel since?" asked the principal.
+
+"No, sir; not a drop. One glass was enough for me," replied Scott.
+
+"And you, Laybold?"
+
+"No, sir."
+
+"You may both return to your duty," added the principal.
+
+Both were astonished at being let off so easily; but Mr. Lowington was
+satisfied that they spoke the truth, and had not intended to run away.
+The others were also ordered to attend to their duty, but with the
+intimation that their conduct would be investigated at the return of
+Sanford and Stockwell, who, with Ole, had left the party at
+Katherineholm.
+
+The signal for sailing was flying on board of the Young America, and
+at seven o'clock the squadron was under way, continuing the voyage "up
+the Baltic." No notice seemed to be taken of the absence of Sanford
+and Stockwell, but everybody believed that the principal knew what he
+was about. The wind was tolerably fresh from the west-south-west, and
+the squadron made rapid progress through the water, logging ten knots
+all day. The students watched with interest the villages on the coast
+of Denmark, with their sharp, red roofs, and the swarms of
+fishing-boats moored in front of them. The shores of Sweden were in
+sight all the time, and at three o'clock in the afternoon land was
+also seen on the starboard bow. But the masters, who were constantly
+watching the chart, were not at all astonished, though the seamen
+were.
+
+"What land is that, Scott?" asked Laybold.
+
+"That? Why, don't you know?"
+
+"I'm sure I don't. I know Germany is over there somewhere, but I
+didn't expect to run into it so near Sweden."
+
+"That's Gabogginholm."
+
+"Is it in Germany?"
+
+"No; it's an island, at least a hundred and fifty miles from Germany.
+The Baltic is rather a big thing out here."
+
+"How do you remember those long names, Scott?"
+
+"What long names?"
+
+"Such as the name of that island. I couldn't recollect such a word ten
+minutes."
+
+"Nor I either. I know them by instinct."
+
+"What did you say the name of the island is?"
+
+"Gastringumboggin."
+
+"That isn't what you said before."
+
+"I've forgotten what I did say it was. You musn't ask me twice about a
+name, for I say I can't remember," laughed Scott.
+
+"You are selling me."
+
+"Of course I am; and you go off cheaper than any fellow I ever saw
+before. I haven't the least idea what the land is, except that it must
+be an island not less than a hundred and fifty miles from Prussia."
+
+"That's Bornholm," said Walker, a seamen, who had heard the name from
+the officers. "It's an island twenty-six miles long and fifteen wide,
+belongs to Denmark, and has thirty-two thousand inhabitants, and a lot
+of round churches on it. That's what the fellows on the quarter-deck
+say."
+
+"Precisely so," replied Scott. "You have learned your lesson well.
+What is the principal town on that island?"
+
+"I don't know," answered Walker.
+
+"Stubbenboggin," said Scott.
+
+"Who told you so?"
+
+"My grandmother," laughed the wag, as he turned on his heel, and
+walked away.
+
+Towards night the wind subsided, and the squadron was almost becalmed;
+but a light breeze sprang up after dark, and in the morning the ship
+was off the southern point of Oland, an island ninety miles long by
+ten wide, and well covered with forests. On the narrow strait which
+separates it from the main land is Calmar, a town of historic
+interest, in Sweden. At noon the southern point of Gottland was seen,
+and Scott insisted upon calling it "Gabungenboggin," though the real
+name was soon circulated. It is eighty miles long by thirty-three
+wide, and contains fifty-four thousand inhabitants. Wisby is the only
+town. The island is noted for its beautiful climate, which makes it a
+pleasant resort for summer tourists.
+
+At sunrise on the following morning, the ship leading the squadron was
+approaching the islands which cover the entrance to the harbor of
+Stockholm. Pilots were taken by the several vessels, and the fleet
+entered the archipelago, through which it was to sail for thirty
+miles. At first the openings were very wide, and not much of the shore
+could be seen; but soon the distances grew less, and the shores were
+studded with villages and fine residences. The little steamers--some
+of them not so large as the ship's first cutter--began to appear; and
+at eight o'clock the Young America let go her anchor between Staden
+and Skeppsholm, off the quay near the palace, which was crowded with
+steamers.
+
+"Here we are, Laybold," said Scott, when the sails had been furled,
+and every rope coiled away in its place.
+
+"That's so. What's that big building on the shore?"
+
+"That's the Slottenboggin," laughed Scott.
+
+"No, you don't! You can't sell me again with your boggins."
+
+"I'll bet half a pint of salt water it is the king's palace."
+
+"Very likely it is; and here is a fine building on the other side."
+
+"That must be the Wobbleboggin."
+
+"No, it isn't."
+
+"Perhaps it isn't; but twig these little steamers," added Scott,
+pointing to one of the snorting miniature boats that plied across the
+arm of the sea opposite the quay. "The pilot and engineer, and a boy
+to take the fares, seem to be the officers, crew, and all hands."
+
+"And in some of them all hands are boys."
+
+The boats seemed to contain nothing but the engine and boiler, which
+were in a compact mass, without covering. All around them were seats.
+Forward of the engine was a little steering-wheel, hardly more than a
+foot in diameter, at which the pilot--often a boy--was seated.
+
+"I want a complete view of the city," said Captain Lincoln, at this
+moment coming into the waist with the surgeon and Norwood. "I think I
+can get it from the main cross-trees."
+
+"I am too stiff to go aloft," replied Dr. Winstock; "but I commend
+your plan."
+
+"I'm with you," added Norwood, as he followed the captain up the main
+rigging.
+
+From this lofty position on the cross-trees the two officers obtained
+a good idea of the situation of the city. The three islands which form
+the central portion of the city lay in the strait leading to the Maeler
+Lake. The north and south suburbs were on each side of it. Skeppsholm,
+Castellholm, and the Djurg[)a]rden--Deer Garden--were other islands,
+lying nearer the Baltic. The finest portion of the city seemed to be
+the northern suburbs. While they were studying the panorama of the
+place, all hands were called to lecture, and they hastened to their
+places in the steerage. Professor Mapps was at his post, with the map
+on the foremast.
+
+"Sweden is called _Sverige_ by the natives; La_ Suede_ by the French;
+_Schweden_ by the Germans; _La Svezia_ by the Italians; and _Suecia_
+by the Spaniards. It contains one hundred and sixty-eight thousand
+square miles--a territory equal in extent to the six New England
+States, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, and Delaware united. Its
+population is a little over four millions--about the same as that of
+the State of New York. It is nearly a thousand miles long from north
+to south, with an average breadth of two hundred miles. By far the
+greater portion of it is very sparsely settled, for it extends from
+fifty-five degrees of north latitude up to the arctic regions. It
+contains no important rivers, though its large lakes and arms of the
+sea are valuable as avenues of navigation. Over eighty lakes are
+mentioned."
+
+The instructer described the Wenern and Wettern Lakes, and the Goeta
+Canal, which passes through them.
+
+"Sweden is an agricultural country, and its principal manufactures are
+lumber and iron. It has six hundred and thirty-eight miles of railway,
+and the steamers which you see at the quay, mostly of iron, and built
+in Sweden, ply to all parts of the country.
+
+"The average of the temperature in Stockholm is forty-two degrees, or
+twenty-five degrees for winter, and sixty-two degrees for summer. From
+what you have already seen of Sweden, I think you will consider it
+very like New England. The interior has about the same physical
+features, and you will see there similar houses, barns, and fences.
+
+"The government is a limited monarchy, based on the constitution of
+1809, and since amended. The king must be a Lutheran. He has an
+absolute veto on the acts of the legislature. The Diet, or Parliament,
+consists of two houses, the upper of which is composed of one hundred
+and twenty-seven members, or one for every thirty thousand
+inhabitants. The lower house consists of one hundred and eighty-eight
+members, fifty-five of whom are elected by the towns, and the rest by
+the rural districts, at the rate of one for every forty thousand
+people. Property qualifications are required for either house, and all
+members must be Protestants. They are paid a salary of three hundred
+and thirty-five dollars of our money, and their travelling expenses,
+for the session of four months.
+
+"I have incidentally spoken of the history of Sweden in connection
+with that of Norway and Denmark. The kingdom was founded by Odin, and
+for a long period the history of the country is a record of the wars
+with Norway and Denmark, and it was finally conquered by Margaret, and
+by the Union of Calmar the three kingdoms were consolidated in 1397.
+It became a Christian nation early in the eleventh century. Sweden was
+doubtless the first anti-slavery power; for, during the reign of
+Birger II., about 1300, a law against the sale of slaves was enacted,
+with the declaration that it was 'in the highest degree criminal for
+Christians to sell men whom Christ had redeemed by his blood.'
+
+"In 1520 Gustavus Ericsson excited a rebellion against Christian II.,
+of Denmark, who had murdered his father and many other Swedes. This
+revolution was successful three years later, and its leader made king,
+under the title of Gustaf I., often called Gustavus Vasa, or Wasa. He
+was succeeded by his son, and the throne continued in his family; but
+the next notable sovereign was Gustaf II., or Gustavus Adolphus. His
+grandfather, Gustavus Vasa, had established the Protestant religion
+in Sweden; but his nephew, Sigismond, who had been elected king of
+Poland, and had become a Catholic, succeeded to the throne.
+Endeavoring to change the established religion, he was deposed, and
+the succession changed. This caused a war between Sweden, and Russia,
+and Poland. Gustavus was only eighteen when he came to the throne,
+with this war bequeathed to him. He was full of energy, and defeated
+his enemies on all sides. Austria was the leader of the Catholic party
+in Europe, which was striving to restore the papal supremacy. Gustavus
+Adolphus held a similar relation to the Protestant party. He was
+engaged in the Thirty Years' War, and won many decisive victories. He
+captured Munich, and overran Bavaria, but was finally killed in the
+battle of Luetzen, in 1632. By his prowess and skill he raised Sweden
+to the rank of one of the first kingdoms of Europe.
+
+"He was succeeded by his daughter, Christina, then only six years old.
+She reigned but seven years after she became of age, abdicating in
+favor of her cousin Charles X. She died in Rome, after a dissolute
+and shameful life, and was interred in St. Peter's Church. Charles was
+at war with the Danes during his brief reign, and achieved the daring
+military feat of crossing the Great and Little Belts on the ice, which
+enabled him to dictate his own terms of peace with the Danes. The
+Swedes consider him one of their greatest kings. His son, Charles XI.,
+followed him, and ruled for thirty-seven years. After a brief period
+of peace, another war with Denmark ensued, which resulted to the
+ultimate advantage of Sweden. This king contrived to obtain from the
+Diet the gift of absolute power, which, in the hands of his son and
+successor, Charles XII., nearly ruined the nation. Russia, Poland, and
+Denmark combined to rob him of a considerable portion of his kingdom,
+and Charles XII., at the age of sixteen, displayed an energy and a
+skill far beyond his years. He conquered a peace with Denmark first,
+and then turned his attention to the rest of his enemies, whom he
+overwhelmed and subdued. With nine thousand men he defeated a Russian
+army of forty thousand, under Peter the Great, at Narva. He vanquished
+the armies of Poland and Saxony, and attempted the conquest of Russia,
+but was utterly defeated in the battle of Pultowa, and escaped into
+Turkish territory, where he remained for five years. Here he brought
+about a war between Turkey and Russia, and the army of the former shut
+up that of Peter the Great in the Crimea. The lady who was afterwards
+Catharine I. bribed the grand vizier with all her jewels to allow the
+Russians to escape, and this event utterly ruined the hopes of the
+monarch of Sweden. Finally the Turks drove him from their country,
+and, after various vicissitudes, he arrived in his own, and was
+killed, in 1718, at Frederikhald, in Norway. While he was away, his
+enemies had been appropriating his territory, and Sweden was reduced
+to a second-class power.
+
+"The Diet elected Ulrica Eleonora, sister of Charles, queen, who
+resigned in favor of her husband, Fredrik I. Another war with Russia
+followed, and Sweden lost more of her territory. Adolf Fredrik
+succeeded to the throne in 1751, who was elected by the Diet. Still
+another war with Russia was carried on during his reign. His son,
+Gustaf III., with the aid of his soldiers, increased the powers of the
+crown; but he was assassinated at a ball, in 1792, and his son, Gustaf
+Adolf IV., came to the throne. His policy involved the nation in a
+war with the allies, and he lost Finland and Pomerania. He was so
+unpopular that he was compelled to abdicate, and his uncle, Charles
+XIII., was raised to the throne in 1809. He had no children, and the
+Prince of Holstein-Augustenburg was elected as his successor; but he
+was assassinated, and one of Napoleon's generals, Bernadotte, was
+chosen crown prince, and in 1818 he succeeded to the throne as Charles
+XIV. His reign was a successful one, and his efforts to secure Norway
+to his adopted country made him popular even before he was king. He
+espoused the cause of the allies against Napoleon, and was well cared
+for by them when the affairs of Europe were finally settled.
+
+"His son Oscar was his heir, and came to the throne at the death of
+his father in 1844. He was followed by his son, Charles XV., the
+present king, in 1859.
+
+"The army organization is similar to that of Denmark, and about one
+hundred and fifty thousand men are available for service. The navy
+contains four monitors on the American plan, which were invented by
+John Ericsson, a Swede, two iron-clad gunboats, twenty-one steamers,
+and sixteen sailing vessels, besides a great number of floating
+batteries, and other stationary craft. Although only about six
+thousand sailors are actually in the navy, nearly thirty thousand can
+be had in case of war."
+
+The professor finished his lecture, and the students hastened on deck,
+to see more of the sights which surrounded them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+THE CRUISE IN THE LITTLE STEAMER.
+
+
+"What's the use, Stockwell?" said Sanford, as the absentees seated
+themselves on the train for Malmoe, under the charge of the head
+steward. "Blaine got his despatch from the principal last night, but
+he didn't say a word to us till this morning. He's playing a sharp
+game."
+
+"That's so," replied Stockwell. "He don't mean to trust us out of
+sight again."
+
+"Don't say a word to any fellow," whispered the coxswain. "You and I
+will fight it out on our own hook."
+
+"I understand. It is plain enough that Blaine regards us as runaways,
+and I suppose the principal will do the same."
+
+"Very likely; and when we get to Russia, all we shall have to do will
+be to count our fingers in the steerage, while the rest of the fellows
+are seeing the Russians," continued Sanford, who now appeared to
+regard "the independent excursion without running away" as a failure.
+"We shall not even see anything more of Stockholm. I don't like the
+idea."
+
+"Well, what are you going to do about it?" asked Stockwell.
+
+"At the first chance we will leave this train, and make our way back
+to Stockholm," whispered Sanford. "There is a steamer to St.
+Petersburg twice a week, and we have money enough to carry us
+through."
+
+"Right; I am with you."
+
+"We will take Ole, if you like, to do the talking for us."
+
+"I don't object."
+
+The train stopped at Katherineholm about half past nine. The boys had
+taken nothing but the Swedish early breakfast of coffee and a biscuit,
+and the head steward allowed them to have a more substantial meal,
+each paying for himself. They entered the restaurant, where, on a
+large table in the centre of the room, were great dishes of broiled
+salmon and veal cutlets, with high piles of plates near them. Each
+passenger helped himself at these dishes, and then seated himself at
+one of the little tables. When he had finished his salmon, he helped
+himself to veal cutlets; beer and coffee were served by the waiters.
+Sanford and Stockwell hurried through the meal, and went to the
+counter where the woman received payment. She asked them some question
+and they were obliged to call Ole, to know what she said. She asked if
+they had had beer or coffee, which was extra, the meal being one and a
+half rix dalers. She gave them a tin check; for at this place they
+seemed to be sharper than the Swedes usually are, and the check was to
+enable them to get out of the restaurant. A man at the door received
+it, and no one was allowed to pass without it; and thus none could
+leave without paying for the meal.
+
+"Finished your breakfast, Ole?" said Sanford, carelessly.
+
+"Yes; and that salmon was very good."
+
+"First rate. Come with us, Ole," added the coxswain, as he led the way
+out of the restaurant.
+
+The trio entered the station, and as no one followed them, they left
+by the front door. Dodging behind the buildings, they soon cleared the
+station. Taking the public road, they walked for half an hour at a
+rapid pace, and then halted to consider the situation. The train had
+gone, for they had heard its departure; but whether Mr. Blaine had
+gone or not was an open question.
+
+"What next?" said Sanford, as he seated himself at the side of the
+road.
+
+"Take the train back to Stockholm," replied Stockwell.
+
+"Perhaps Blaine did not go on, after he missed us."
+
+"Of course he did. But whether he did or not, the train has gone, and
+he cannot take us to Copenhagen. If we find him at the station, why,
+we took a little walk, and lost the train, you know."
+
+"That's played out," replied Sanford. "We have missed the train too
+many times, already. What time does the next one return to Stockholm?"
+
+"I don't know. Let's go back to the station."
+
+This course was adopted, and on their arrival they learned that they
+could return to Stockholm at half past two in the afternoon. The man
+in charge said that the gentleman with the young men had been looking
+for them. Sanford replied, through Ole, that they had lost the train,
+but would return to Stockholm, and start again the next morning.
+After dining in the restaurant, the runaways--as they certainly were
+now, if not before--departed, and arrived at their destination in
+about three hours. They immediately went to the office on the quay,
+and learned that a steamer would leave for St. Petersburg at two
+o'clock on Friday morning.
+
+"Can we engage places now?" asked Sanford,--for the clerk in charge
+spoke English.
+
+"Certainly."
+
+"We will take three places in one room," added the coxswain.
+
+"Have you passports?" asked the clerk.
+
+"No, sir."
+
+"We cannot sell you tickets then."
+
+"Not without passports?" exclaimed Sanford, appalled at this new
+difficulty.
+
+"No; and passports must be _vise_ by the Russian consul before we can
+issue a ticket."
+
+"We are down then," added the coxswain. "My passport is on board of
+the ship."
+
+"So is mine," added Stockwell.
+
+"And I never had any," said Ole.
+
+The party left the steamer's office, and were unable to devise any
+means of overcoming the obstacle. They went to the Hotel Rydberg
+again, and consulted the porter, who had been very kind to them
+before. This functionary is entirely different in European hotels
+from those of the same name in the United States. He stands at the
+entrance, usually dressed in uniform, to answer all inquiries of
+guests, and to do all that is required of the clerks in American
+hotels. He assured the anxious inquirers that, even if they got into
+Russia, their passports would be immediately demanded, and that no one
+could remain in any city there over night without one. The American
+minister in Stockholm would give them the required documents.
+
+"But Ole, here, is a Norwegian," suggested Sanford.
+
+"No matter. Have him put into your passport as your courier or
+servant."
+
+"All right; we will see him to-morrow," replied the coxswain; and the
+problem seemed to be solved.
+
+The next day they went to the American legation, but the minister had
+gone to Upsala for a week, and the secretary declined to issue the
+passports, because the boys could not prove that they were citizens of
+the United States. Vexed and discouraged, they wandered about the city
+till Friday noon, when an English steamer came into port. They stood
+on the quay, watching the movements of the passengers as they landed.
+They had almost concluded to take a steamer to Stettin, Luebeck, or
+some other port in Germany; but Russia was a strange land, and they
+were not willing to abandon the idea of seeing its sights.
+
+"I wonder whether this steamer goes any farther," said Stockwell.
+
+"I don't know," added Sanford.
+
+"Perhaps she goes to St. Petersburg. It may be her officers are not so
+particular about the confounded passports."
+
+"But you can't stay in Russia over night without one, even if you get
+there."
+
+"The American minister will fit us out with them. I expect to find a
+letter of credit in St. Petersburg, and that will prove that I am an
+American."
+
+"Let us go on board of the steamer and ascertain where she is going,"
+continued Sanford, as he led the way across the plank, which had been
+extended from the deck to the stone pier.
+
+The boys went upon the hurricane deck, where they had seen an officer
+who looked as though he might be the captain.
+
+"Do you go to St. Petersburg, captain?" asked the coxswain.
+
+"No; we return to London, touching only at Copenhagen," replied the
+officer.
+
+"That's too bad!" exclaimed Stockwell.
+
+"So it is," said a tall man, who had followed the runaways up the
+steps from the lower deck. "But you are not going to St. Petersburg
+without the rest of us--are you?"
+
+Sanford was startled, and turning sharp around, saw Peaks, who had
+come out of the cabin as the boys stepped on board. He had followed
+them to the hurricane deck, and suspecting that something was wrong,
+he had waited till the coxswain's question betrayed their intention.
+
+"No, we are not going to St. Petersburg; we are waiting for the ship,"
+replied Sanford, recovering his self-possession in an instant.
+
+"O, you are? All right, then. But the last I heard of you was, that
+you were all on your way to Copenhagen to join the ship," added the
+boatswain.
+
+"So we were, Mr. Peaks; but after we had taken breakfast at a station
+on the railroad, we went to have a little walk, and see something of
+the country. We thought we had time enough, but the train--confound
+it!--went off without us. We were terribly provoked, but we couldn't
+help ourselves, you know; so we made our way back to this city."
+
+"I think you must have been very badly provoked," said Peaks.
+
+"O, we were,--honor bright."
+
+"But you thought you would go over to St. Petersburg before the ship
+arrived?"
+
+"Certainly not; we had no idea of going to St. Petersburg."
+
+"And that's the reason you asked whether this steamer was going
+there,--because you hadn't any idea of going."
+
+"We know very well that we can't go to St. Petersburg without our
+passports, which are on board of the ship," protested Sanford.
+
+"Yes, I understand; but who is this?" asked Peaks, as he glanced at
+Ole.
+
+"That's Ole Amundsen; don't you remember him?"
+
+"I think I do. And he is on a lark with you."
+
+"We are not on a lark. We have been trying with all our might to find
+the ship, for the last fortnight; and we are bound to do so, or die in
+the attempt," said Stockwell.
+
+"And Ole has been with you all the time?"
+
+"Yes, sir; we couldn't have done anything without him."
+
+"And would have been on board the ship long ago, if you hadn't had
+him to speak the lingo for you."
+
+"When we tell you our story, you will see that we have done our best
+to find the ship."
+
+"I don't know that I care to hear any more of your story; it's too
+much story for me, and you can tell it to Mr. Lowington, who will be
+here by to-morrow, I think. Very likely you can take me to a good
+hotel."
+
+"Yes, sir; we are staying at the Hotel Rydberg, which is the best in
+Stockholm."
+
+"Heave ahead, then."
+
+The runaways led the way.
+
+"Do you talk the Swedish lingo, Ole?" asked the boatswain.
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+"Where did you stow yourself, when we went into Christiansand?"
+
+"In the second cutter, sir," replied the waif, laughing.
+
+"Exactly so; you were to go with her crew when they left."
+
+"No, sir; I didn't know a single one of them."
+
+"What did you hide for, then?"
+
+"Because I didn't want the pilot to see me."
+
+"Why not?" asked the boatswain.
+
+But this was as far as Ole would go in that direction. Neither man nor
+boy could extort from him the secret he so persistently retained. A
+short walk brought the party to the Hotel Rydberg.
+
+"This gentleman wants a room," said Sanford to the porter.
+
+"No. 29," said the man, calling a servant. "Did you get your
+passports, young men?"
+
+Sanford drew back, and made energetic signs to the porter to keep
+still; but the official failed to understand him.
+
+"No; they haven't got them yet," replied Peaks. "The fact is, all the
+passports are on board the ship."
+
+"But the young gentlemen were very anxious to obtain new ones, so that
+they could go to St. Petersburg. They intended to leave by this
+morning's steamer, but no tickets can be had without passports."
+
+Both Sanford and Stockwell shook their heads to the stupid porter, who
+was remarkably intelligent on all other points; but somehow he did not
+see them, or could not comprehend them.
+
+"It's too bad about those passports--isn't it, my lads?" laughed
+Peaks, turning to the runaways. "Here's more proof that you hadn't the
+least idea of going to St. Petersburg."
+
+"I was very sorry for the young gentlemen, and did the best I could
+for them," added the gentlemanly porter.
+
+"No doubt you did; and I'm very much obliged to you for the trouble
+you took," replied the good-natured boatswain.
+
+"No. 29, sir?" interposed the servant, with the key in his hand.
+
+"Ay, ay, my hearty. But, young gentlemen, I want to save you from any
+more terrible disappointments and awful vexations in finding the ship.
+I'm going up to my bunk, and if I don't find you here when I come
+down, I shall call on the American consul, and ask him to put the
+police on your track. You shall find the ship this time, or perish in
+the attempt, sure."
+
+"Here's a go!" exclaimed Stockwell, as the servant conducted the
+boatswain up the stairs to his chamber.
+
+"What did you say anything to him about the passports for?" snapped
+Sanford to the porter.
+
+The official in uniform by this time understood the matter, and
+apologized, promising to make it all right with the tall gentleman,
+and to swear that not a word had been said to him or any one else
+about passports. It was his business to please everybody, and his
+perquisites depended upon his skill in doing so.
+
+"What did Peaks mean about police?" said Sanford, as the trio seated
+themselves near the front door of the hotel.
+
+"He means what he says; confound him, he always does!" replied
+Stockwell. "He intends to treat us as runaway seamen, and have us
+arrested if we attempt to leave."
+
+"We are trapped," muttered Sanford. "What's Peaks doing up here?"
+
+"I don't know, unless he is looking for us."
+
+"It makes no difference now. We are caught, and we may as well make
+the best of it."
+
+"It's all up with us," added the coxswain. "Peaks knows what he is
+about, and there isn't much chance of getting the weather-gage of
+him."
+
+The boatswain came down in a short time. He was cool and good-natured,
+and knew exactly how to deal with the parties in hand.
+
+"Now, young gentlemen, if you are going to Russia, don't let me
+detain you. If you wish to go any where else, I shall not meddle
+myself. I shall let the American consul attend to the matter. I have
+business here, and I can't keep an eye on you. But if you want to be
+fair and square, and not break your hearts because you can't find the
+ship, just be in sight when I want to know where you are."
+
+"We shall be right on your heels all the time, Mr. Peaks. If you don't
+object, we will go with you. We know the way round Stockholm, and will
+help you all we can," said Stockwell.
+
+"That's sensible."
+
+"We will show you out to the Djurgarden," added Sanford.
+
+"Never mind the shows. I want Ole to talk for me, and I don't object
+to your company," replied the boatswain.
+
+"I beg your pardon, sir," said the porter, presenting himself to Peaks
+at this moment. "I made a bad mistake. It was not these young
+gentlemen who wanted the passports. It was another party."
+
+"Exactly. I understand," replied the boatswain, turning to the boys
+with a significant smile on his bronzed face.
+
+"They were waiting for you, and were very anxious to join their ship."
+
+"It was very kind of them to wait for me, when they hadn't the least
+idea I was coming. All right, my hearty; you needn't trouble yourself
+to smooth it over. How much did you pay him for those lies, Sanford?"
+
+"Not a cent, sir!"
+
+"Never mind; don't bother your heads any more about it. I understand
+the matter now as well as I shall after you have explained it for a
+week," answered Peaks, as he left the hotel, followed by the
+discomfited trio.
+
+The boatswain did not deem it expedient to explain to them his
+business in Stockholm. He found people enough who spoke English, so
+that he was able to dispense with the services of Ole as interpreter.
+He ascertained that no such vessel as the Rensdyr had yet arrived, and
+satisfied with this information, he went out to the Djurgarden with
+his charge, dined at Hasselbacken, and made himself quite comfortable.
+
+After breakfast the next morning, with Ole's assistance, he chartered
+one of the little steamers, which was about the size of the ship's
+second cutter, and, taking the trio with him, sailed out towards the
+Baltic.
+
+"Where are you going, Mr. Peaks?" asked Sanford, deeply mystified by
+the movements of the boatswain.
+
+"I'm going to make a trip down to the Baltic, to see what I can see,"
+replied Peaks.
+
+"Are you going for the fun of it?"
+
+"Well, that depends upon how you view it. I suppose you are going for
+the fun of it, whether I am or not."
+
+"But we would like to know what is up," added Sanford.
+
+"Young gentlemen should not be inquisitive," laughed the old salt.
+
+"Because, if you are going out to meet the ship, in order to put us on
+board--"
+
+"I'm not going for any such purpose," interposed the boatswain. "I
+shouldn't take all that trouble on your account."
+
+"But where are you going?"
+
+"That's my affair, my lad."
+
+"We don't mean to give you any trouble on our account," said Sanford,
+who could not readily dispossess himself of the belief that the
+expedition was to put his party on board of the ship when she hove in
+sight.
+
+"Of course you don't, my tender lambs. You have been so anxious to
+find the ship, and get on board, it would be cruel to suspect you of
+any mischief," laughed Peaks.
+
+"But, honor bright, Mr. Peaks, whatever we intended, we are ready now
+to do just what you say, and return to the ship as soon as we can."
+
+"You are all nice boys. You have had a good time, and I think you
+ought to be satisfied."
+
+"We are satisfied; but I suppose we shall have no liberty again, after
+we go on board."
+
+"Perhaps you will; the principal isn't hard with the boys when they
+come right square up to the mark; but you can't humbug him."
+
+"But, honestly, Mr. Peaks, we tried to find the ship, and--"
+
+"There, there, lads," interposed the boatswain, "I don't believe you
+will have any liberty."
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"Because you want to humbug the principal; and me, too--but that's no
+account. If you want to make the best of it, toe the mark. Don't have
+any lies in your heart or on your tongue. Tell the whole truth, and
+you will make more by it; but tell the truth whether you make anything
+or not."
+
+"You won't believe anything we say," protested Sanford.
+
+"Of course I won't, when you are lying. I call things by their right
+names."
+
+"We didn't stave the boat at Christiansand."
+
+"Yes, you did," replied Peaks, plumply.
+
+"If you think so, it's no use talking."
+
+"Certainly not; don't talk, then."
+
+Sanford was not prepared for so grave a charge as that of causing the
+accident to the second cutter; and if the principal was of the same
+mind as the boatswain, the case would go hard with the runaways. The
+coxswain and Stockwell went into the bow of the little steamer to
+discuss their situation, which they did very earnestly for a couple of
+hours.
+
+"There's the ship!" exclaimed Sanford, as he identified the Young
+America, half a mile distant, leading the squadron into the harbor of
+Stockholm.
+
+"So it is; now we are in for it. Peaks has come out here with us to
+make sure that we don't get away from him," added Stockwell.
+
+"If I had known as much last night as I know now, I would have cleared
+out, in spite of consul and police. If we are to be charged with
+smashing the second cutter, we shall not go on shore again this
+summer."
+
+"That's so. But this boat is not headed for the ship. Peaks don't see
+her."
+
+"Yes, he does; there isn't a craft of any sort within five miles of us
+that he don't see."
+
+"There's the ship, Mr. Peaks," shouted Stockwell.
+
+"I see her."
+
+But the boatswain continued on his course, paying no attention to the
+ship. The squadron disappeared among the islands, and the steamer went
+out into the Baltic, keeping well in towards the shore. When any small
+schooner appeared, he ran up and examined her very carefully,
+overhauling three in this manner in the course of the forenoon. At
+noon the boatswain piped all hands to dinner, for he had procured a
+supply of provisions at the hotel. Though he had chartered the steamer
+with Ole acting as an interpreter, he gave no hint of his plans or
+purposes. He made signs to the helmsman where to go, and occasionally
+gave directions through Ole.
+
+The fourth small schooner that he examined proved to be the Rensdyr,
+and Peaks identified her by seeing Clyde Blacklock, who stood on the
+forecastle, looking out for the approaches to Stockholm. Possibly he
+had seen the Young America, which passed the schooner, though a mile
+distant.
+
+"Lay her alongside that small vessel," said Peaks to Ole.
+
+"That one!" exclaimed Ole, whose brown face seemed to grow pale, as he
+looked at the Rensdyr.
+
+"That's what I say, my lad."
+
+The waif actually trembled; but he spoke to the helmsman, who
+immediately put the boat about, and headed her towards Stockholm.
+
+"No," said Peaks, sternly. "That vessel."
+
+He pointed to her, and Ole spoke again to the steersman, but without
+any better result. The boatswain was not to be thwarted. Going
+forward, he took the little wheel into his own hands, and headed the
+steamer towards the Rensdyr. Indicating by his signs what he wanted,
+the man at the helm seemed to be quite willing to obey orders when he
+knew what was wanted.
+
+"Don't go to that vessel, Mr. Peaks," cried Ole, in an agony of
+terror.
+
+"Why, my lad, what's the matter with you?"
+
+"That's the Rensdyr!"
+
+"I know it."
+
+"He will kill me," groaned Ole.
+
+"Who will?"
+
+"Captain Olaf."
+
+"Well, who's he?"
+
+"He is the captain of the Rensdyr. He will kill me."
+
+"No, he won't, my hearty. You shall have fair play. Who is he?"
+
+"My step-father, Olaf Petersen. He beat me and starved me, and I ran
+away from the Rensdyr in the boat."
+
+"O, ho! The story is out--is it?"
+
+"That's the whole truth, sir; it is, Mr. Peaks," protested Ole. "Don't
+go to her!"
+
+"Don't you be alarmed. You shall have fair play," added the stout
+boatswain, as the steamer ran alongside the schooner, and the man at
+the bow made her fast.
+
+[Illustration: BOARDING THE RENSDYR. Page 344.]
+
+Peaks was on her deck in another instant, and had Clyde by the collar.
+
+"I want you, my lad," said he.
+
+"Let me alone!" cried the Briton, who had not recognized his tyrant
+till he was in his grasp, for the simple reason that he did not expect
+to see him at that time and place.
+
+"No use to kick or yell, my jolly Briton. I never let go," added the
+boatswain.
+
+At this moment there was a yell from the steamer. Captain Olaf no
+sooner discovered his lost step-son, than he sprang upon him like a
+tiger. Ole howled in his terror. Peaks dragged Clyde on board the
+steamer, and tossing him on the seat at the stern, turned his
+attention to the skipper of the schooner.
+
+"Steady! hold up, my hearty," said he, pulling the old Norwegian from
+his prey.
+
+"My boy! My son! He steal my boat, and leave me," said Olaf,
+furiously.
+
+"He says you didn't treat him well; that you starved and beat him."
+
+"I'll bet Ole told the truth," interposed Clyde, who seemed suddenly
+to have laid aside his wrath. "Captain Olaf is a brute."
+
+"How's that, my lad? Do you know anything about it?" asked Peaks.
+
+"I know the skipper is the ugliest man I ever met in my life,"
+answered Clyde.
+
+"Won't you except me, my bold Briton?"
+
+"No; I paid my passage, and haven't had enough to eat to keep soul and
+body together. Besides that, he tried to make me work, and I did do
+some things. If I had been obliged to stay on board another day, I
+should have jumped overboard," continued Clyde. "I begin to think I
+was a fool for leaving the ship."
+
+"I began to think so at the first of it," added Peaks.
+
+"Ole is my son; I must have him," growled the skipper.
+
+"I have nothing to do with Ole; he may go where he pleases," said the
+boatswain.
+
+Olaf spoke to his step-son in his own language, and for a few moments
+the dialogue between them was very violent.
+
+"Cast off, forward, there; give them the Swedish of that, Ole,"
+shouted Peaks.
+
+"Must I go on board of the Rensdyr?" asked the trembling waif.
+
+"Do just as you please."
+
+"Then I shall stay, and go to the ship."
+
+"No, he shall not; he shall come with me," said Olaf, making a spring
+at Ole.
+
+But Peaks, who had promised to see fair play, interfered, and with no
+more force than was necessary, compelled the skipper to return to the
+schooner. The steamer shoved off, and amid the fierce yells of Olaf,
+steamed towards Stockholm. As she went on her way, Ole told his story.
+At the death of his father, who was the master of a small vessel, he
+had gone to England with a gentleman who had taken a fancy to him, and
+worked there a year. The next summer he had accompanied his employer
+in an excursion through Norway, and found his mother had married Olaf
+Petersen. She prevailed upon him to leave his master, and he went to
+sea with her husband. Then his mother died, and the skipper abused
+him to such a degree, that he determined to leave the vessel. Olaf had
+twice brought him back, and then watched him so closely, that he could
+find no opportunity to repeat the attempt when the Rensdyr was in
+port.
+
+On the day before the ship had picked him up, Olaf had thrashed him
+soundly, and had refused to let him have his supper. Olaf and his man
+drank too much finkel that night, and left Ole at the helm. Early in
+the evening, he lashed the tiller, and taking to the boat, with the
+north star for his guide, pulled towards the coast of Norway. Before
+morning he was exhausted with hunger and fatigue. He had lost one oar
+while asleep, and the other was a broken one. At daylight he saw
+nothing of the Rensdyr, and feeling tolerably safe, had gone to sleep
+again, when he was awakened by the hail from the ship.
+
+"But why did you leave the ship?" asked Peaks.
+
+"Because I was afraid of the pilot. I thought he and other people
+would make me go back to Olaf."
+
+"Olaf has no claim upon you. He is neither your father nor your
+guardian."
+
+"I was afraid."
+
+"Where was your vessel bound?"
+
+"To Bremen, where she expected to get a cargo for Copenhagen. I
+suppose she found another cargo there for Stockholm."
+
+"I don't blame you, Ole, for leaving him," said Clyde. "Olaf is the
+worst man I ever saw. When he got drunk, he abused me and the men. I
+had to keep out of his way, or I believe he would have killed me,
+though I was a passenger, and paid my fare."
+
+At three o'clock in the afternoon, the little steamer ran alongside
+the ship, and the party went on board, though the principal and all
+the officers and crew were on shore.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+STOCKHOLM AND ITS SURROUNDINGS.
+
+
+After the professor's lecture on board of the ship, the students were
+piped to dinner. According to his usual custom, Paul Kendall, with his
+lady, took rooms at the hotel, and in this instance his example was
+followed by Shuffles. Dr. Winstock and Captain Lincoln had already
+accepted an invitation from Paul to spend the afternoon with him in a
+ride through the city; and as soon as the boats landed at the quay,
+they hastened to keep the appointment, while the students scattered
+all over the city to take a general view.
+
+"Well, Paul, how do you find the hotel?" asked the doctor, when the
+party were seated in the carriage.
+
+"Very good; it is one of the best hotels I have seen in Europe."
+
+"It has an excellent location, but I think there was no such hotel
+when I was here before, and I staid at the Hoetel Kung Carl."
+
+"This is a bath-house," said the _commissionnaire_, as the carriage
+turned the corner at the hotel, and he pointed to a large, square
+building, with a court-yard in the middle.
+
+"That looks well for the cleanliness of the people, if they support
+such fine establishments as that."
+
+"Three classes of baths, sir," added Moeller, the guide. "In the first
+class you have a dressing-room, and an attendant to scrub you, and
+showers, douches, and everything of the sort. This is Drottninggatan,
+the principal street of the city," added the man, as the carriage
+turned into another street.
+
+"In other words, Queen Street," explained the surgeon.
+
+"It is rather a narrow street for the principal one," said Paul.
+
+"All the streets of Stockholm are narrow, or nearly all; and very few
+of them have sidewalks."
+
+"This street looks very much like the streets at home. The shops are
+about the same thing. There's a woman in a queer dress," added Captain
+Lincoln.
+
+"That's a Dalecarlian woman. They used to row the boats about the
+waters of the city, coming down from Dalecarlia to spend the summer
+here; but the little steamers have taken the business all away from
+them. They hired a boat for the season, and paid the owner one half of
+the fares."
+
+"Their costume is rather picturesque," added Paul.
+
+"But that woman is far from handsome," laughed Mrs. Kendall.
+
+"None of them are pretty," replied the doctor.
+
+The dress was a rather short petticoat, with a fanciful bodice, in
+which red predominated. Quite a number of them were seen by the party
+during their stay in Stockholm, but all of them had coarse features
+and clumsy forms.
+
+The carriage returned to the centre of the city by another street,
+passing through Carl XIII. Torg, or square, where stands the statue of
+that king.
+
+"There is the Cafe Blanche, where they have music every afternoon in
+summer, with beer, coffee, and other refreshments. The Swedes are very
+fond of these gardens," said Moeller. "Here is the Hotel Rydberg. This
+is Gustaf Adolf Torget, and that is his statue."
+
+Crossing the bridge to the little island in the stream, the carriage
+stopped, to enable the party to look down into the garden, which is
+called Stroemparterren, where a band plays, and refreshments are
+dispensed in the warm evenings of summer. Passing the immense
+palace, the tourists drove along the Skeppsbron, or quay, which is the
+principal landing-place of the steamers. Crossing another bridge over
+the south stream, or outlet of Lake Maeler, they entered the southern
+suburb of the city, called Soedermalm. Ascending to the highest point
+of land, the party were conducted to the roof of a house, where a
+magnificent view of the city and its surroundings was obtained.
+
+"We will sit down here and rest a while," said the doctor, suiting the
+action to the words. "This promontory, or some other one near it, was
+formerly called Agne's Rock, and there is a story connected with it.
+Agne was the king of Sweden about 220 B.C. In a war with the Finns, he
+killed their king, and captured his daughter Skiolfa. The princess,
+according to the custom of those days, became the wife, but
+practically the slave, of her captor. She was brought to Sweden, where
+Agne and his retainers got beastly drunk on the occasion of
+celebrating the memorial rites of her father. Skiolfa, with the
+assistance of her Finnish companions, passed a rope through the
+massive gold chain on the neck of the king, and hung him to a tree,
+beneath which their tent was pitched. Having avenged the death of her
+father, the princess and her friends embarked in their boats, and
+escaped to Finland."
+
+"They finished him, then," laughed Captain Lincoln. "But what sort of
+boats had they?"
+
+"I don't know," replied Dr. Winstock.
+
+"Could they cross the Baltic in boats?"
+
+"Yes. When you go to Finland you will find that the course will be
+through islands nearly all the way. There is no difficulty in crossing
+in an open boat."
+
+"What is the population of Stockholm?" asked Paul.
+
+"One hundred and thirty-five thousand," replied Moeller. "It was
+founded by King Birger in 1250."
+
+"There is a monitor," said Paul, pointing to the waters near
+Castelholmen, not far from the anchorage of the squadron.
+
+"We have four in the Swedish navy, and Russia has plenty of them.
+Ericsson, who invented them, was a Swede, you know."
+
+After the tourists had surveyed the panorama to their satisfaction,
+they descended, and entering the carriage, drove over to the
+Riddarholm, where the guide pointed out the church, the statue of
+Gustavus Vasa, the house of the Nobles, and other objects of interest.
+Returning to the quay, they stopped to look at the little steamers
+which were whisking about in every direction.
+
+"That is the National Museum," said Moeller, pointing to a large and
+elegant building across the stream.
+
+"I should like to sail in one of those little boats," said Mrs.
+Kendall.
+
+"We can go over and back in ten minutes, if you like," added the
+guide.
+
+"Let us go."
+
+The party alighted from the carriage, and entered the little boat.
+
+"How much did you pay, Paul?" asked Grace.
+
+"The fare is no larger than the boat. It is three oere each person."
+
+"How much is that?"
+
+"Let me see; eight tenths of a cent, or less than a halfpenny,
+English."
+
+The excursionists returned without landing.
+
+"I should like to go again," said Grace. "It is delightful sailing in
+such dear little steamers."
+
+"If you please, we will ride over to the Djurgarden, and return by the
+steamer, which will land us at the Stroemparterre," said the guide.
+
+This proposition was accepted, and by a circuitous route they reached
+the place indicated, which, in English, is the Deer Garden. It is on
+an island, separated from the main land by a channel. The southern
+portion of it is a thickly-populated village, but the principal part
+of the island is laid out as a park, of which the people of Stockholm
+are justly proud. It was originally a sterile tract of land: the first
+improvements converted it into a deer park for the royal use; but
+Gustaf III. and Charles (XIV.) John, as Bernadotte was styled,
+turned it into a public park. It is laid out in walks and avenues
+beautifully shaded with oaks and other trees. The land is undulating,
+and parts of it command splendid views of the islands and watercourses
+in the vicinity. On the outskirts is an asylum for the blind and for
+deaf mutes. Rosendahl, a country house, built by Charles John in 1830,
+and often occupied by him, is quite near the park.
+
+The party drove through the principal avenues of the garden, and
+stopped at the bust of Bellman, the great poet of Sweden, whose
+birthday is annually celebrated here with music and festivities.
+Around the park are various tea-gardens, cafes, and other places of
+amusement, including a theatre, circus, and opera-house for summer
+use. There is an Alhambra, with a restaurant; a Tivoli, with a
+concert-room; a Novilla, with a winter garden, and a concert hall for
+summer. The tourists stopped at Hasselbacken, which is celebrated for
+its good dinners at moderate prices. The visitors seated themselves in
+a broad veranda, overlooking a garden filled with little tables, in
+the centre of which was a kiosk for the music. The viands, especially
+the salmon, were very nice, and the coffee, as usual, was excellent.
+After dinner a short walk brought the party to the landing-place of
+the little steamers, where, paying eight oere, or about two cents,
+each, they embarked. The boat flew along at great speed for such a
+small craft, whisked under the Skeppsholm bridge, and in a few moments
+landed the tourists at the circular stone quay, which surrounds the
+Stroemparterre. Paul and his lady walked to the hotel, and the doctor
+and the captain went to the Skeppsbron, where a boat soon conveyed
+them to the ship.
+
+Sanford and Stockwell had been on board several hours, and had had
+time to make up their minds in regard to their future course. They had
+considered the advice of the boatswain, and finally concluded to adopt
+it. Clyde Blacklock was as tame as a parlor poodle. His experience in
+running away, especially after his three days on board of the Rensdyr,
+was far from satisfactory.
+
+"I suppose I must go into that cage again," said he, when he went on
+board.
+
+"That depends on yourself," replied Peaks. "If you say that you don't
+intend to run away again, we shall not put you in the brig."
+
+"I think I won't," added Clyde.
+
+"You think?"
+
+"Well, I know I won't. I will try to do the best I can."
+
+"That's all we ask," said Peaks. "You can say all this to the
+principal."
+
+Mr. Lowington returned earlier than most of the ship's company, and
+Peaks reported to him immediately. The coxswain and his associate were
+called up first.
+
+"We have come on board, sir," said Sanford, touching his cap.
+
+"I see you have. You have been gone a long time, and I have been told
+that you had some difficulty in finding the ship," added the
+principal.
+
+"We have concluded to tell the whole truth, sir," said Sanford,
+hanging his head.
+
+"I am very glad to hear that."
+
+"We didn't wish to find the ship."
+
+"Can you explain the accident by which the second cutter was stove at
+Christiansand?"
+
+"I did it on purpose; but no other fellow was to blame, or knew
+anything about it."
+
+"I am astonished to think you should expose the lives of your crew, by
+pushing your boat right into the path of a steamer."
+
+"I didn't do it, sir, till the steamer had stopped her wheels. I
+wanted to get on board of her, and leave the ship. In Norway, I
+cheated the rest of the party, and led them out of the way."
+
+"How could you do that?"
+
+"I told Ole what to say."
+
+"Then you wished to travel alone?"
+
+"Yes, sir."
+
+Sanford and Stockwell made a clean breast of it, explaining how they
+had lost trains and steamers, and thus avoided returning to the ship.
+
+"Then Ole is a rogue as well as the rest of you, it seems."
+
+"He did what I told him to do, and paid him for doing," replied
+Sanford.
+
+"He is a runaway, too," interposed the boatswain, who proceeded to
+tell the story of the waif. "The boy has suffered a good deal from the
+ill-treatment of his step-father."
+
+"I am sorry for him; but his character does not seem to be up to the
+average of that of his countrymen. I don't think we want him on
+board," replied Mr. Lowington. "As you say this Olaf has no claim for
+his services, we will see about him."
+
+The Rensdyr had by this time arrived at the quay, and it was not
+believed that Captain Olaf would permit his step-son, whose services
+seemed to be of so much value to him, to escape without making an
+effort to reclaim him. After all hands had returned from the shore, he
+put in an appearance, and seeing Peaks in the waist, directed his
+steps towards him. The profusion of fine uniforms, the order and
+discipline that reigned on deck, and the dignified mien of the
+instructors who were walking back and forth, seemed to produce an
+impression upon the mind of the rough skipper, for he took off his
+hat, and appeared to be as timid as though he had come into the
+presence of the king.
+
+"Good evening, Captain Olaf," said the boatswain.
+
+"I want the boy Ole," replied the skipper, bowing, and returning the
+salutation.
+
+"You must talk with the principal about that."
+
+"I don't understand."
+
+Peaks conducted Olaf to the quarter-deck, where Mr. Lowington was
+conversing with Mr. and Mrs. Kendall, who had come on board to visit
+their old friends.
+
+"This is the man that claims Ole," said the boatswain.
+
+"I want the boy, sir," added Captain Olaf, bowing as gracefully as he
+knew how.
+
+"If Ole chooses to go with you, he may go," replied the principal.
+
+"He does not choose to go."
+
+"I certainly shall not compel him to go," continued Mr. Lowington.
+
+"I will make him go."
+
+"I shall allow no violence on board of this ship."
+
+"But he is my boy; the son of my wife that is dead."
+
+"He is not your son, and you have no more claim on him than I have.
+The boy is an orphan. Have you been appointed his guardian?"
+
+This question was out of Olaf's depth in the English language; but it
+was translated into Danish by Professor Badois, and the skipper did
+not pretend that he had any legal authority over the boy.
+
+"But I have fed and clothed him, and he must work for me," said he.
+
+"Ole says you did not feed him, and he had nothing but a few dirty
+rags on when we picked him up. I have nothing to do with the matter.
+Ole is free to go or stay, just as he pleases," replied the principal,
+turning away from the skipper, to intimate that he wished to say
+nothing more about the matter.
+
+"The boy is here, and I shall make him go with me," said Olaf, looking
+ugly enough to do anything.
+
+Mr. Lowington glanced at Peaks, and appeared to be satisfied that no
+harm would come to Ole. Olaf walked back into the waist, and then to
+the forecastle, glancing at every student he met, in order to identify
+his boy.
+
+"See here, Norway; there comes your guardian genius," said Scott,
+who, with a dozen others, had gathered around the trembling waif,
+determined to protect him if their services were needed. "Bear a hand,
+and tumble down the fore-hatch. Herr Skippenboggin is after you."
+
+Ole heeded this good advice, and followed by his supporters, he
+descended to the steerage. Olaf saw him, and was about to descend the
+ladder, when Peaks interfered.
+
+"You can't go down there," said he, decidedly.
+
+"I want the boy," replied Olaf.
+
+"No visitors in the steerage without an invitation."
+
+"I will have Ole;" and the skipper began to descend.
+
+"Avast, my hearty," interposed the boatswain, laying violent hands on
+Olaf, and dragging him to the deck.
+
+Bitts, the carpenter, and Leach, the sailmaker, placed themselves
+beside the boatswain, as the Norwegian picked himself up.
+
+"You may leave the ship, now," said Peaks, pointing to the
+accommodation stairs.
+
+Olaf looked at the three stout men before him, and prudence triumphed
+over his angry passions.
+
+"I will have the boy yet," said he, as he walked to the stairs,
+closely attended by the three forward officers.
+
+He went down into his boat, declaring that he would seize upon Ole the
+first time he caught him on shore.
+
+"Where is Clyde?" asked Mr. Lowington, as soon as the savage skipper
+had gone.
+
+"He is forward, sir; he behaves like a new man, and says he will not
+run away," replied Peaks.
+
+"Send him aft."
+
+"Ay, ay, sir."
+
+Clyde went aft. He was a boy of quick impulses and violent temper. He
+had been accustomed to have his own way; and this had done more to
+spoil him than anything else. He had to learn that there was a power
+greater than himself, to which he must submit. He had twice run away,
+and failed both times. Three days of fear and absolute misery on board
+of the Rensdyr had given him time to think. He determined, when he
+reached Stockholm, to return to his mother, and try to be a better
+boy. Peaks, in the little steamer, had come upon him like a ghost. He
+had expected never again to see the ship, or his particular tormentor;
+and to have the latter appear to him in such an extraordinary manner
+was very impressive, to say the least. He realized that he must
+submit; but this thought, like that of resistance before, was only an
+impulse.
+
+Clyde submitted, and was even candid enough to say so to the
+principal, who talked to him very gently and kindly for an hour,
+pointing out to him the ruin which he was seeking.
+
+"We will try you again, Clyde," said Mr. Lowington. "We will wipe out
+the past, and begin again. You may go forward."
+
+The next day was Sunday, and for a change, the officers and crews of
+the several vessels were permitted to land, and march to the English
+church in Stockholm. The neat and pleasant little church was crowded
+to its utmost capacity by the attendance of such a large number. Mr.
+Agneau, the chaplain, was invited to take a part in the service, and
+as Mrs. Kendall, Mrs. Shuffles, and many of the ship's company were
+good singers, the vocal music was better than usual.
+
+On Monday morning commenced the serious business of sight-seeing in
+Stockholm. The royal palace, one of the largest and finest in Europe,
+and the most prominent building in the city, was the first place to be
+visited. It is four hundred and eighteen feet long, by three hundred
+and ninety-one wide, with a large court-yard in the middle, from which
+are the principal entrances. The lower story is of granite; the rest
+of brick, covered with stucco. The students walked through the vast
+number of apartments it contains; through red chambers, green
+chambers, blue chambers, and yellow chambers, as they are designated,
+through the royal chapel, which is as large as a good-sized church,
+and through the throne-room, where the king opens the sessions of the
+Diet. Several were devoted to the Swedish orders of knighthood. The
+ceilings and walls of the state apartments are beautifully adorned
+with allegorical and mythological paintings.
+
+The chamber of Bernadotte, or Charles John, remains just as it was
+during his last sickness. On the bed lies his military cloak, which
+he wore in his great campaigns. His cane, the gift of Charles XIII.,
+stands in the room. The walls are covered with green silk, and adorned
+with portraits of the royal family. The apartments actually occupied
+by the present king were found to be far inferior in elegance to many
+republican rooms. His chamber has a pine floor, with no carpet; but
+it looked more home-like than the great barn-like state-rooms. In a
+series of small and rather low apartments are several collections of
+curious and antique articles, such as a collection of arms, including
+a pair of pistols presented to the king by President Lincoln; and of
+pipes, containing every variety in use, in the smoking-room. The
+king's library looks like business, for its volumes seemed to be for
+use rather than ornament. The billiard-room is quite cosy, and his
+chamber contains photographs of various royal personages, as the
+Prince of Wales, the Queen of England, and others, which look as
+though the king had friends, and valued them like common people. His
+majesty paints very well for a king, and the red cabinet contains
+pictures by him, and by Oscar I. The queen's apartments, as well as
+the king's, seemed to the boys like a mockery of royalty, for they
+were quite plain and comfortable. The entire palace contains five
+hundred and eighty-three rooms.
+
+The whole forenoon was employed in visiting the palace, and the
+students went on board the vessels to dinner. As the day was pleasant,
+a boat excursion to Drottningholm was planned, and the fourteen boats
+of the squadron were soon in line. A pilot was in the commodore's
+barge, to indicate the course. Passing under the North Bridge, the
+excursion entered the waters of the Maeler Lake. A pull of two hours
+among beautiful islands, covered with the fresh green of spring,
+through narrow and romantic passages, brought them to their
+destination. In some places, within five miles of Stockholm, the
+scene was so quiet, and nature so primitive, that the excursionists
+could have believed they were hundreds of miles from the homes of
+civilization. Two or three of the islands had a house or two upon
+them; but generally they seemed to be unimproved. The boats varied
+their order at the command of Commodore Cumberland, and when there
+were any spectators, nothing could exceed their astonishment at the
+display.
+
+At Drottningholm, or Queen's Island, there is a fine palace, built by
+the widow of Charles X., and afterwards improved and embellished by
+the kings of Sweden. Attached to it is a beautiful garden, adorned
+with fountains and statues. The party went through the palace, which
+contains a great many historical paintings, and some rooms fitted up
+in Chinese style. As the students were about to embark, a char-a-banc,
+a kind of open omnibus, drawn by four horses, drove up to the palace,
+and a plainly-dressed lady alighted. She stood on the portico, looking
+at the students; and the pilot said she was the Queen Dowager, wife of
+Oscar I. Of course the boys looked at her with quite as much interest
+as she regarded them. The commodore called for three cheers for the
+royal lady, who was the daughter of Eugene Beauharnais, and
+granddaughter of the Empress Josephine. She waved her handkerchief in
+return for the salute, and the students were soon pulling down the
+lake towards Stockholm.
+
+The next forenoon was devoted to the Royal Museum, which has been
+recently erected. It contains a vast quantity of Swedish antiquities
+and curiosities, with illustrations of national manners and customs.
+It contains specimens of the various implements used in the ages of
+wood, stone, bronze, and iron, collections of coins and medals, armor,
+engravings, sculptures, and paintings, including a few works of
+the great masters of every school in Europe. The students were
+particularly interested in what Scott irreverently called the "Old
+Clothes Room," in which were deposited in glass cases the garments and
+other articles belonging to the Swedish kings and queens, such as the
+cradle and toys of Charles XII., and the huge sword with which he
+defended himself against the Turks at Bender; the sword of Gustavus
+Vasa; the costume of Gustaf III., which he wore when he was shot in
+the opera-house by Ankarstroem; the baton of Gustaf Adolf, and the
+watch of Queen Christina.
+
+In the afternoon the students made an excursion by steamer to
+Ulriksdal, the summer residence of Bernadotte, Oscar I., and of the
+present king. It is a beautiful place, and is filled with objects of
+historical interest. The furniture is neat, pretty, and comfortable.
+The chamber of the king is the plainest of all, but the bed was used
+by Gustaf II. in Germany. Every chair, table, and mirror has its
+history. There is a collection of beer mugs in one chamber, and of
+pipes in another. The place is full of interest to the curious. In the
+water in front of the palace were several gilded pleasure-boats, and a
+fanciful steamer for the use of the royal family.
+
+The steamer in which the party had gone to Ulriksdal was one of the
+larger class, though the company was all she could carry. She made her
+way through the several arms of the sea, between the islands, passing
+through two drawbridges. For the return trip four of the smaller
+steamers had been engaged, each of which would carry about fifty
+boys. A short distance from the palace, the boats turned into a narrow
+stream, passing under bridges, in places so contracted that the engine
+had to be stopped, and the banks were thoroughly washed. Then they
+entered a lagoon, bordered with villas, and surrounded by pleasant
+scenery. Landing at a point in the northern suburb, most of the
+students walked through the city to the quay, though several omnibuses
+ply between this point and the centre of the city.
+
+The next day opened with a visit to Riddarholm. The church, or
+Riddarholmskyrkan, on this island, was formerly a convent, but is now
+the mausoleum of the most celebrated kings of Sweden. It was once a
+Gothic structure; but the addition of several chapels on the sides,
+for monuments, has completely changed the appearance of the structure.
+It is remarkable for nothing except the tombs within it. Formerly it
+contained a number of equestrian figures, clothed in armor, which was
+valued as relics of the ancient time, including that of Birger Jarl,
+the founder of the city, and of Charles IX.; but all these have been
+removed to the National Museum, which is certainly a more appropriate
+place for them. On each side of the church are the sepulchral chapels
+of Gustavus Adolphus, Charles XII., Bernadotte, and Oscar I. The Queen
+Desiree, wife of Bernadotte, and sister-in-law of Joseph Bonaparte,
+with others of the royal family, and some of the great captains of the
+Thirty Years' War, are buried here. In the chapels of Gustavus and
+Charles XII. are placed many of the trophies of their victories, such
+as flags, drums, swords, and keys.
+
+The party then visited the Riddarhus, where the nobles meet, which is
+the scene of several great historical events, and contains the shields
+of three thousand Swedish nobles. From this point the tourists went to
+Mosebacke, a celebrated tea garden, on the high land in the southern
+suburb, where they ascended to the roof of the theatre in order to
+obtain a view of the city and its surroundings.
+
+On Thursday, the students made an excursion to Upsala, the ancient
+capital of Sweden, which contains a fine old cathedral, where Gustavus
+Vasa and two of his wives are buried. His tomb was hardly more
+interesting to the Americans than that of Linnaeus, the great botanist,
+who was born in Upsala, and buried in this church. Other Swedish kings
+are also buried here. The party visited the university, which contains
+some curious old books and manuscripts, such as an old Icelandic Edda;
+the Bible, with written notes by Luther and Melanchthon; the Journal
+of Linnaeus, and the first book ever printed in Sweden, in 1483. The
+house of the great botanist and the botanical garden were not
+neglected. The tourists returned to Stockholm in a special steamer,
+through an arm of Lake Maeler, and landed at the Riddarholm. On Friday
+some of the students went to the Navy Yard, and on board of a monitor,
+while others wandered about the city and its suburbs.
+
+After spending a week in the harbor, the voyagers felt that they had
+seen enough of Sweden; and early on Saturday morning, with a pilot on
+board of each vessel, the squadron sailed for the Aland Islands, in
+the Baltic, where the principal decided to pass a week. The vessels
+lay in the channels between the islands, and the students attended to
+the regular routine of study and seamanship. Occasional excursions
+were made on shore, mostly at the uninhabited islands. Journals of
+what had been seen in Norway, Denmark, and Sweden were written up; but
+the students were very anxious to visit Russia.
+
+Ole Amundsen was very careful to avoid his step-father while he
+remained in Stockholm. He hardly went on shore, so great was his dread
+of the cruel skipper of the Rensdyr; and no one rejoiced more heartily
+than he to leave the Swedish waters. Mr. Lowington did not desire to
+retain him on board; but the waif begged so hard to remain, and the
+students liked him so well, that he was finally engaged as an
+assistant steward in the steerage, at twelve dollars a month; but he
+made double this sum, besides, out of the boys, by the exercise of his
+genius in mending clothes, cleaning shoes, and similar services, which
+the students preferred to pay for, rather than do themselves.
+
+Clyde Blacklock kept his promise as well as he could, and soon learned
+his duty as a seaman. Though he certainly improved, his violent temper
+and imperious manners kept him continually in hot water. He could not
+forget his old grudge against Burchmore, and during an excursion on
+one of the Aland Islands, he attacked him, but was soundly thrashed
+for his trouble, and punished on board when his black eye betrayed
+him. While he is improving there is hope for him.
+
+The runaways promised so much and behaved so well, that none of them
+were punished as yet, though Sanford was deprived of his position as
+coxswain of the second cutter; but whether they were to be allowed any
+liberty in Russia, they were not informed.
+
+At the close of the week among the islands, the squadron was headed
+for Abo, in Finland, which is now a province of Russia; and what they
+saw and did there, and in other parts of the vast empire, will be
+related in NORTHERN LANDS, OR YOUNG AMERICA IN RUSSIA AND PRUSSIA.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Up The Baltic, by Oliver Optic
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK UP THE BALTIC ***
+
+***** This file should be named 26653.txt or 26653.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/6/6/5/26653/
+
+Produced by David Edwards, Anne Storer and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from scans of public domain material
+produced by Microsoft for their Live Search Books site.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.